Cerberus

NOV CTES Cerberus TM User Guide
Coiled Tubing, Jointed Pipe, Wireline, and Slickline
Version: 12.7
Publication Date: March 01, 2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES 1
Copyright
Copyright © 2017 NOV CTES
All rights reserved.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this documentation, the publisher assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Information in this documentation is subject to change without notice. No liability is assumed for
damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Cerberus v12.7 is 64-bit compatible and supports Windows® 10™, Windows 7™ or Windows 8™ operating system using
.NET Framework 4.0.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JCRAFT, INC. OR ANY CONTRIBUTORS TO
THIS SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES ii
About Cerberus
When running tools into and out of a well on coiled tubing, wireline, slickline, or jointed pipe, operations use Cerberus
modeling software to accurately predict and analyze cumulative forces and coiled tubing fatigue at each stage of a job.
Cerberus can determine whether the target depth can be reached, the desired tasks performed, and the equipment safely
returned to surface.
A key feature of the application is its ability to model conditions in deviated and horizontal wellbores. Cerberus is the
only commercial program able to model all three conveyance methods in one package, making it invaluable for choosing
the best well-entry technique in marginal conditions.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES iii
User Feedback
NOV CTES continuously and diligently works to improve Cerberus software; therefore, we encourage our users to
contact us with technical or usability enhancement requests. We endeavor to implement these types of request whenever
possible. Please use one of the following methods to submit a request:
Email: CTESSupport@NOV.com
Phone: 1-936-777-6200
Web: www.NOV.com/CTES; click CTES Customer Portal and Support in the middle of the page
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES iv
Contact Us
United States
NOV Corporate Headquarters

7909 Parkwood Circle Drive
Houston, Texas 77036
Phone: 1-713-375-3700
Fax: 1-713-346-7687
NOV CTES
3770 Pollok Dr
Conroe, Texas 77303
Phone: 1-936-777-6200
Fax: 1-936-777-6312
After hours technical support: 1-936-777-6200
Email: CTESSales@nov.com
OR
CTESSupport@nov.com
Website: http://www.nov.com/ctes
United Kingdom
NOV Completion & Product Solutions

Intervention & Stimulation Equipment
Tofthills Avenue
Midmill Business Park
Kintore, Aberdeenshire AB51 0QP
Phone: 44-1224-748797
Middle East
B-17, Oilfield Supply Centre

Jebel Ali Free Zone
P.O. Box 18633
Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Phone: 971-481-0132
Fax: 971-883-7087
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES v
Contents
Copyright ................................................................................................................................... ii
About Cerberus ........................................................................................................................ iii
User Feedback ......................................................................................................................... iv
Contact Us ................................................................................................................................v
United States ............................................................................................................................................................ v
United Kingdom ........................................................................................................................................................ v
Middle East ............................................................................................................................................................... v
Chapter 1 ............................................................................................................................... 13
Installing or Updating Cerberus ...............................................................................................................................13
System Requirements.......................................................................................................................................14
Downloading Cerberus from the Internet ...........................................................................................................15
Downloading Updates and/or Patches from the Internet ....................................................................................15
Running Setup ..................................................................................................................................................16
Starting Cerberus and Obtaining Authorization ..................................................................................................17
Moving Cerberus’ Data Directory (First Computer) ............................................................................................19
Troubleshooting Installation ..............................................................................................................................20
Chapter 2 ............................................................................................................................... 21
System Setup .........................................................................................................................................................21
Using the System Setup Options.......................................................................................................................22
Managing Units.................................................................................................................................................22
Changing Authorization.....................................................................................................................................27
Using Cerberus Setup .......................................................................................................................................28
Viewing Records Checked Out..........................................................................................................................30
Copying a Data Directory ..................................................................................................................................31
Changing a Data Directory ................................................................................................................................31
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES vi
Chapter 3 ............................................................................................................................... 32
Using Cerberus .......................................................................................................................................................32
Getting Started .................................................................................................................................................32
Starting Cerberus..............................................................................................................................................32
Importing/Exporting a File .................................................................................................................................40
Delete a Component .........................................................................................................................................43
An Alternate method to Importing/Exporting Components, Jobs and Projects ..............................................................43
Chapter 4 ............................................................................................................................... 47
Reel-Trak ................................................................................................................................................................47
About Coiled Tubing (CT) Fatigue Tracking with Reel-Trak ...............................................................................48
Creating a New Job ..........................................................................................................................................49
Using the Job Wizard ........................................................................................................................................50
Setting Up a CT Job..........................................................................................................................................54
Tracking Fatigue ...............................................................................................................................................61
Using the Job Log .............................................................................................................................................74
Packaging a Job ...............................................................................................................................................79
Chapter 5 ............................................................................................................................... 80
Using Orpheus ........................................................................................................................................................80
About Orpheus .................................................................................................................................................81
The Orpheus Process .......................................................................................................................................81
Accessing Orpheus ...........................................................................................................................................82
Working with Projects .......................................................................................................................................84
Performing Calculations ....................................................................................................................................94
Fluid Flow .........................................................................................................................................................97
Force Monitor/Analysis (CT)............................................................................................................................144
Printing Orpheus Project Data.........................................................................................................................156
Emailing Project Data .....................................................................................................................................157
Chapter 6 ............................................................................................................................. 158

Using Hydra ..........................................................................................................................................................158
About Hydra ...................................................................................................................................................158
Accessing Hydra .............................................................................................................................................160
Hydra’s Opening-dialog Tools .........................................................................................................................161
Working with Projects .....................................................................................................................................163
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES vii
Chapter 7 ............................................................................................................................. 185
Using Velocity String .............................................................................................................................................185
The Velocity String Process ............................................................................................................................186
Accessing Velocity String (H7ydra) .................................................................................................................186
Chapter 8 ............................................................................................................................. 196

Using the Packer and Completion Analysis (PACA) ...............................................................................................196
About PACA ...................................................................................................................................................196
The PACA Process .........................................................................................................................................197
Accessing the PACA Model/Wizard.................................................................................................................198
Using the PACA Wizard ..................................................................................................................................201
Chapter 9 ............................................................................................................................. 224

Using Solids Cleanout ...........................................................................................................................................224
The Solids Cleanout Process ..........................................................................................................................224
Accessing Solids Cleanout (Hydra) .................................................................................................................225
Chapter 10 ........................................................................................................................... 237

Using the String Editor ..........................................................................................................................................237
Starting String Editor .......................................................................................................................................238
Working with Strings .......................................................................................................................................243
Receiving a String on Removable Media from a Manufacturer .........................................................................262
Using CT Specifications ..................................................................................................................................263
Configuring Strings .........................................................................................................................................264
String Utilities..................................................................................................................................................279
String Services ...............................................................................................................................................282
String History ..................................................................................................................................................291
Undoing String Events ....................................................................................................................................292
Troubleshooting in String Editor ......................................................................................................................300
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES viii
Chapter 11 ........................................................................................................................... 301
Using the Tool String Editor...................................................................................................................................301
Starting the Tool String Editor .........................................................................................................................301
Navigating the Tool String Editor .....................................................................................................................302
Finding Tools using Tool Search .....................................................................................................................309
Working with Tool Strings ...............................................................................................................................310
Adding Tools to a Tool String ..........................................................................................................................312
Printing a Tool String ......................................................................................................................................316
Chapter 12 ........................................................................................................................... 329

Using the Tool Editor.............................................................................................................................................329
About the Tool Editor ......................................................................................................................................329
Launching the Tool Editor ...............................................................................................................................329
Setting Tool Properties ...................................................................................................................................330
Setting Tool Features......................................................................................................................................332
Setting the Tool Image ....................................................................................................................................334
Defining Tool Sections ....................................................................................................................................337
Printing a Tool ................................................................................................................................................342
Chapter 13 ........................................................................................................................... 344

Using the Well Editor.............................................................................................................................................344
Starting Well Editor .........................................................................................................................................345
The Well Editor Display Screen .......................................................................................................................346
Working with Wells .........................................................................................................................................352
Configuring Wells............................................................................................................................................356
Troubleshooting in Well Editor ........................................................................................................................373
Chapter 14 ........................................................................................................................... 374

Using the Reel Editor ............................................................................................................................................374
Starting Reel Editor .........................................................................................................................................374
The Reel Editor Screen...................................................................................................................................375
The Reel Editor Toolbars ................................................................................................................................376
Configuring Reels ...........................................................................................................................................382
Troubleshooting in Reel Editor ........................................................................................................................385
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES ix
Chapter 15 ........................................................................................................................... 386
Using the Fluid Editor ............................................................................................................................................386
Starting Fluid Editor ........................................................................................................................................387
The Fluid Editor Display Screen ......................................................................................................................387
Types of Fluids ...............................................................................................................................................389
Working with Fluids.........................................................................................................................................393
Calculating Properties for Liquids ....................................................................................................................396
Fluid Correction Factors ..................................................................................................................................397
Troubleshooting in Fluid Editor ........................................................................................................................398
Chapter 16 ........................................................................................................................... 399

Using Equipment Manager ....................................................................................................................................399
Starting Equipment Manager...........................................................................................................................399
The Equipment Manager Screen.....................................................................................................................400
Working with Pieces of Equipment ..................................................................................................................402
Creating an Equipment Package .....................................................................................................................404
Chapter 17 ........................................................................................................................... 405

Using Achilles .......................................................................................................................................................405
Starting Achilles ..............................................................................................................................................405
Fatigue Model Theory .....................................................................................................................................406
Using Achilles .................................................................................................................................................408
Chapter 18 ........................................................................................................................... 415

Using Hercules......................................................................................................................................................415
Starting Hercules ............................................................................................................................................415
Tubing Limits Theory ......................................................................................................................................416
The Hercules Display Screen ..........................................................................................................................420
Working with Hercules Projects .......................................................................................................................425
Calculating Results in Hercules .......................................................................................................................427
Troubleshooting in Hercules............................................................................................................................429
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES x
Appendix A ........................................................................................................................... 430
Setting Display Graph Options in Orpheus ............................................................................................................430
Configuring Standard Calculation Graphs .......................................................................................................431
Changing Default Curve-style Settings ............................................................................................................432
Selecting a Graph ...........................................................................................................................................436
Saving or Copying a Graph Image ..................................................................................................................437
Changing the Graph Scale ..............................................................................................................................438
Graph Side Panels..........................................................................................................................................443
Tracking Lines ................................................................................................................................................445
Tracking Information .......................................................................................................................................445
Deleting Graph Markups and Frozen Curves...................................................................................................449
Appendix B ........................................................................................................................... 450

Coiled Tubing Forces Theory ................................................................................................................................450
Sinusoidal Buckling.........................................................................................................................................451
Helical Buckling ..............................................................................................................................................451
Lockup Theory ................................................................................................................................................452
Effect of Curvature on Helical Buckling Load ...................................................................................................452
Residual Bend and Friction Coefficients ..........................................................................................................453
Real Force vs. Effective Force ........................................................................................................................453
Force vs. Weight .............................................................................................................................................453
Factors Affecting Weight .................................................................................................................................454
Capstan or Belt Effect .....................................................................................................................................454
Free Fall .........................................................................................................................................................455
How to Get More Set Down Force ...................................................................................................................455
Torque ............................................................................................................................................................456
Finite Element Analysis ...................................................................................................................................456
Appendix C .......................................................................................................................... 457

Advanced Fluids-Model Options in Orpheus ..........................................................................................................457
Fluids Model: Advanced Hydraulics Options....................................................................................................457
Modeling Examples ........................................................................................................................................458
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES xi
Appendix D .......................................................................................................................... 460
Features and Effects Options in Orpheus ..............................................................................................................460
Modeling the Effects of the NOV Downhole Agitator Tool (CT/JP) ...................................................................461
Including the Effect of the Agitator Tool in Calculations ...................................................................................461
Calculating Lockup Depth ...............................................................................................................................462
Calculating Trip In and Trip Out.......................................................................................................................465
Completing Jar Activation Calculations (WL) ...................................................................................................467
Including Additional Normal Force in Calculations (WL)...................................................................................470
Appendix E ........................................................................................................................... 475

Coiled Tubing Fatigue Models ...............................................................................................................................475
Coiled Tubing Fatigue and the Achilles Fatigue Models...................................................................................475
Comparing the Linear and the Non-linear Models............................................................................................476
Appendix F ........................................................................................................................... 479

Entering Project Options .......................................................................................................................................479
Entering Project Options .................................................................................................................................479
Setting Advanced Options/Calculation Parameters..........................................................................................483
Setting Project-option Defaults ........................................................................................................................488
Appendix G .......................................................................................................................... 489

Suggested Readings .............................................................................................................................................489
Suggested Readings on Fatigue .....................................................................................................................490
Suggested Readings on Forces ......................................................................................................................491
Suggested Readings on Limits ........................................................................................................................492
Suggested Readings on Hydraulics.................................................................................................................493
Appendix H .......................................................................................................................... 504

Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................504
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cerberus v12.7 Software User Guide NOV CTES xii
1 |Installing or Updating Cerberus
Chapter 1
Installing or Updating Cerberus
Before using Cerberus for the first time, install Cerberus on a Microsoft Windows®-based computer and obtain a software
access key code to authorize use of the software.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
System Requirements
The Cerberus software suite is calculations and graphics intensive. When considering computer choices, keep in mind
having additional RAM noticeably improves performance over having a faster processor speed.
Basic Requirements
Operation System Windows 7 TM, Windows 8 TM, or Windows 10 TM

Processor 2.4GHz
RAM 8 GB or larger
Available Storage 1 GB
Display Resolution 1280 x 1024
HMI Keyboard & Mouse or Touch Screen
.NET Framework
Cerberus v11.x and Later 4.0
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Downloading Cerberus from the Internet
 To download Cerberus
1. Make sure that an Internet connection is established.
2. Point the web browser to www.nov.com/ctes. Navigate to the customer download page.
3. Enter the UserName and (case sensitive) password information received from NOV CTES.
Try to schedule downloads for times when an Internet connection can be maintained without interruption
4. Download and save the software to a Windows-based computer.
Downloading Updates and/or Patches from the Internet
Use the Internet update utility to check for updates and download files.
 To check for and download updates over the Internet

1. Make sure that an Internet connection is established
2. Exit all applications except Cerberus.
3. Find the Cerberus Main Menu.
4. From the Help menu, select Check for Updates.
Updates can also be obtained by visiting our website: www.nov.com/ctes
Depending the size of the file and the connection speed, updates can take a long time to download. Scheduling updates for
times when a connection to the Internet can be maintained without interruption may be helpful.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Running Setup
Be prepared to obtain authorization before running the software, even on previously authorized computers
If problems occur while installing Cerberus, see “Contact Us” on page v.
 To run Setup to install or to update Cerberus

1. Log in as administrator to install
2. Close all running applications
3. From the location in Windows where the software was saved, run CerberusInstall.exe
The case-sensitive password information must be entered again.
4. The CTES installation wizard appears. Follow the instructions on the screen
5. Obtain authorization for this copy of Cerberus
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Starting Cerberus and Obtaining Authorization
The first time Cerberus is installed authorization must be obtained from NOV CTES. The authorization contains
information about the available Cerberus features and the expiration date of the software license.
 To start Cerberus
1. Click the Start button in the task bar
2. Click All Programs > CTES > Cerberus 12.7
3. When Cerberus is launched, the program prompts for authorization. Click Yes. The Authorization screen
appears.
Figure 1 - Authorization screen
4. If connected to the Internet, use Option 1 to obtain authorization over the Internet
Click the Internet button, enter the contact information, and click OK. Enter information in all fields
Note that if behind a firewall, this option might be unavailable
5. If not connected to the Internet, or if the Internet authorization fails, use Option 2 to obtain authorization. If
possible, remain in front of the computer when contacting CTES.
Contact NOV CTES (CTESKeys@nov.com) with an authorization code to receive an access key. When an
access key is obtained from an NOV CTES employee, enter the value in the box underneath the Authorization
Code field; click Verify.
6. The program’s physical location cannot be moved when authorization is complete
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving Cerberus Data to a Network
If Cerberus is being used on a stand-alone computer, the data can be moved to a network where several people can
share a common set of data files. If there are data files on additional computers, they can be uploaded to the network
as well.
1. “Backing Up and Restoring Data Files”
2. “Moving Cerberus’ Data Directory (First Computer)”
3. “Changing Cerberus’ Data Directory Location (Other Computers)”
Backing Up and Restoring Data Files

Data files can be backed up to other media, including any removable media the computer accepts. Once the data is
backed up, it can also be restored in the event of data loss on the computer, such as from a hard-disk crash.
 To back up data files
1. Start Cerberus
2. From the Utilities menu, select Backup & Restore > Backup Data Directory
3. Choose the location for the backup file; select Save. When the backup is complete, click OK.
 To restore data files
1. Start Cerberus
2. From the Utilities menu, select Backup > Restore data directory
3. Choose the backup file to restore, select Open. To confirm, click Yes
4. When the data has been restored, click OK
When restoring data from a backup file, all existing data files are replaced with the files from the backup. You
will lose all data that is not in the backup
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving Cerberus’ Data Directory (First Computer)
Data files can be moved from a computer to a network to allow other users to access this data.
 To move data from a computer to a network or other location (first computer)
1. Start Cerberus. Back up the Cerberus directory by clicking, from the Utilities menu, Backup & Restore >
Backup Data Directory
2. Copy the data directory from the local computer to the new location
a. Click the Options menu; then select Copy Data Directory

b. Select the new location. Create a new folder ifnecessary
c. Click OK
d. Click the Options menu; then select Change Data Directory
e. Select the directory to which the data was copied
f. Click OK
3. Ensure that the files were moved correctly; then delete the data directory on the local computer if it is no longer
needed.
Changing Cerberus’ Data Directory Location (Other Computers)

The data files from additional computers can be moved from a computer to a network. Additional computers can access
the data files by changing the Cerberus data directory for each PC.
 To change the data directory location (other computers)
1. Start Cerberus
2. Export any projects that need to be added to any existing data directory
3. Click the Options menu; then select Change Data Directory
4. Enter/select the network directory to be used as the destination
5. Import any projects that were previously exported
6. Restart Cerberus
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Troubleshooting Installation
Table 1 - Troubleshooting the Cerberus Installation
Situation Possible Cause Action

I receive an error Administrator rights for Try logging out of Windows; log back in
message about not Windows may be as a user with administrator rights. Then
being able to copy a needed, or the file may run the setup program again.
file be in use.
Try closing all running applications, then
run the setup program again.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
Chapter 2
System Setup
Cerberus is configured with default values. However, key preferences can be changed with system administration
rights.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
Using the System Setup Options
Figure 2 - Use the Cerberus Options menu bar item to configure preferences
Managing Units
The Units Manager allows the user to determine whether units are specified as a unit “set,” or are specified
individually.
Using Unit Sets
When units are selected as a set, every unit displayed in the software conforms to the designated setting. In this
“all or nothing” scenario, no unit may be individually specified.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
 To specify a unit set
1. Select Options > Units on the menu bar
Figure 3
2. Within the Currently Selected Unit Set field, select, from the dropdown, the unit set desired. The user may
select from a list of pre-defined and/or user-defined unit sets. NOV CTES pre- defines three unit sets: English,
Metric, and Canadian Metric
For example, if English is selected as the unit set type, then each individual unit uses the pre- defined English unit
set value.
NOV CTES-defined unit sets (English, Metric, or Canadian Metric) may not be deleted
3. Click OK to accept the change or Cancel to reject the change.
Specifying Units Individually
Units may be specified individually. When a unit is defined individually, the altered unit set may not be saved
with the same name as the original CTES-defined unit set.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
 To specify an individual unit

1. Select Options > Units on the menu bar
2. Select the item for which unit-change is desired.
Figure 4
3. Use the associated dropdown to select the desired unit

The Currently Selected Unit Set specification becomes “undefined.” The unit set that existed prior to the
change remains unchanged, and is available from the Currently Selected Unit Set dropdown.
4. Click OK to accept the change and the new, undefined unit set, or click Cancel to reject the change and the new,
undefined unit set
The unit set remains as undefined unless the user selects Save to create a custom unit set.
Creating Custom Unit Sets
When an individual unit has been defined, a custom unit set may be created.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
 To create a custom unit set
1. Click Save in the Units Management dialog to provide a new name for the unit set.
Figure 5
2. Input a New Unit Set Name.
The new, custom set name becomes available/selectable on the Currently Selected Unit Set
dropdown.
Importing/Exporting Custom Unit Sets
One or more custom unit sets (.cList) may be exported to a single file. The exported file is stored as a
standard zip file with the .zList extension. Custom unit sets may also be imported through the Units
Management dialog.
 To export a custom unit set
1. Select, from the Units Management menu bar, File > Export Unit Set
Figure 6 - The Units Management dialog displays the custom unit sets available for export
2. Select one or more unit sets to export.
To select more than one unit set, select one unit set and hold down the Ctrl key to select additional sets
3. Select the Export button

4. Use the Windows interface to select a path and location in which to place the Cerberus Unit Set (*.zUnits).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
Converting Units
Though not part of the system-setup options, other units “management” options are available in
Cerberus.
Units may be converted via the Units Conversion utility.
 To use the Units Conversion utility

1. Access the utility: select the Cerberus menu-bar option Utilities > Units Conversion. The Units
Converter dialog appears.
Figure 7
2. Select the Category and Type of unit to convert.

3. Select the unit Precision desired.
4. Input the From number.
5. Select the Units type.
The To field automatically populates with the converted units.
Select Options > Keyboard to view and use the optional keyboard
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
Changing Authorization
The authorization level determines the option availability in Cerberus. Typically, an authorization level is good for the
term of the current Cerberus license period. To reflect new options purchased, or if the current authorization expiration
is near, the authorization can be changed.
 To change authorization
1. Select Options > Authorization....
2. Click Get Authorization Code.
Figure 8
3. If connected to the Internet, use Option 1 to obtain authorization over the Internet. (Note that if behind a
firewall, this option may not work.)
Click the Internet button, enter the contact information, and click OK. Text must be entered in all of
the fields.
4. If not connected to the Internet, or if the Internet authorization fails, use Option 2 to obtain
authorization. If possible, it is best to remain in front of the computer when contacting NOV CTES.
Contact NOV CTES and supply the Authorization Code on the screen. Enter the corresponding Access
Key provided and click Verify
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
Using Cerberus Setup
 To Change Cerberus Setup
1. On the Options menu, select Cerberus Setup
Figure 9 - The Cerberus Setup display screen contains five tabs
2. Within the General tab, check/toggle the associated boxes to achieve the described effect:
a. Use last string/reel/well/tool as default – automatically selects the last item viewed by the user upon
next startup.
b. Enable automatic customer feedback – activates customer-feedback management,

allowing, after 182 days, a form to appear upon Cerberus startup.
i. Within the form, enter contact information and click Yes to send feedback
information
- in the form of a Cerberus usage datalog – to NOV CTES.
OR
ii. Within the form, click No to automatically deselect the checkbox. No information is sent
to NOV CTES, unless the user re-checks the box.
OR
iii. Within the form, click Later to close the feedback information dialog. The form will
again appear when the user re-opens Cerberus.
c. Enable Watch Dog – The Cerberus Watch Dog displays a warning if a string, reel, well, or tool is
selected that is incompatible with another existing selection. Example: the string is too long for the
reel. (Click Tip to see a message similar to this one.)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
d. Enable Heave Calculations – Heave calculations estimate the additional fatigue due to coiled
tubing movement at the reel and gooseneck caused by a wave compensation system. Checking the
box causes an additional tab to be displayed on the Job Log screen of Reel-Trak. Heave is
configured on a job-by-job-basis.
e. Auto-scale fatigue viewers – This option controls whether, when viewing the string fatigue life
graph, the Used Life scale defaults to 0-100% or auto-scales to match the data.
Auto-scaling shows the fatigue life in greater detail when the fatigue is low. Care should be taken
when switching between strings in case the scale has change without user awareness. The
recommended practice is to turn auto-scaling “off” and to zoom the graph manually.
f. Enable Diagnostics Logging – activates diagnostics logging.
g. Display CT Services Control Panel – When this option is checked, the CT Services Control
Panel appears on the Cerberus main screen when the user selects a job from the Navigation Tree,
or in Reel-Trak on the Job Setup and/or Post Job Analysis tab.
h. Include string backups when exporting a CT string – Checking this box allows other users
who import a string in version 11.0+ to review and manage a CT’s life history. Exported strings
will contain the information required to “undo” string history and to modify the string history in
the timeline. By including the backup data, the exported file size increases.
Turning this option off exports CT strings without backup information.
i. The User Name is automatically populated. This may be changed.
3. Within the Identification tab, optionally enter user information
4. Within the Printing tab, enter any information to be included on reports, such as disclaimers, logos, and so forth.
To add a logo, click the Browse button adjacent to the Logo field and navigate to the desired logo-
image file
5. Within the Range Checking tab, click (to toggle) the type of user-value-entry restriction desired:
a. On: Forces certain user-entered values to be within certain ranges.
b. Warn: Gives a warning when certain user-entered values exceed a certain range, but permits the use of
the entered value
c. Off: Permits certain user-entered values to be of any value with no warning given.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
Viewing Records Checked Out
When a user opens a well, tool string, project, or other item, Cerberus checks out that record. When the user is done
with the item, Cerberus checks it back in.
If a Cerberus session ends unexpectedly, due to a power failure or other problem, Cerberus may not check in a
record properly or a user may have a record checked out on a portable computer for an extended period of time.
This keeps other users from viewing and editing the item. In such a situation, the user can undo a record check-out.
Undoing a Record Check-out
The following procedure outlines the steps for undoing a check-out on a record.
Confirm that a user is not actually using a record before undoing the check-out. Otherwise, the user will not be
able to save any changes to that record and those changes will be lost.
 To Undo a Record Check-out

1. From the menu bar, select Options > View Records Checked Out
2. Click the record that is checked out.
3. Click Undo Check Out, then Yes to confirm.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2 |System Setup
Copying a Data Directory
The data directory is where Cerberus stores all the data files. The directory path and name are visible on the bottom
of the main Cerberus menu.
Copying a data directory does not “zip” (or compress) the data like in a backup. It simply makes a copy of a data
directory in a new location.
The target directory (the directory copied to) must be empty. If any file exists in the directory prior to the copy
process, the copy attempt fails
 To copy a data directory

1. Select Options > Copy Data Directory from the menu bar.
Figure 10
2. Use the Windows-like tools to select a location to which to copy the data directory.
Changing a Data Directory

 To change a data directory
1. Select Options > Change Data Directory from the menu bar.
Figure 11
2. Click Browse to navigate to the desired location.
3. Use the Windows-like tools to select a Cerberus data directory.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
Chapter 3
Using Cerberus
This section describes basic Cerberus-software purpose, access, and navigation.
Getting Started
Cerberus is primarily a tool-deployment planning system, providing modeling of:
1. Fatigue tracking and fatigue life analysis

2. Cumulative mechanical and hydraulic forces involved in well intervention
3. Pressure and flowrate calculations for workover operations
Cerberus helps determine:
1. If target depth is reachable, and the most feasible conveyance method and equipment configuration to complete
the job and to return the tools safely and efficiently to surface
2. Fatigue damage to CT during operations
3. Tubing pressure and force limits
4. Optimal velocity string design
5. Stuck point of pipe
6. Flow rates required for hole cleaning
This section explains basic concepts related to starting and using Cerberus,
Starting Cerberus
 To start Cerberus
1. Click Start in the task bar.
2. Click Programs > CTES > Cerberus 12.7, or click the Cerberus icon on the desktop
3. If this is the first time Cerberus is run, the user must obtain authorization for this copy of Cerberus. See Starting
Cerberus and Obtaining Authorization for more information.
4. When the application is authorized, the Cerberus Main Menu appears, Figure 12
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
The Main Menu (Home Page)
The Cerberus Main Menu screen appears after the initial Cerberus startup.
Figure 12 - Cerberus Main Menu
This interface is the main “hub” through which the user works with Cerberus. Within this
main hub, Cerberus focuses primarily on the following:
1. Projects: these provide a framework for organizing the various elements that drive the calculation process, which
ultimately provides the user with decision-making tools in thejob design process.
2. Editors/Managers: the data-gathering, holding and administration areas for the various contributors to the
calculation process.
3. Models: the applications from which the various components that are used in projects – including the
conveyance methods (coiled tubing strings, jointed pipe, and/or wireline) and specifications used to determine
feasibility of satisfactory job completion – are “driven” to the calculated outcome.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
Table 2 describes the Cerberus models and the conveyance methods associated with them.
Table 2
Cerberus Model Conveyance Method

Reel-Trak (Job Manager) Coiled Tubing
Orpheus (forces) Wireline, Slickline, Coiled Tubing, Jointed Pipe
Hydra (hydraulics) Coiled Tubing, Jointed Pipe
Velocity String Coiled Tubing, Jointed Pipe
Pipe PACA (packer and completion analysis) Coiled Tubing, Jointed Pipe
Solids Cleanout No Pipe

Coiled Tubing
The Main-menu Layout
Cerberus’ main menu, or “home” page, is divided into sections, as follows:
Navigation Tree
The navigation tree, found within the upper left-hand portion of the display screen, provides a Windows-
like hierarchy of folders and files, from which the user can navigate through and access (depending on
Cerberus licensing) projects, wells, coiled tubing strings, wirelines, or jointed pipes.
Folders are internal to Cerberus and unrelated to folders in Windows Explorer®
Folder availability is dependent on the user’s selection(s) in the View Configuration Area, and on the Cerberus
licensing for the user’s site.
Navigation List
When the user selects a folder within the navigation tree, a navigation list opens on the right-hand side of
the display screen.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
Figure 13
File Management
The user familiar with Microsoft Windows operation will find that the navigation list, when used in
conjunction with the navigation tree, is very similar to the Windows Explorer file management system.
Click (to select) a single item, or use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple projects and folders in the
navigation list. The user may “drag and drop” items (left-click and drag; release to drop) as follows:
List to list: multiple items may be dragged and dropped into a folder within the navigation list.
List to tree: multiple items may be dragged and dropped from the navigation list to the navigation tree.
Tree to tree: a single project may be dragged and dropped within the navigation tree.
Tree to list: a single project may be dragged and dropped from the navigation tree to a folder in the
navigation list.
For user-defined folders only, right-click the folder to add, re-name, or delete it. System-defined folders cannot be
renamed or deleted.
View Configuration Area
In the lower left-hand portion of Cerberus’ main menu lies the View Configuration Area. The area is divided
into two sections: View and Select Project Types to Display.
Select among View types (available depending on Cerberus licensing) by clicking the desired view from
the associated dropdown.
Determine the availability of navigation-tree Project information by toggling/clicking selections in the

Select Project Types to Display area.
Project-type availability is dependent upon the Cerberus licensing available to the user
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
Model Access Area
Launch a Cerberus modeling application by clicking one of the available (depending on Cerberus
licensing) model buttons.
Menu Bar
Cerberus uses a typical Windows-style menu bar for navigation.
1. The File menu allows the creation of a new project; saving of a project; “undoing” a change,
importing/exporting of a project or component (string, reel, fluid, pipe, toolstring, well, or wireline);
and exiting from the Cerberus application.
Figure 14 - Cerberus File Menu
Some File menu-bar items are available only until the user accesses a project, well, coiled tubing string,
wireline, or jointed pipe
a. Exporting from the Cerberus Main Menu provides the user with the opportunity to
safely email projects or components with the .zcx extension or the .zcy extension
(which is essentially an XML file).
2. The Models menu-bar item allows selection from among the Cerberus models that are also available from
the Model Access Area.
Figure 15 - Cerberus Models Menu
3. The Calculations menu-bar item provides access to Achilles (coiled tubing fatigue calculations) and to
Hercules (coiled tubing stresses calculations (including bust, collapse, tension, and compression limits)).
Figure 16 - Cerberus Calculations Menu
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
The Editors menu-bar item provides access to the String Editor (CT), Reel Editor (CT), Well Editor, Tool String
Editor, Fluid Editor, Equipment Manager, and Personnel Manager. Also, available if included in the user’s license:
Wireline Editor and Jointed Pipe Editor.
Figure 17 - Cerberus Editors Menu
4. The Utilities menu-bar item allows the user to Backup/Restore a data directory. It also provides access to
Units Conversion, CT Specifications, CT String Design, and the ability to rebuild the Project Tree or
the String Tree.
Figure 18 - Cerberus Utilities Menu
5. The Orion menu-bar item allows the user to open OrionNET software (if available) and begin data
acquisition.
Figure 19 - Cerberus Orion Menu
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
6. The Options menu-bar item allows the user to change Unit settings; change software Authorization, as in
a Cerberus software-usage upgrade; edit the Cerberus software Setup, as in altering default settings,
inserting company identification information in printed documents and setting value ranges; View
database Records currently Checked Out; and Copy or Change a Data Directory.
Figure 20 - Cerberus Options Menu
When a Cerberus screen layout or feature does not appear as the user expects it to, it is best to
check status of the various options available in Cerberus Setup.
Many important Cerberus settings are found in Cerberus Setup that can affect the behavior and
appearance of the software. The current defaults are checked upon initial access, and Cerberus
retains new settings. See Using Cerberus Setup for detailed information about using these
options.
a. Cerberus Setup > General tab
The General tab-settings include many options for customizing Cerberus’ behavior.
b. Cerberus Setup > Identification tab
Use the Identification tab to fill in optional information used as input to order forms and other similar
uses where the company identity is required.
c. Cerberus Setup > Printing tab
Use the Printing tab to set up the parameters that will appear on reports.
d. Cerberus Setup > Range Checking tab
Use the Range Checking tab to choose among types of range warnings for user-entered values.
e. Cerberus Setup > SharePoint tab
Only applicable when the user has a valid SharePoint URL: Input the Site URL and use the
available tools to authenticate the SharePoint connection and its use.
When the user prints to CTES PDF Printer 50 in Cerberus, the Printer Option to Save PDF file to
SharePoint becomes available, the SharePoint dialog appears, and the user can then save the PDF file to
their SharePoint location.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
7. The Help menu-bar item provides access to the Cerberus User Guide or Release Notes; allows the user to
Check for software Updates, provides access to NOV CTES on the Web to view the home page and/or
for Software Download; and provides information About the Cerberus version number and the
identification of the software user.
Figure 21 - Cerberus Help Menu
Shortcut Keys
The following shortcuts are useful for navigating in Cerberus:
Ctrl+E = Expand the entire navigation tree.
Ctrl+Q = Collapse the entire navigation tree.
Ctrl+R = Restore the Cerberus display screen to its default size and location.
Ctrl+S = Save the changes made.
Ctrl+Z = Undo the changes made to a well, string, reel, or tool string for a project.
When Cerberus is closed and re-accessed, the last View (project, well, CT string, jointed pipe, or wireline) used
(see View Configuration Area ) appears. The upper right-hand area of the display screen shows related project
information, and the lower right-hand area of the display screen shows the related model
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
Importing/Exporting a File
Files can be shared between computers by importing and exporting them. Components and even entire projects
can be exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media, a job can be
imported into Cerberus. The export files may also be emailed to another person for use on their computer.
Components, jobs, or projects may be imported using the procedure outlined below:
 To import a file
1. If importing from removable media, insert the media into the PC.
2. Start editor or component.
3. Select File > Import... from the dialog menu bar.
A dialog similar in appearance to a typical Windows Explorer® interface appears.
4. Browse to and select the file to import. The file to import may be any type of Cerberus file, including
projects/jobs, or components. (Components include coiled tubing, reels, fluids, jointed pipe, strings, wells, or
wirelines.)
Ensure the file type is Cerberus File (*.zcx (Cerberus 10.0 or earlier) or *.zcy (Cerberus 10.5 or
later)).
5. Click Open.
Figure 22 - A dialog appears detailing the Files Selected for Import.
6. Click Open to proceed
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
7. The following selection box (or a similar one) is presented.
Figure 23
a. To de-select files so that they are not imported, move any or all the Files Selected for Import to the Files
Available for Import category on the left-hand side of this dialog:
i. On the Files Selected for Import side of the dialog, click to select any element in the file
hierarchy. When a category folder is selected (Components or Projects are the main folders), all
folders/files subordinate to that category will be moved.
ii. Click the Remove [selected element(s)] button.

The selected elements are moved to the Files Available for Import category on the left-
hand side of this dialog, indicating that they are not slated for import, but that they are
available.
iii. To move any elements in the Files Available for Import category back to the Files Selected for
Import category, select the element and click the Select [selected element(s)] button.
8. Click on “Import all Items” and the selected files will be imported into the program.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
 To export a job or multiple jobs
The user may export jobs from one computer to another, either via removable media, the network the computer is
connected to, if any, or through the Internet, if an Internet connection is available.
The Importing a File procedure MUST be used before Cerberus recognizes a job database. The database can
NOT be copied into the jobs directory using Windows File Manager or Windows Explorer
1. If exporting to removable media, insert the media into the PC.
3. Click File > Export... from the dialog menu bar
The Select dialog appears. Select a component or a group of components and click OK.
Table 3
To … Do This …
Select a group of items that are next to each other. Click the first item, then hold down the SHIFT key
and click the last item.
Select multiple non-adjacent items. Hold down the CTRL key and click each item
A dialog similar in appearance to a typical Windows Explorer® interface appears.
4. Navigate to the desired export file-path location.
5. If desired, enter a new name for the component/component group.

If the component is to retain the current name, proceed to the next step. Otherwise, enter a new
name.
Ensure the file type is Cerberus File (*.zcx (Cerberus 10.0 or earlier) or *.zcy (Cerberus 10.5 or later)).
6. Click Save.
The component/component group is exported to the desired location; a popup appears describing the file path
where the export file is saved and the name of the export file.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
Delete a Component
Use caution when deleting components. When a component is deleted, the information cannot be recovered.
Do NOT delete a job via Windows Explorer. A job should only be deleted using this procedure in Cerberus.
Otherwise, Cerberus will indicate the component is still present and generate an error if a user tries to select and
use that component
 To delete a component
2. Click Delete on the toolbar. The Delete dialog appears
3. Choose the component or components to delete
4. Click OK
5. Click Yes to confirm deleting the component(s).
An Alternate method to Importing/Exporting Components, Jobs and Projects
1. From the Cerberus main menu select 

File 
Import/Export
Figure 24
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
2. Figure 25 shows the selection box allowing the user to select the proper file
Figure 25
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
3. After clicking Open the screen appears as shown in Figure 26
Figure 26
a. To de-select files so that they are not imported, move any or all the Files Selected for Import to the Files
Available for Import category on the left-hand side of this dialog.
b. On the Files Selected for Import side of the dialog, click to select any element in the file hierarchy. When
a category folder is selected (Components or Projects are the main folders), all folders/files subordinate
to that category will be moved.
c. Click the Remove [selected element(s)] button.
d. The selected elements are moved to the Files Available for Import category on the left-hand side of this
dialog, indicating that they are not slated for import, but that they are available.
e. To move any elements in the Files Available for Import category back to the Files Selected for Import
category, select the element and click the Select [selected element(s)] button.
f. Once the “Import All Items” button is clicked the components and projects will be imported into the
current Cerberus data directory and all the components will be available for use within the program.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3 | Using Cerberus
4. To Export components and projects from Cerberus “Export” is selected in the menu and the following selection
box opens.
Figure 27
5. At this point the user can select which components and projects they would like to export and then click on
Export.
6. The file name and location can be changed at this time (if desired) and then the “Save” button is clicked to
save the file.
Figure 28
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Chapter 4
Reel-Trak
This section describes the process involved in analyzing fatigue in coiled tubing jobs. This analysis may occur pre-
job, post-job, or in real time (during actual operations at the wellhead). In the case of post-job analysis, the model’s
calculation tools calculate actual fatigue.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
About Coiled Tubing (CT) Fatigue Tracking with Reel-Trak
Cerberus’ Reel-Trak modeling software is used to predict, track, and analyze coiled tubing fatigue and diametrical
growth as part of a pipe management program in coiled tubing operations. Reel-Trak can be used predictively pre-
job, real time during actual operations at the wellhead, as part of a post-job analysis of specific tubing string, or to
investigate potential string designs that optimize return on investment by maximizing pipe usage based on current
operations.
The Reel-Trak interface is organized to support a structured approach to fatigue tracking. This approach utilizes four
Reel-Trak “modes,” which describe the various states in which a job can exist during the process. These include
Creating a New Job, Job Setup, Fatigue Tracking, and Post Job Analysis. This mode-based methodology is beneficial
for real-time operations, as well as for tracking fatigue after job completion.
Before accessing and using Reel-Trak functionality, please select, from the main Cerberus menu-bar, Options >
Cerberus Setup to specify Cerberus setup options that can affect the user’s experience with Reel-Trak.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Creating a New Job
There are several ways to create a new job.

 To create a new job
Choose from one of the following approaches:
1. From the main Cerberus menu, select File > New > Coiled Tubing Fatigue Project (ReelTrak).
Figure 29
a. The Job Wizard is launched at this point IF:
i. The new job is requested immediately after Cerberus or Reel-Trak startup.

OR
ii. Show Wizard on start is toggled within the Job Wizard.
b. Otherwise, the New Job dialog appears
2. From the Reel-Trak menu bar, select File > New Job.
This launches the Job Wizard or the New Job dialog, with behavior identical to the first option, above.
3. From the Reel-Trak menu bar, select Help > Job Wizard.
4. From the Reel-Trak toolbar, select the Job Wizard icon
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Using the Job Wizard
 To use the Job Wizard
1. Access the Job Wizard (see To create a new job).
Figure 30
2. (Optional) Customize Job Wizard Options by selecting the Settings button.
Figure 31
Use the available Tip buttons for information about the related checkboxes; click Next.
3. Input a job description (name). (In each case, here and below, select Next to advance through the wizard.)
4. Click to select/toggle Wizard Job Setup Options.

Choose from among three options for creating a job.
a. Perform setup step-by-step
i. Select a string. If the string is not available in the list, it must be uploaded to the computer
from the appropriate source (coordinator, dispatch, engineering, or other). In the case of field
operations where the string is not available, a string file may be created using the String Editor
(select Managers > String Editor from the main menu bar)
ii. Select a reel. If the reel is not available in the list, upload a reel acquired from the appropriate
source (coordinator, dispatch, engineering, or other) to the computer. In the case of field
operations where a reel file is not available, it may be created using the Reel Editor
(select Managers > Reel Editor from the Cerberus main menu bar).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
iii. Input/select wellsite geometry: Gooseneck Length; Gooseneck Radius; Reel to Gooseneck; Top
of Injector to Zero Depth; Tool Length; Depth measured from end of tool/coil.
iv. Select a job type. If the selected job type potentially affects the wall thickness of the pipe (such
as an acid or abrasive job type), a default Wall Reduction appears in the related field. If no acidic
or abrasive effect is typical with the job type selected, no default Wall Reduction appears.
To set up the default Wall Reduction, edit the Job Type.
To turn on/off the wall-reduction application, select, from the Reel-Trak menu bar, Options >
Preferences. Then select the Fatigue Tracking tab, if it is not already selected, and use the
available parameters.
The Job Wizard behavior can vary dramatically based on the Settings selected.
b. Click to select/toggle Use my last Wizard selections.
c. Click to select/toggle Make copy of the current job. This option uses the current job as a template, and
the job log is cleared
Previous selections are stored and can be used to create a quick job
5. Select a Folder in which to store the new job.
a. Click the Folder name (red, underlined text). The Select a Folder dialog appears.
b. Click the desired folder.

 To add a new folder or show all folders
Right-click any existing folder name and choose Add Folder or Show All Folders. The result of either
action is relative only to the folder clicked.
Click Next to continue.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Using the New Job Dialog
In the scenario described here, the New Job dialog is accessed as described in To create a new job.
Figure 32
 To create a new job using the New Job dialog

1. Use the left-hand panel to select the folder in which to save the job; otherwise the job is saved in the Jobs folder
The user’s selection determines the folder in which the new job is located, as indicated in the uneditable
Location field.
The existing jobs within the selected folder are displayed both in the left-hand panel and in the right-hand panel
2. (Optional) Select a job from either the left-hand or right-hand panel and click Copy Selected Item to copy the
job name
3. Input a name for the new job in the New Name field
4. Click OK
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
The job is loaded/displayed in Reel-Trak with the Job Setup tab open and ready for further input.
Figure 33
Files can be shared between computers by importing and exporting them. Components and even entire projects can
be exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media, a job can be
To learn more about importing and exporting files click on the link below or see Chapter 3 of this document.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Setting Up a CT Job
Reel-Trak’s Job Setup tab is the launch pad for a Cerberus job where job components and parameters
such as the CT String and Reel are defined or edited. This panel/tab is used to configure a Reel-Trak job
for fatigue tracking, either in real-time or post-job. Wellsite geometry, as well as job type and job personnel,
are configurable from this main panel.
 To set up a CT job
1. Open the CT job (using one of the following methods):
a. From the Cerberus main menu, double-click an existing CT job from the left-hand panel.
b. From the Cerberus main menu, select the Reel Trak (Job Manager) button. .
i. Double-click a CT job from the Select a Job dialog.
ii. Select the Job Setup tab.
c. From Reel-Trak’s menu bar, select File > Open Job.
d. To view existing jobs that use a particular string (and to open one of these), select the
Open using String Filter toolbar item .
From the resulting dialog, click the dropdown to view available strings and to select a CT string.
2. If the Post Job Analysis tab is displayed when the job is opened, the job has already been completed,
and fatigue has been applied.
a. The user may review the fatigue applied during the job, and analysis of the health and nature of
fatigue life used, and graphs of the data used to calculate fatigue.
OR
b. The user may “undo” the running of fatigue for a string via the String Editor (see Printing String Data). In
this scenario, the tracked fatigue for the job is removed from the string.
3. If not already selected, select the Job Setup tab in Reel-Trak.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Figure 34
4. If the job is locked, note the following before proceeding:

If a job is complete, the job may not be unlocked. The only way to unlock a complete job is to
undo the job through String Editor. (see Printing String Data) for additional information.
The job must be unlocked to edit/set up parameters. The job may, however, be reviewed in the Track
Fatigue mode even if it is locked
 To unlock the job if it is not complete

a. Click the “lock” icon in the upper right-hand corner of the interface to unlock the job
OR
b. Select File > Locked/Archived Status to use the Locked/Archived Status dialog to unlock the
job.
Figure 35
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
5. Input data related to the job. Fields with associated red asterisks are required; others are optional. Required
fields are needed for fatigue to be successfully tracked
Not selecting a String or Reel does not prevent the job from being saved
Personnel must have a role selected to be saved
a. Client (Company)
i. Use the dropdown to select an existing client/company
ii. To input and save client/company information on a related data-input form, click the Client Data
hyperlink
OR
iii. Select Job Setup > Client Data from the menu bar
b. *String
i. To select an existing string or create a new string via the Select a String dialog, click the Folder
icon associated with the String field
OR
ii. Select Job Setup > String from the menu bar
iii. Click the String Editor icon to access the String Editor (see Using the String Editor) To cut,
reverse, or splice a string prior to the initiation of fatigue tracking, select one of the String
Services. When fatigue tracking has begun and the job is locked, these tools become disabled.
(see String Services for more information)
If the String field is empty, clicking the String Editor icon accesses the Select a String dialog.
c. *Reel:
i. To select an existing reel or to create a new reel via the Select a Reel dialog, click the Folder
icon associated with the Reel field.
OR
ii. Select Job Setup > Reel from the menu bar.
iii. Click the Reel Editor icon to access the Reel Editor (see Using the Reel Editor)
The Reel field is empty, clicking the Reel Editor icon accesses the Select a Reel dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
d. Well:
i. To remove an existing well from the job, click the Delete icon .
ii. To select an existing well or create a new well via the Select a Well dialog, click the Folder
icon associated with the Well field.
OR
iii. Select Job Setup > Well from the menu bar.
iv. To access the Well Editor, click the Well Editor icon (see Using the Well Editor)
The user also has the option of manually typing a well name. This allows users who do not need all the
detail of a Cerberus well to easily enter important details about the well for the job
v. To input and save well information on a related data-input form, click the Well Location &
Characteristics hyperlink
OR
vi. Select Job Setup > Well Location & Characteristics from the menu bar
e. Tool:
i. To remove an existing tool from the job, click the Delete icon
ii. To select an existing well or create a new well via the Select a Tool string dialog, click the Folder
icon
OR
iii. Select Job Setup > Tool from the menu bar
iv. To access the Tool String Editor, click the Tool String Editor icon
(see Using the Tool String Editor)
f. Comments: Add comments as desired
g. Client Data: To add a new client, edit an existing client’s information, or delete a client, select Job Setup
> Client Data from the menu bar.
h. Job Type: To reveal the Job Type-related area, click Job Type within the Job Setup tab
OR
i. Select View > Job Type from the Reel-Trak menu bar.
Selecting View > Job Type also closes an open Job Type-related area
Figure 36
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
i. Within this area, select from existing Job Types using the associated dropdown(s). Selecting a
job type automatically checks the box in front of the Job Type field, fills in a default Wall
Reduction value, and checks the box Acid Job if the job is acid.
ii. To input and save job-type information on a Default Job Types dialog, click the Edit Job Types
hyperlink. Here, the user may add job types and define their Wall Reduction and Acid Job
defaults. The user may also delete job types here.
The Wall Reduction value automatically populates in the Job Type area from the information entered
via the Edit Job Types hyperlink (which accesses the Default Job Types dialog), but may be changed
manually in the Job Type area
iii. The Effective CT wall thickness reduction (this job) is displayed immediately below these
fields in the Job Setup tab.
The user can set the method of Corrosion calculation (Wall Reduction or String Life Reduction) through the String
Editor. (See Entering Corrosion Settings for a String for additional information)
Figure 37
In Reel-Trak, a dialog containing the String Life Reduction and Wall Reduction statuses (on/off), life-reduction
percentages, and wall reduction amount is available to the user from the menu bar. To access the dialog, select Job
Setup > Corrosion Compensation/Wall Reduction.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Figure 38
j. *Wellsite Geometry: The current default parameters for the Wellsite Geometry are displayed.
The Wellsite Geometry portion of this tab/panel becomes disabled when the job is locked. The assumption
in operation is that the job has been set up and fatigue tracking is either in progress or will be in progress
shortly
i. To view the Injector field within this area, select View > Injector (Wellsite Geometry). Use the
dropdown to select an injector, if desired.
To edit injector properties, select Resources > Equipment Manager. (See Using Equipment
Manager for additional information)
ii. Click Geometry Defaults to access the Wellsite Geometry Defaults dialog for altering the
defaults for new Fatigue Tracker projects.
Figure 39
Current defaults are displayed in the Wellsite Geometry Defaults dialog, including
Gooseneck Length, Gooseneck Radius, Reel to Gooseneck measurement, and Top of Injector to Zero Depth
measurement.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
iii. To change the default settings for new Fatigue Tracker projects, change any or all numbers and
select Save as Defaults. Click the Gooseneck Radius hyperlink to access the Gooseneck Arch
Radius dialog, from which the user may Add a New Radius, Delete an existing radius, or select
an Existing radius value. Click Done when tasks are complete.
OR
iv. To fill the fields with Cerberus defaults, select Cerberus Defaults
OR
v. To fill the fields with the user’s previously saved defaults for new Fatigue Tracker projects,
select Use Defaults
vi. Click (to select/toggle) Depth is measured from the end of the coiled tubing or Depth is
measured from the end of the tool String (BHA).
vii. Select Close to exit the Wellsite Geometry Defaults dialog and return to the Job Setup tab of
Reel-Trak.
viii. Alter any of the available number values in Wellsite Geometry: Gooseneck Length, Gooseneck
Radius, Reel to Gooseneck measurement, and Top of Injector to Zero Depth measurement by
typing directly into the field, or byselecting from available options when dropdowns are
available.
k. Surface Equipment: To select the equipment package used on the job, click the Surface Equipment
hyperlink
OR
l. Select Job Setup > Surface Equipment from the menu bar.
If additional equipment must be defined, click the Equipment Manager button to access the Equipment Manager
dialog. (See Using Equipment Manager for additional information)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Tracking Fatigue
The information stored [in a database] during the Job Setup mode of the structured fatigue-tracking process is used
to perform and store CT-string life calculations within the Fatigue Tracking mode. See About Coiled Tubing (CT)
Fatigue Tracking with Reel-Trak for additional information.
 To prepare to track fatigue
1. Open a job. (See To set up a CT job )
To create a new job, the user may access the Job Wizard from the Reel-Trak toolbar
2. From Reel-Trak’s menu bar, select Options > Preferences to choose the various parameters used in the fatigue
tracking calculations.
Figure 40
The Preferences dialog defaults to the Fatigue Tracking tab. Within this tab, the following preferences may be
set:
a. Select CT Wall Thickness parameters:
i. Click to check the Use measured wall if available option if Argus TubeSpecTM measurement
data is to be used.
Argus TubeSpec coiled tubing measurement data is imported automatically into Cerberus through Reel
Trak whenever an OrionNETTM database is selected and the above option is checked
ii. Choose between Use nominal wall and Use minimum wall.
iii. To use the Wall reduction method, click (to check) the associated box; then, select Full wall
reduction value or Limit wall reduction to [enter percent] % of wall thickness.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
b. Select CT Diameter parameters:
i. Choose between Use nominal CT diameter and Use CT diameter + tolerance [use default or
change number] [units].
In Reel-Trak, select Options > Units from the menu bar to change units
c. Specify other general parameters, if different from the default:
i. Directional change sensitivity: [use default or change number][units].
ii. To Use estimated reel/gooseneck pressures, click to check the associated box.
iii. Use the default Playback block size or change the number within the associated field.
The user may input Reel-Trak Preferences within three other tab categories as well: Job Log Import, Job
Log, and OrionNET Import.
Regarding the OrionNET Import tab, there are four major groups of data-import preferences to consider that are
valuable for reducing the size of data files stored in Cerberus. These data filtering options consist of:
iv. Start and end with the string on the reel
v. Selections that remove bad depth/circulating-pressure data during the import of Orion/
OrionNET data files (these are valuable for reducing the size of data files stored in Cerberus):
 Remove/replace out-of-range data, along with various sub-categories of this selection-

type
 Filter imported data, with further drill-down into specifics of this category
vi. A selection for real-time OrionNET data-import preferences, indicating (by checking) that the
preferences already selected for Remove/replace out-of-range data and Filter imported data
should be used.
 Use range checking and filter preferences when acquiring data real time
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Figure 41
When running is real time, the user always receives data on a one-minute interval, regardless of the setting in
Filter imported data
d. Click OK when selections and inputs are complete.
3. If not already selected, select the Track Fatigue tab in Reel-Trak.
Figure 42
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Setting Up Fatigue Tracking Display Options
 To change the way the fatigue tracking plot displays

1. Right-click the plot area; then click Options. The Plot Options dialog appears. The Fatigue tab is the default.
Figure 43
a. To choose scaling options, select from the available Used life scale options
“Fatigue” and “used life” are interchangeable terms
b. To display initial fatigue (fatigue on the string before running the job), click (to check) Display initial
used life. Initial used life appears in gray on the plot (default is checked or “on”)
c. To display fatigue due to corrosion, click (to check) Display fatigue due to corrosion. Corrosion fatigue
displays in green on the plot (default is checked or “on”)
d. To display the Model Recommended Replacement Limit (MRR), click (to check) Display Model
Recommended Replacement Limit (default is checked or “on”)
For Achilles 4.0 and prior, the MRR is assumed to be 80% of used life for all materials. For Achilles
5.0, the MRR is based on the statistical information obtained from the fatigue test data and is
determined by a confidence interval used by the model; thus, the MRR can vary by material type.
e. The user may customize used life warnings within the Custom Used Life Warning section
i. To display a warning for high used life/fatigue, input scale percentage and click (to check)
Display additional warning at [input] % (default is checked or “on”)
Current or “new” fatigue appears in blue on the plot when the current job is running/run
ii. To display a warning related to a specific tolerance interval (Achilles 5.0 only), click (to check)
Display warning using Tolerance Interval of [input] % (default is unchecked or “off”).
2. Select the Diameter tab to potentially display a high diameter warning. Choose between two high diameter
display methods: percent growth or absolute growth.
a. To display a high diameter warning, click (to check) Display high diameter warning
b. Then, click (to toggle) Percent growth: Nominal diameter + [input] % or Absolute growth: nominal
diameter + [input] [units]
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
3. Select the Options tab to select plot orientation, plot style, and various grid and string diagram options.
a. Click (to toggle) Plot orientation: Plot from Core-end or Plot from Free-end.
b. Click (to toggle) Plot style: Line or Filled area.
c. To display the grid on the plot, click (to check) Display grid.
d. To display the string diagram underneath the Position Locator, click (to check) Display string diagram.
e. To display effective zones in the string diagram, click (to check) Display effective zones in the string
diagram
Changes made to the string in String Editor (see Using the String Editor) are reflected in Reel-
Trak. For example, effective zones and their derate percentage, when designated in String Editor, are
reflected in Reel-Trak
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Understanding the Fatigue Diagram
When a job is open and the user accesses the Track Fatigue tab, the fatigue from previous job(s) run on the string are
shown in gray in Reel-Trak’s fatigue diagram. When fatigue is run for the current job, whether in real time (via
OrionNET) or from recorded data, it appears in blue. Corrosion, if shown, appears in green.
The fatigue diagram in Reel-Trak is very similar in appearance and use to the fatigue diagram in String Editor.
There are differences, however; these are described below and in the String Editor chapter. Please see Viewing
and Using the String Fatigue Display for more in-depth information about using the fatigue diagram.
Understanding the Position Locator
The Position Locator represents the current position (depth) of the reel and injector on the current string. This
is used primarily for real-time fatigue tracking, but is also visible in playback mode. The following colors may
be seen:
 Green = On the reel
 Red = Between the reel and the guide arch
 Light Blue = From the outer edge of the guide arch to the top of the injector
 Blue = Past the injector (into the well)
Figure 44
Figure 45
The coloration noted above, if present, may not be visible unless the user zooms in on the fatigue diagram.
To zoom in, click and drag the mouse over the desired diagram area. To return the diagram to normal,
right-click the diagram and select from the available size options
Understanding the String Diagram
The String Diagram portion of the Track Fatigue tab shows vertical lines to indicate welds. Zones appear per color,
which is determined by the derating amount.
Figure 46
To set up the zones that appear in the String Diagram, access the String Editor (see Using the String Editor); then
click the Zones tab. Note how the zone colors shown in the String Editor, below, correspond to those in. If not
already selected, select the Track Fatigue tab in Reel-Trak.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Figure 47
Running the Fatigue Job
The user may track fatigue in the following ways:
1. In real time (via OrionNET)
2. Post-job: After data is recorded in a database and fatigue has not yet been applied to the string
When the job has been completed and fatigue applied to the string, the user can play back the fatigue- tracking
process in playback mode.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Track Fatigue Toolbar
The following icons are visible and/or usable within the Track Fatigue toolbar.
Icon Description
Turn (toggle) alarm sound on/off
View string fatigue. This icon is grayed out in the Track

Fatigue mode, but has color in the Job Log mode. From
the Job Log mode, click this icon to move to the Track
Fatigue mode
View Reel information
View job log. From the Track Fatigue mode, click this
icon to move to the Job Log mode
Reset fatigue tracking
Stop fatigue tracking (in real time)
Run/apply one fatigue entry
Run/apply (n) fatigue entries (as set within the menu bar:
Options > Preferences > Playback Block Size)
Run/apply all fatigue entries
Pause fatigue tracking
Show diagnostic information
Connect to OrionNET
Annotation Icon
The annotation icons located in the right-hand portion of the fatigue diagram are identical to those in
String Editor. See To use the string fatigue display for additional information.
Figure 48
The display of these annotations varies, dependent on the following: if the job has not started tracking fatigue, initial
fatigue annotations are visible; if fatigue tracking has started, only permanent annotations or job-associated annotations are
visible; if the job-run is complete, only job-associated annotations are visible. If the user resets fatigue (see To modify a
string and recalculate fatigue), only initial annotations are visible.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Running the Job from Recorded Data
When the job has not yet been run, but the data for the string exists in a database, the user can execute the fatigue
tracking (run the job). The newly tracked fatigue shows on the grid in blue. If previous jobs have been run, that
fatigue is considered “existing,” or “current,” and it appears on the grid in gray.
Use the job-execution controls described in Track Fatigue Toolbar to run the job and to
see the blue fatigue-tracking information appear in the grid.
The Position Locator shows the current position (depth) of the reel and injector on the current string
(see Understanding the Position Locator for additional information).
When the fatigue is run, the software applies the fatigue as it would have occurred at the time (in blue).
Figure 49
Save the job to permanently record the entry in the string history log.
Figure 50
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
This completes the job and applies all calculated fatigue to the string. The next time it is opened, Reel-Trak opens by
default to the Post Job Analysis tab.
When the job is completed, the user may reset the job and run it in playback mode (see Running the Job in Playback
Mode). The user may also “undo” the running of fatigue for a string via the String Editor (see Printing String Data). In
this scenario, the tracked fatigue for the job is removed from the string and the job may be run as though fatigue had
never been applied.
Running the Job in Real Time
 To run the job in real time

1. Click the Connect to OrionNET toolbar icon to start the process.
Reel-Trak first checks to see if OrionNET is running on the computer and if a launch is needed.
Reel-Trak then searches for the current database and connects to it when found, starting fatigue
tracking.
The user is prompted to select the current database if one cannot be identified.
Data imported into Cerberus is filtered, so the imported data may not correspond directly to the data in
OrionNET; only the entries required for fatigue tracking are imported
2. When fatigue tracking is complete, click the Save icon on the general toolbar or the Stop button on the Track
Fatigue toolbar.
3. Fatigue tracking stops; if the Save icon was selected, the software asks if the user wishes to apply all fatigue and
complete the job
If the job is complete, a permanent entry is recorded in the string history log.
Running the Job in Playback Mode
If the job is complete, Reel-Trak opens in the Post Job Analysis tab/mode. The user may select the Track Fatigue
tab and reset the job to run it in playback mode. The button to allow connecting to OrionNET becomes disabled
, and a playback speed control becomes visible .

The fatigue for the string at the point prior to the job execution is loaded (appearing in gray). When the job is run
in playback mode, the fatigue for the job (appearing in blue) is applied to the prior fatigue as it would have occurred
during the job.
The playback block size may be set to determine how quickly playback occurs.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
 To set the playback block size
1. Right-click the Run button to display the Change Playback block size dialog.
Figure 51
1. Input the desired block size and click OK.
Using the Post Job Analysis Tab
Four post-job functions are available in the Post Job Analysis tab/mode.
 To use the Post Job Analysis options
From the left-hand column, click the hyperlinks to view the associated grids.
To zoom in on any of the graphs accessed via the hyperlinks, click and drag the mouse to form a rectangle.
To zoom out of any of the graphs, right-click the graph and click Zoom Out
1. Job Fatigue Analysis (default)

This plot represents an analysis of the fatigue added for the current job (not the total string fatigue, but
the difference between the fatigue before the job and the fatigue after the job).
The top plot renders this fatigue, as well as a single line representing the number of bending events that occurred
at each depth during the job. Additionally, the point of maximum fatigue is rendered in red to highlight it.
The bottom plot depicts the average pressure at each depth over the job.
The text at the bottom of the chart explains the maximum fatigue location and includes a reference to the wellsite
geometry and average pressure. This analysis can be used to review and job and identify operations that use CT life
more rapidly than others.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Figure 52
Position is measured from the core end in the sample instance. The user may choose between depth being
measured from the core end or from the end of the tool string, as described here: Wellsite Geometry
Also described is the number of “bad” depth values filtered out of the data for proper viewing of the results (if the
job was run in real time).
2. Pressure and Depth by Event [Number]

This graph depicts the pressure and depth by event number, independent of time. It can be used to review job
activity when the job spans multiple days, or when there are large time gaps in the job log.
Figure 53
3. Pressure and Depth by Time

___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
This graph renders the pressure and depth by time. If there are any gaps in the data (for example, when the
Data Acquisition System was not running or the data has been filtered), those gaps are rendered as a dashed
line.
Figure 54
4. Weight by Depth
This graph displays the surface weight by depth for the job.
Figure 55
5. A String Services toolbar is provided for user convenience (see String Services for more information)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Using the Job Log
Setting Up Job Log Display Options
 To change the way the job log displays

1. From the Reel-Trak menu-bar (when the Job Log tab is selected) click Options >Preferences. The
Preferences dialog appears, with the Job Log tab appearing.
Figure 56
a. Choose Job Log Setup options.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Job-log Toolbar Buttons
Table 4 - Job-log Toolbar Buttons
Tool Button Tool Name Function
View String Fatigue Moves to Track Fatigue tab in Reel-Trak
View Reel Information Accesses Selected Reel dialog
View Job Log Already accessed so grayed out
Accesses the import Data dialog, from which the

user may browse to select an Orion/OrionNET
source file and select import options.
Import Orion / OrionNET
Data
Import options include data checks and the
potential removal/replacement of “bad” or out-of-
range data
Import ASCII file Imports an ASCII text file into the current job log
Exports Data Exports the current job log as an ASCII file
New Inserts a new row at the end of the job log
Insert Inserts a row above the current row in the job log
Cuts the current selection and copies it to the

Cut
clipboard
Copy Copies the current selection to the clipboard
Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the insertion

Paste
point
Start – Final Depth Opens the Start and Final Depth dialog box
Opens the Running Feet dialog box to calculate

Running Feet
running feet for the current job log
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Job-log Menu-bar Selections
When the Reel-Trak Job Log tab is selected, use the Reel-Trak File menu-bar options to complete some of the
import/export actions described in Table 3.
Figure 57
1. Configure the job-log data.

Use the available toolbar buttons and/or menu-bar selections to assist in the job-data configuration.
Figure 58 - Job Log Job-data Display Screen before Data is Entered/Imported
Each row of job data represents one “event.” A row should be entered at least each time directions change
(such as when checking weight), and each time the pressure changes significantly. To enter data in a row, simply type
within the table.
Table 4 describes the columns in the Job Data tab within the Job Log.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Table 5
Column Required Description

The rows are automatically numbered
Event Number Yes; automatically generated
sequentially
Yes, for creating charts in the

Date Job Log
Date at the end of the event
Yes, for creating charts in the

Time Job Log
Time at the end of the event
The circulating pressure is readily available

Pressure Yes
and yields a conservative fatigue prediction
Depth Yes Enter the depth
Enter (or, more likely, import from an

OrionNET file) the actual wellhead
Wellhead Pressure No pressure (psi) throughout the job rather
than having to use an average value for
the entire job
Enter a comment, or select from
Comments Yes; automatically generated available comments for recordkeeping
purposes
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
 To enter a Check Weight row within the job-data table
1. Select the row immediately before the row where “check weight” should appear.
2. Click Weight at the bottom of the display screen.
3. Enter the Pressure, Pull up amount, and comments, or use thedefaults.
 To enter Multiple Passes within the job-data table
1. Select the row immediately before the row where the passes should appear.
2. Click Passes on the bottom of the screen.
 To edit the Default Comments available within the job-data table

1. Click Edit Default Comments on the bottom of the screen.
2. Use the available buttons to add, delete, or save comments from which to select in the screen
dropdown.
When real-time fatigue tracking has started, all become disabled with the exception of the Export to ASCII and Calculate Running
Feet functions.
Figure 59 - Job Log Post-Job-Run
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4 | Reel-Trak
Packaging a Job
Reel-Trak can package a job and place it inside of a compressed folder. If the job data was acquired in real time
with OrionNET and the OrionNET source databases are available, Package Job adds those files to the compressed
folder.
Package Job allows the reproduction of all of the fatigue tracking to occur at the base after the job is complete.
 To package a job
1. Click the Package Job icon from the Reel-Trak menu bar.
The Save As Windows-like dialog appears.
2. Name the file and click Save.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Chapter 5
Using Orpheus
This section describes the process involved in using Orpheus [Well Intervention Modeling] – the Cerberus forces
model.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
About Orpheus
When determining the feasibility of a job, it is essential to calculate the cumulative mechanical and hydraulic forces
likely to affect conveyance methods (coiled tubing, wireline, slickline, or jointed pipe).
Orpheus calculates these cumulative forces, providing immediate feedback so that the user can resolve issues
before they become insurmountable problems.
See Coiled Tubing Forces Theory for information concerning forces theory for coiled tubing.
The Orpheus Process
The process involved in using Orpheus is as follows:
1. Create a new Orpheus project or select an existing project
2. Determine a conveyance method
3. Create a tool string or select/edit an existing tool string
4. Create a well or select/edit an existing well
5. Create a fluids profile or select an existing profile
6. Perform calculations
7. Print results for hardcopy or electronic transmission
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Accessing Orpheus
 To access Orpheus from the Cerberus home page
1. Select the Orpheus button.
OR
2. Select Models > Orpheus from the menu bar.

The Orpheus model loads, as indicated by the following Figure 60 display screen:
Figure 60
As noted within the opening dialog, Orpheus (along with the other Cerberus models) is organized by projects.
From the Orpheus Well Intervention Modeling dialog, choose to start a new project, open an existing project, or load
a project from removable media or a network:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 61 - Orpheus Opening Dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Working with Projects
Creating a New Orpheus Project
The following procedure outlines how to create a new Orpheus project.
 To start a new project

1. From the Orpheus opening dialog, choose one of the following:
a. Select File > New Project from the menu bar.
b. Click the New toolbar button.
c. Select Help > Orpheus Wizard from the menu bar.

The Orpheus Wizard is a simplified Orpheus-project creation tool. The Orpheus Wizard becomes
available only after creating a name for a new project.
d. The New Orpheus Project dialog appears:
Figure 62 - New Project Dialog
Start A new Orpheus project directly from the Cerberus home page by selecting File > New > Forces Project
(Orpheus)
2. Select the Project Type to use in creating the project.
The dialog will only display the project types (Coiled Tubing, Wireline, or Jointed Pipe) which are available with the
current license. To obtain other project types, contact NOV CTES as noted in page v.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
3. Provide a New Name for the project. The name may consist of letters, numbers, and spaces, with a maximum of
32 characters and click OK.
One of two things happens:
a. The project-description dialog appears.
Figure 63
OR
b. The Orpheus Wizard dialog appears.
Figure 64
The Orpheus Wizard dialog appears only when one of the following circumstances applies:
c. The New Orpheus Project dialog is accessed via Help > Orpheus Wizard from the Orpheus menu bar.
OR
d. The Show Wizard on start-up field was previously checked and a new Orpheus project is created.
4. Configure the project using either the wizard or the standard project-creation interface (see Entering Project-
configuration Information for more information about configuring a project using the standard interface).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Opening an Existing Orpheus Project
The following procedure outlines how to open an existing project.
 To open an existing project
1. Start Orpheus.
2. From the Orpheus opening dialog, choose one of the following:
a. Select File > Open... from the menu bar.
b. Click the Open an existing project button on the Configuration tab.
c. Click the Open toolbar button.
3. The Select an Orpheus Project display screen appears.
4. Select the project-type folder.
The folders associated with active modes/project types are available.
5. Click the name of the project.
6. Search for existing projects using the Column to Search dropdown and the direct-input field in the upper right-
hand corner of the New Orpheus Project dialog. Click Search to carry out the search operation
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Organizing Projects into Folders
Orpheus is designed with default folders for each type of project (Coiled Tubing Projects, Jointed Pipe Projects, and
Wireline Projects). The default folders cannot be renamed, moved, or deleted.
When a new project is created, a folder for the project’s placement is automatically selected.
These folders are internal to Cerberus, and unrelated to folders in Windows Explorer
Projects or folders cannot be placed under different project types. (For example, CT projects cannot be placed
under the Wireline Projects folder.)
Saving an Orpheus Project
The project configuration and last set of calculated values are retained when the project is saved. There are two ways
a project can be saved:
1. Click Save ) on the toolbar
OR
2. Click File and select Save or Save As....
Deleting an Orpheus Project
Unnecessary projects can be deleted. When a project is deleted, the information is not recoverable.
 To Delete a Project
1. Click File > Delete.
The Select Orpheus display screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the project.
3. Click on the project name.
4. Click OK.
The Delete Project warning box appears to confirm deleting the selected project.
5. Click Yes.
6. The selected project is deleted and the user is returned to the Orpheus main display screen.
can be exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media, a job can
be imported into Cerberus. The export files may also be emailed to another person for use on their computer.
To learn more about importing and exporting files click on the link below or see Chapter 3 of this
document.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Entering Project-configuration Information
Configuration information is stored within a project, so it is quickly accessible without the necessity of re- input.
 To enter Coiled Tubing (CT), Jointed Pipe (JP), or Wireline (WL) project-configuration information
1. Open an existing Orpheus project or create a new project.
2. Click the yellow-folder icon to browse among conveyances and select from existing CT Strings, JP Strings, or
WL cables.
OR
3. Click the icon associated with the conveyance string/cable to edit the current component or create a new
component.
a. For a Coiled Tubing Project
Figure 65 - Orpheus Coiled Tubing Configuration Tab
Click the Edit String ( ) icon to access the String Editor display screen.
If the CT String selected is of type FLATpakTM, hydraulics and catastrophic buckling calculations are not
available with this release of Cerberus.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
b. For a Jointed Pipe Project
Figure 66 - Orpheus Jointed Pipe Configuration Tab
Click the Edit Pipe ) icon to access the Jointed Pipe Editor display screen.
c. For a Wireline Project
Figure 67 - Orpheus Wireline Configuration Tab
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Click the Edit Cable ) icon to select a wireline if none is selected and to access the Wireline Editor dialog:
Figure 68
Then, click the ellipses to select from recently used cables, or click the yellow-folder icon to access the Select
Cable dialog, from which another cable may be selected.
To edit the wireline weakpoint, click the Edit Weakpoint ( ) icon to access the Weakpoint Project
Options dialog.
4. (Optional for CT and JP) Use/edit an existing Bottomhole Assembly (BHA)/toolstring or create a new
BHA/toolstring.
Click the associated yellow-folder icon to browse and select from existing BHAs/toolstrings.
Figure 69
5. Use/edit existing well or create a new well.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Click the Well Geometry yellow-folder icon to browse and select from existing wells.
OR
Click the Edit Well ( ) toolbar icon to access the Well Editor display screen.
6. Select fluids for use in the project.
a. Click the Select Fluids icon ( ) to access the Fluid Distribution dialog.
b. Fluid Distribution
Launch the Fluid Distribution display screen using one of two methods
i. From the Configuration tab, click the Select Fluids icon

OR
ii. From the Calculate tab, click the button adjacent to the fluid density fields (when the conveyance
is wireline, no button for CT/JP fluid density appears).
Figure 70
7. Select the job Application from the available dropdown. The selected application controls the available inputs
on the Calculate tab:
For Coiled Tubing: Conventional Operation or Coiled Tubing Drilling determine the allowed user inputs in the
software; Other allows all inputs
For Wireline: Open Hole Operations, Cased Hole Operations, or Other
For Jointed Pipe: Workover, Drilling (Conventional), Drilling (Underbalanced), Hydraulic Workover (HWO),
Pipe Conveyed Logging (PCL), Tubing Conveyed Perforating (TCP), Running Completion, Running Casing,
Running Liner, or Other.
a. Select the Wellsite Geometry icon (CT) – adjacent to the Application field ( ) – to input Unsupported
CT length and Guide arch radius from the related dialog. This information is important for the catastrophic
buckling calculation and the stretch calculations.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 71
8. Select the Current Task from the dropdown: Job Planning, Real-time Job Monitoring, Post- job Analysis.
9. Add Project Notes as desired.
Figure 72
Edit the Fluid Flow table(s):

a. Within the table, select rows by clicking within the far-left-hand column, and use the
Delete and/or Insert buttons to delete or insert rows.
b. Input data.
c. Select the RIH and POOH tabs to input data for both.
10. Fluid Configuration
a. Gas/Liquid Ratio (GLR)

a. For multi-phase fluids, the user has the option to apply the GLR defined in the fluid editor to the liquid
flow rate and the gas flow rate.
b. If the user clicked (to check) the Use fluid GLR (defined in Fluid Editor) toggle box (available only if a
multiphase fluid is used), then the gas flow rate is automatically calculated based on the user-entered
liquid flow rate and GLR value (or the liquid flowrate is automatically calculated based on the user-entered
gas-flow rate and GLR value).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
i. If the user does not select Use fluid GLR (Defined in Fluid Editor), then both liquid
flow rate and gas flow rate may be input separately.
When the Use fluid GLR (defined in Fluid Editor) is selected, the GLR button’s background color
changes to light yellow. Hold the mouse over the button to see the tool tip
c. Annular Flow
The user has the option to define annular flow rates differently from the CT/JP flow rates.
i. If Specify annular flow is selected, then both liquid flow rate and gas flow rate are
defined (input) separately.
ii. If Specify annular flow is not selected, then the flow rates apply to both the CT/ JP and
the annulus.
When the Specify annual flow is selected, the related button’s background color changes to light yellow.
Hold the mouse over the button to see the tooltip.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Performing Calculations
Figure 73 - Orpheus Project Display Screen
Calculation Methods
The following calculation methods are available via the Calculate tab:
1. Standard Calculations
2. Analysis Tools, accessed via the Calculation Tools button
3. User-friendly question-and-answer wizards, accessed via the Q & A tab
4. Report Generator
Calculations are not stored with a project; they must be recalculated for future use.
If a CT String is of type FLATpakTM, hydraulics and catastrophic buckling calculations are not available with
this release of Cerberus
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Standard Calculations
To gain access to standard calculations, select the Calculate tab from an Orpheus-project display screen. Standard
calculations are accessed via buttons along the right-hand portion of the Calculate- tab display screen.
Slight differences exist among the conveyance methods’ standard-calculation display-screen appearances and
procedures:
Figure 74 - Coiled Tubing Standard-Calculation Buttons
Figure 75 - Wireline Standard-Calculation Buttons
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 76 - Jointed Pipe Standard-Calculation Buttons
Prior to using the functions available in either the Calculate tab or the Q&A tab, the user may input (from the right-
hand side of the Calculate-tab panel) Top and/or Bottom Depths of Interest to affect calculations of type “tripping” or
“running.” “At depth” calculation results do not reflect Depth of Interest designations.
These designations affect tripping or running calculations viewed via the Report Generator button, and several
tripping or running functions in the Calculation Tools:
1. Sensitivity Analysis
2. Report Generator
3. Weak Point Selection
4. Pump Down Rate
Calculate Maximum Depth
For CT and JP, the maximum depth calculation shows the lockup depth and/or the yield limit.
For wireline, the maximum depth calculation shows the depth at which the wireline either enters
compression or exceeds the tensile limit.
 To calculate maximum depth

Select Calculate > Calculate Maximum Depth.
On the Q & A tab, select Getting into and out of the well. Then select "Can I reach TD...?”
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 77 - Maximum Depth Calculation
Fluid Flow
Click the icon adjacent to the flow-rate field(s) to reveal the Fluid Flow dialog. Two options
are available:
Figure 78
For multi-phase fluids, the user has the option to apply the GLR defined in the fluid editor to the liquid flow rate and
the gas flow rate. See Gas/Liquid Ratio (GLR).
The user has the option to define annular flow rates differently from the CT/JP flow rates. See Annular Flow.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Trip In and Out (CT and JP)/Run in and Out (WL)
The Trip/Run In and Out calculation provides graphs of surface weight plotted against depth as the tools are
tripped/run into and out of the well. The calculation is performed from the surface to the measured depth, providing a
quick overview of the surface weights to expect for all depths of the job.
If lockup is detected (CT) at a depth shallower than the measured depth, a warning message is displayed and the
measured depth is reset to a value slightly lower than the lockup depth before the application resumes calculations.
If the maximum depth is detected (WL) at a depth shallower than the measured depth, the graph indicates the maximum
depth. The curve then continues in gray to the measured depth, as if the wireline could withstand compression.
 To calculate trip/run in and out

Select the Trip/Run In and Out button.
On the Q & A tab of an Orpheus project, select Getting into and out of the well. Then select one of the
“Plot a graph” scenarios.
Figure 79 - Surface Weight vs. Depth (CT)
Figure 80 - Surface Weight vs. Depth (WL)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
The Surface Weight graph plots weight against depth as the CT/WL is run into the well (shown in blue) and out of
the well (shown in green). The calculation is performed from the surface to the depth of interest specified on the
calculate tab.
Orpheus can calculate the lower compression and upper yield limits on the surface weight as the CT/JP/WL is run in
and out of the well. By default, Orpheus does not calculate these limits because they dramatically increase the
calculation time. NOV CTES recommends calculating them only when needed.
Orpheus does not consider the capabilities of the surface equipment; it only considers the properties of the
conveyance and tool
Modeled Data
For the Surface Weight vs. Depth calculation, (Trip In and Out (CT and JP)/Run in and Out (WL), view the
modeled data for the graph:
 To access the modeled data

From the Surface Weight vs. Depth dialog, select Data > Modeled Data.
Field Data Input
For the Surface Weight vs. Depth calculation (Trip In and Out (CT and JP)/Run in and Out (WL), data can be
created from scratch or imported from an external file (ASCII text or Orion database).
 To access the field data-entry area

1. Select the Calculate tab within an Orpheus project.
2. Click Trip In and Out (CT and JP)/Run in and Out (WL).
3. Select Data > Field Data from the menu bar of the Surface Weight vs. Depth dialog. The Orpheus Field Data
Import dialog appears.
Figure 81
Two tabs are available on the Orpheus Field Data Import form: Averaged Data and All Data.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Using the Data Tabs
The data in the Averaged Data tab is for display only; it is not editable. All data changes must be made in the
All Data tab. If “All Data” tab is selected, then all data will display on the chart.
If “Averaged Data” tab is selected, then the averaged data will display on the chart.
 To use the All Data tab
1. Input data manually as desired within the table
2. Click the Add new row toolbar icon to append a new row to the table
3. Click the Insert new row toolbar icon to insert a new row above the selected row in the table
4. Click the Delete row toolbar icon to delete the selected row from the table
5. Click the Clear all toolbar icon to delete all rows in the table.
Import Options
1. Click (to check) Append to existing data during import to append any imported file data (OrionNET or
ASCII) to the table. When this box is unchecked (the default), any existing data is overwritten during data
import
2. The Data Interval (Averaging) input changes the averaging interval. This interval is used to filter data to
reduce clutter on the graph. If 100 ft is used for the averaging interval, all the data points within a 100 ft
interval will be averaged into a single data point for each direction on the graph.
Importing OrionNET Data
 To import OrionNET data
1. Click the OrionNET Import Settings link to display an informational popup describing the settings used
during the import process.
Figure 82
2. Algorithm A will reduce the amount of data that is imported. Using this option will improve graphing
performance, remove a lot of the noise in the data and provide smaller files when exporting to other
computers.
3. Algorithm B will import the maximum amount of data points. This will allow importing all of the valid data
and will prevent losing the extreme values which would be averaged out in Algorithm A.
4. Click the Import OrionNET Data button to open the Select OrionNET File dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
5. A pop-up form appears for selecting a time-range for data import.
Figure 83
6. elect the Time checkbox to change the time or leave the default time then click OK.
7. Click (to select) the file to import and click Open to begin the import. After successfully importing a file, all
fields are editable except the Event field.
Importing ASCII Data
 To import ASCII data

1. Click the ASCII Import Settings link to display the ASCII File Import Settings dialog.
Figure 84
The ASCII File Import Settings dialog allows the user to either Use Cerberus default import format or Use
a customized import format. Customized import allows the user to parse the selected file and to choose fields
to be used during the import process.
These settings are shared with Reel-Trak; saving them also changes the settings Reel-Trak uses to import
ASCII data
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Setting Graph Configurations
See Setting Graph Display Options in Orpheus for information concerning altering the way calculation
results are displayed graphically.
 To set graph scale
1. Left click and drag to zoom in to a specified area.

2. Right click to display a menu to Scale or Zoom Out.
a. If Scale is selected, a Plot Scale popup appears, from which the user may specify Minimum and
Maximum Tension and Minimum and Maximum Depth.
b. Selecting Zoom out is effective only if the graph has been zoomed using the mouse click-and-
drag method on the graph surface.
3. Right-click and drag will pan the graph.
4. Middle-click will automatically zoom out.
Run at Depth
The Run at Depth calculation in Orpheus provides a look at the forces, stresses, and other parameters along
the length of the string while the string is positioned at a given depth. This calculation uses the user-
specified force on the end of the string. After the calculation is performed, the user may modify the depth,
force on end, or surface weight from the output graph screen. This allows the user to enter a known surface
weight and to see the expected force on the end of the string – particularly useful in stuck-string situations
where the user wants to know what tension the string is in while pulling a specific value at surface.
 To calculate Run at Depth
1. Select the Run at Depth button to observe, in graphic format, the Effective Axial Force at Measured
Depth (default) display screen.
In the Q & A tab, select Performing the job at depth. Then, click Plot a graph of CT Tension vs. Depth
(CT), or Plot a graph of Cable Tension vs. Depth (WL).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 85 - Coiled Tubing Run at Depth Graph
In the CT graph, if the Helical Buckling Load (red line) is greater than the axial load while RIH (blue line), then
helical buckling is occurring at that section of the tubing, although lockup has not necessarily occurred.
For information concerning the effective force, see the NOV CTES “tech note” The Effective Force
by Ken Newman and Kenneth Bhalla, dated January 13, 1999:
http://ctes.nov.com/Documentation/technotes/Tech Note Effective Force.pdf
Figure 86 - Wireline Run at Depth Graph
2. The user may view the default Effective axial force graph, or may select another type of chart (from the
dropdown) to view calculated forces exerted the length of a conveyance at a specified measured depth.
a. Within the default Effective axial force graph, the user may:
i. Change Measured depth; then click the Calculate and Refresh icon ( ).
ii. Click (to toggle) the Surface Weight field and enter the desired weight. This will allow the user
to enter a surface weight and calculate the forces all along the string. This input value will only
apply to one of the curves displayed on the graph. This is controlled by the RIH/POOH combo
box.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
iii. Click (to toggle) the Force on end field and enter the desired force. This will allow the user to
change the force on the bottom of the tool and see the effect of this force change all along the
length of the string. This input value will only affect one curve, based on the RIH/POOH combo
box.
When the Force on end becomes too negative in CT or JP mode, the string locks up. In this situation, the
program calculates an approximate Surface Weight, overriding any user surface-weight input. The user can
verify the values displayed on the screen by viewing the top and bottom effective force from the modeled data
grid.
3. (Optional: CT /JP) Click the CT Limits/Pipe Limits icon ( ) to view limits at measured depth. This graph
only displays the limits at a single point in the string. The user can control where in the string the graph is
associated with by changing the CT position input, and if the position is at surface, the user can select above or
below stripper, or at the CT inlet. This graph will default to displaying the location that has the worst-case stress.
Figure 87
4. (Optional: WL) If the well is Riserless, the Run at Depth calculation results appear as follows:
a. Riserless graphs are available for selection from the dropdown menu
Figure 88
The discontinuity is attributable to the pressure difference at the wellhead
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
1. View the modeled data table(s) by clicking, within the menu bar, Data > Modeled Data.
Figure 89 - Run at Depth: Modeled Data Table (Mechanical Data)
If a Hydraulics-enabled access key is in use (see Fluids Model: Advanced Hydraulics Options), three tables
become available: Hydraulics data (RIH), and Hydraulics data (POOH), and Mechanical data.
Figure 90 - Run at Depth: Modeled Data Table (RIH Hydraulic Data)
If hydraulics are not enabled, then the pressure columns appear in the Mechanical data table.
If a CT String is of type FLATpakTM, hydraulics and catastrophic buckling calculations are not available with this
release of Cerberus.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Force Regions
Force Regions calculates the regions of yield, tension, compression, helical buckling (CT and JP only), and
sinusoidal bucking (CT and JP only), along the length of the conveyance at a specific measured depth.
 To calculate forces
1. Select the Force Regions button.
On the Q & A tab, select Performing the job at depth. Then click View a 3D animation of pipe Tension
vs. Depth (CT or JP), or View a 3D animation of Cable Tension vs. Depth (WL).
Figure 91
Maximum Set-down Force (CT)/Maximum Weight on Bit (JP)
The maximum set-down force is the maximum compressive force (negative) that can be transmitted to the downhole
end of the tool string at the measured depth. This downhole weight corresponds to the minimum surface weight at
lockup (CT)/lockup limit (JP) on the Surface Weight graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 92 - Coiled Tubing Set Down Force Graph
Figure 93 - Jointed Pipe Set Down Force Graph
 To calculate set-down force

Select the Maximum Set-down Force (CT)/Maximum Weight on Bit button (JP).
On the Q & A tab and select Performing the job at depth. Then click How does the set-down force
(WOB) vary with surface weight?
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Maximum Pick-up Force (CT)/Maximum Overpull (JP/WL)
The maximum pick-up force is the maximum pull that can be applied at the end of the tool string at the specified
measured depth before yield occurs at some point in the conveyance medium.
Orpheus considers the forces along the entire conveyance, not just at the surface, when performing this
calculation.
For coiled tubing, ensure that the predicted surface weight does not exceed the maximum pulling force of
the injector, although this is rare
 To calculate maximum pick-up force (CT)/overpull (WL/JP)

Select the Maximum Pick-up Force (CT)/Maximum Overpull button (WL/JP).
On the Q & A tab and select Performing the job at depth. Then click Plot a graph of Maximum Pick-up
Force against Depth
Figure 94 - Coiled Tubing Maximum Pick-up Force Calculation
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Forces on String (CT)/Tool & Cable (WL)/Pipe (JP)
The Forces on String/Tool & Cable/Pipe calculates the net force on the conveyance. The calculation is a combination
of tractor pull, buoyant tool and cable (CT) weight, wellbore friction, fluid drag on the tool, and any excess drag on
the conveyance (excess drag on the conveyance is any drag over and above the conveyance’s buoyant weight).
 To calculate the forces on string (CT)/tool & cable (WL)/pipe (JP)

Click the Calculate tab, then the Forces on String/Tool & Cable/Pipe button.
On the Q & A tab, select Performing the job at depth. Then, click What are the forces acting at this
depth
Figure 95 - Wireline Forces on Tool & Cable Calculation
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Analysis Tools
Analysis tools are accessed via Orpheus’s Calculate tab > Calculation Tools, or via the
Tools menu-bar item.
Figure 96 - Coiled Tubing Analysis Tools
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Sensitivity Analysis
Use the Sensitivity Analysis Wizard to vary key parameters with the intent of testing their effect on lockup
depth (CT), maximum attainable depth (WL), set-down force, pick-up force, and maximum over-pull at the
cable head (WL).
Within the interface, three areas or “panels” (Project Information, Sensitivity Setting, and Sensitivity
Analysis) reside in one wizard display.
All the areas can be resized, hidden, minimized, or maximized by the user.
The user may view project information without leaving the wizard. Available project information includes
CT/JP string (WL toolstring), BHA, well geometry and survey, fluids, wellsite parameters, and project options.
The plots of the CT/JP string, BHA or toolstring, and well geometry and survey are displayed also.
Sensitivity Analysis Wizard: User Interface and Functionality
The wizard window consists of:

1. Top menu-bar
2. Project Information panel
3. Sensitivity Setting panel
4. Sensitivity Analysis panel, including data and graph
5. Bottom panel for main options and command buttons
Figure 97 - Sensitivity Analysis Wizard
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Menu Bar
 To use the Sensitivity Analysis menu bar

1. The File menu allows the creation of a new setting, provides various template operations, and provides
options for printing the analyses and exiting the application.
Figure 98 - Sensitivity Analysis File Menu
a. Select New Setting to clear out the sensitivity table shown in the Sensitivity Analysis panel of the
display. In a cleared-out sensitivity table, Friction factor is selected by default as the only parameter
and Lockup depth is selected as the only output (See Sensitivity Analysis Setting Panel for information
concerning this panel).
b. Select one of the template options: Open, Save, Save As, or Delete. In each instance, the Template
Summary is shown in the right-hand portion of the dialog.
Figure 99
The File > Save As option allows the user to input a Template Name in the related field.
c. Select Print to access the Orpheus Print Manager and to determine print options.
2. The Edit menu allows the user to insert, delete, or clear sensitivity table rows; to copy the whole sensitivity
table contents (including the column headers) to the clipboard for potential spreadsheet paste; or to sort
columns.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 100 - Sensitivity Analysis Edit Menu
3. The Options menu allows the user to show/hide the project information panel, to show/hide the
sensitivity setting panel, to freeze the parameter columns as the user moves toward the right portion of the
analysis-table display, or to include the results when printing an Orpheus report.
Figure 101 - Sensitivity Analysis Options Menu
If the last option above (Include results when printing Orpheus report) is selected before the user
returns to the main Orpheus display, and if the main report is printed from the report generator, then the
sensitivity analysis results are included in the printed report.
This option is accessible from both the menu-bar Options item and from the bottom panel of the
Sensitivity Analysis Wizard.
4. The Tools menu allows the user to Calculate data or to launch the Sensitivity Parameter Matrix Wizard.
Figure 102 - Sensitivity Analysis Tools Menu
Both tool functions are also available via buttons in the bottom panel of the main Sensitivity Analysis
Wizard display.
Project Information Panel
Un-editable project information for the user’s review is provided in the Project Information panel of the
Orpheus Sensitivity Analysis by way of various tabs in the left-hand portion of the panel.
If the project does not contain a BHA (CT)/Toolstring (WL), then no BHA/Toolstring tab appears. Sensitivity
Analysis
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 103 - Project Information Panel
Sensitivity Analysis Setting Panel
The Sensitivity Setting panel contains tabs that allow the user to select parameters and outputs for the
sensitivity calculation. The Graphs tab in the Sensitivity Analysis panel is available only if the number of
parameters selected is one or two. (See the Sensitivity Analysis Wizard figure to better understand the wizard
layout.)
Parameters selected (checked) within the Sensitivity Setting Parameters tab are shown in the Sensitivity
Analysis panel’s Data tab as column headings.
Figure 104 - Sensitivity Setting Panel – Parameters Tab
Outputs selected (checked) within the Sensitivity Setting Outputs tab are shown in the Sensitivity Analysis
panel’s Data tab as columns with a light-yellow background. When a calculation is completed, the output cells
are filled with calculated values or the symbol “-” if there is no solution for the output.
Lockup depth (CT/JP) or Maximum depth (WL) is always selected and the option is disabled
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 105 - Sensitivity Setting Panel – Outputs Tab
As mentioned previously, Graphs are available and visible in the Sensitivity Analysis panel’s Graphs tab
when the number of parameters selected in the Sensitivity Setting panel’s Parameters tab is one or two. The
wizard makes graphs of the selected outputs vs. the primary parameter. If there are two selected parameters,
the user may select the primary parameter against which curves are plotted.
Figure 106 - Sensitivity Setting Panel – Graphs Tab
Sensitivity Analysis Panel
Use the Sensitivity Analysis panel to edit parameter cell values and to view graphs calculated from the cell values
when the number of parameters selected in the Sensitivity Setting panel’s Parameters tab is one or two.
 To edit a numeric parameter cell value

1. Select the cell.
2. Input the value.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
 To edit a non-numeric value (CT/JP string, wireline, BHA or toolstring, or well)
1. Double-click the cell.
2. Select from the items available in the associated dialog.
Figure 107 - Sensitivity Analysis Panel
As noted earlier, graphs are visible in the Sensitivity Analysis panel’s Graphs tab when the number of
parameters selected in the Sensitivity Setting panel’s Parameters tab is one or two.
Graph type is determined by the type of the primary parameter: curves for a primary parameter of numeric
type; bars for a primary parameter of non-numeric type. Legends for curves or bars are displayed to the
right of the graph.
Graph titles (or the outputs) are listed in the dropdown below the graph, and legends are available from which
the user may select different views of the graphs.
Sensitivity Analysis Panel
When the left-most panels (which includes both Project Information panel and the Sensitivity Setting panel)
are visible, they may be hidden or maximized by using the buttons in the top, right-
hand portion of the Project Information panel. When manipulation of the panels causes the
buttons to become unavailable, click the Project Information and Sensitivity Setting button that appears
vertically in the left-most portion of the wizard to restore the left-most panels.
 To alter the panel viewing method
1. Click the left-pointing button to hide the left-side panels and to maximize the Sensitivity Analysis
panel’s table and graph tabs.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 108
2. Click the Project Information and Sensitivity Setting button that appears vertically in the left- most
portion of the wizard to restore the previous panel view.
3. Click the right-pointing button to maximize the left panels and to hide the Sensitivity Analysis panel.
Figure 109
4. Click the middle button to restore the panel layout to its original configuration.
Bottom Panel: Parameter Matrix Wizard and Calculate Button
The bottom panel contains the Parameter Matrix Wizard... button, the Calculate button, and the Exit
[Sensitivity Analysis] button.
The Parameter Matrix Wizard allows customization of the parameter value lists and the generation of complete
combinations of the parameter-value lists, so that the user does not have to prepare a large number of data rows
manually (see Definitions, Overview and Examples for additional information).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
 To use the Parameter Matrix Wizard
1. Click the Parameter Matrix Wizard... button to launch the wizard.
Lists of parameter values from the main Sensitivity Analysis panel’s Data tab are loaded in the table on
the left-hand side, and the matrix corresponding to the complete combination of the parameter value lists
is displayed on the right-hand side.
Figure 110 - Parameter Matrix Wizard
2. To customize the parameter-value list, click a parameter column in the value-list table.
The Parameter Value Editor dialog appears. The Parameter Value Editor dialog appears in one of two forms: one
for numeric parameters and one for non-numeric parameters.
Figure 111 - Numeric Parameter Value Editor
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 112 - Non-numeric Parameter Value Editor
3. Use the Edit Values instructions to edit the parameters.

4. Click OK to return to the Sensitivity Parameter Matrix Wizard, where the edited list of values has populated
the parameter column (left-hand side), replacing the original list, and the matrix on the right-hand side has
been automatically updated.
5. Click OK on the Sensitivity Parameter Matrix Wizard to return to the main Sensitivity Analysis Wizard
display.
The parameters in the Data tab of the Sensitivity Analysis panel have been replaced with the edited values.
 To calculate the outcome of the sensitivity analysis
1. Click the Calculate button.
A progress bar is shown at the top right-hand side of the Sensitivity Analysis Wizard display.
2. Press the ESC key or click the link label to cancel the calculation.
Definitions, Overview and Examples Sensitivity Setting - Definitions
Parameter: A parameter is an item to which the user can assign value(s) for overriding current values in the
current Orpheus project. Parameter(s) are selected by the user and the value(s) are used in the sensitivity
calculation.
Output: An output is an item that the wizard calculates. An output is selected by the user.
Primary Parameter: The primary parameter is the parameter against which the calculated output(s) are
plotted, and so is the x-axis of the graph.
Secondary Parameter: The secondary parameter corresponds to the different curves of an output vs. the
primary parameter. Values of the secondary parameter are displayed as the legends of a graph.
Analysis Table: The sensitivity analysis table is comprised of two parts: the parameter columns for the user
to enter values and the output columns to display the calculated values (these have a light-yellow
background color). HLP1
Table 6
Parameter 1 Parameter 2 … Output 1 Output 2 …
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Parameter Matrix: The parameter matrix is comprised of rows of parameter values. Following is an example
in which the matrix is the complete combination of three parameter-value lists. However, a matrix does not have to be
a complete combination of parameter-value lists.
Table 7 - Parameter-value Lists
Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3

P11 P21 P31
P12 P22 P32
P33
Table 8 - Parameter Matrix
Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3

P11 P21 P31
P11 P21 P32
P11 P21 P33
P11 P22 P31
P11 P22 P32
P11 P22 P33
P12 P21 P31
P12 P21 P32
P12 P21 P33
P12 P22 P31
P12 P22 P32
P12 P22 P33
Sensitivity Setting: Information associated with an Orpheus project and saved in an Orpheus database for
performing a sensitivity analysis. The information includes:
1. Selection of parameters
2. Selection of outputs
3. Primary parameter
4. Parameter matrix
Figure 113 - Sensitivity Setting Panel in Sensitivity Analysis Wizard
Sensitivity Template: Information for performing a sensitivity analysis, saved in an Orpheus database, but not
associated with any Orpheus project. The user may save current sensitivity analysis information as a template by
selecting File > Save as Template from the menu bar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Sensitivity Analysis Overview
The sensitivity analysis wizard can be used to calculate selected items (Outputs) using current project data and user-
entered data for the selected parameters.
When the number of selected parameters is one or two, the wizard also plots graphs of the selected outputs vs.
the primary parameter.
For this version of Cerberus, the available parameters for different application types are shown below:
Figure 114 - Sensitivity Analysis Parameters
The available outputs and the descriptions for different application types are shown below:
Figure 115 - Available Sensitivity Analysis Outputs
Example 1 -- Single Parameter
If :
Friction factor is the only parameter selected,
And a list of Friction factor values is entered,
And Lockup depth is the only output selected (as shown below),
Then:
The wizard calculates the lockup depths based on current project data and the friction factor values given here.
Also, a curve of Lockup depth vs. Friction factor can be plotted to show how sensitive Lockup depth is to
Friction factor.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 116
Example 2 -- Two Parameters

If :
Friction factor and CT string are the parameters selected,
And a matrix of parameter values is entered,
And lockup depth and maximum set-down force are the outputs selected,
Then:
The wizard calculates the lockup depths and maximum set-down forces based on current project data,
and the friction factor values and CT strings given here.
Graphs can be plotted for the calculated results. However, the primary parameter, against which the
calculated lockup depths and maximum set-down forces are plotted, must be selected first. The primary
parameter also determines the graph type. If the primary parameter is not of numeric type (for example,
CT string, or Well) then bar charts, instead of curves, are plotted.
Case 1 – Complete combination of parameter value lists
If CT string is selected as the primary parameter, then bar charts of lockup depth and maximum set-
down force, respectively, vs. CT string, can be plotted, as shown below.
Table 9
Primary
Parameter
Friction Factor Friction Factor Lockup Depth Maximum Set
Down
X1 C1 L11 S11
X1 C2 L12 S12
X1 C3 L13 S13
X2 C1 L21 S21
X2 C2 L22 S22
X2 C3 L23 S23
User Input Wizard Calculated
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 117
Now, if Friction factor is selected as the primary parameter, then curves of lockup depth and
maximum set-down force, respectively, vs. friction factor, are plotted as shown below.
Primary
Parameter
CT Strings Friction Factor Lockup Depth Maximum Set
Down
С1 X1 L11 S11
С1 X2 L21 S21
С2 X1 L12 S12
С2 X2 L22 S22
С3 X1 L13 S13
С3 X2 L23 S23
User Input Wizard Calculated
C1 C1
Maximum Set-Down
C2 C2
Lockup Depth
C3 C3
Friction Factor Friction Factor
Case 2 – Incomplete combination of parameter value lists
The parameter matrix need not be a complete combination of the selected parameter value lists. For this
example, if the 4th and 5th rows of the matrix are missing or if there is no solution for these two rows
(displayed as “-”), and assuming the primary parameter is CT string, then the table and the graphs
appear as follows:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Now, if the primary parameter is Friction factor, then the table and the graphs will appear as follows:
Missing two rows

No solution (-) for tworows
Example 3 – More than Two Parameters

If this situation, the wizard calculates the selected outputs based on current project data and the parameter values given
here. No graph will be plotted.
Printing Sensitivity Analysis Results
The user may print the sensitivity analysis results for either inside the Sensitivity Analysis wizard display screen
or as an appendix to the main Orpheus report.
 To print sensitivity analysis results from the Sensitivity Analysis Wizard
1. From the Sensitivity Analysis Wizard, select File > Print from the menu bar. The Orpheus Print Manager
appears.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
1. From the Orpheus Print Manager, click (to check) Include Cover Page, if desired, and select Printer Options.
2. Click the Configure button to complete further options.
3. Select the Printer from the dropdown. If the user has:
a. A SharePoint URL with the related Cerberus configuration set up as described in Cerberus Setup >
SharePoint tab, and
b. The CTES PDF Printer 50 printer selected in the application.
Then the Save PDF file to SharePoint checkbox becomes available in the application.
4. Click the Select Logo button to select a logo.
5. Click the Print button.
 To include sensitivity analysis results in the main Orpheus report
1. From the Sensitivity Analysis display screen, after having completed the calculation, click Include results
when printing Orpheus report in the lower left-hand corner of the display.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Sensitivity Analysis Calculated
Figure 118
The results are included in the Orpheus report as an appendix.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Report Generator
The Report Wizard performs all the standard calculations simultaneously. Calculations can then be viewed or
printed.
Figure 119
On the Q & A tab, select Other calculations, then Use the Report Generator to create a full analysis
and print a report
When Automatic Report (CT and WL only) is toggled in the Report Generator wizard, the resulting generated
report defaults to the Summary view. Various other views are available (via buttons), including Reaching Depth,
Working at Depth, Workstring, and Contingencies.
Graphical representations are available via the Graphs button on a generated report, and the
type of graph is available via a dropdown selection at top-of-page.
Figure 120
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
From the graphical representations, the user may set graph configurations to plot the scale or to zoom out of a zoomed
graph.
 To set graph scale
1. Left click and drag to zoom in to a specified area.
2. Right click to display a menu to Scale or Zoom Out.
a. If Scale is selected, a Plot Scale popup appears, from which the user may specify Minimum and
Maximum Tension and Minimum and Maximum Depth.
b. Selecting Zoom out is effective only if the graph has been zoomed using the mouse click-and- drag
method on the graph surface.
3. Right-click and drag will pan the graph.
 Middle-click will automatically zoom out
Disconnect (CT)
The Disconnect Wizard (CT) helps to select the optimum setting for a mechanical disconnect. The
mechanical disconnect must be set high enough so that it does not interfere with normal operation;
however, it must also be set low enough so that it activates before the CT is damaged.
Figure 121
In the Disconnect Wizard, the Maximum overpull in normal operating conditions, as well as the
Disconnect must activate before are specified as percentages of the yield strength. The wizard then
calculates the connector tensions for when those percentages are reached anywhere along the CT (usually at
surface). Finally, a disconnect setting that is in between the two-connector tension-values can be selected.
On the Q & A tab, select Selecting the CT string and BHA, then What is the optimum release setting for a
mechanical disconnect?
Weak Point Selection (WL/JP)
The Weak Point Selection wizard helps to select the optimum weak point for the job. The weak point must
be high enough so that it does not interfere with normal operation; however, it must also be low enough so
that it breaks before the cable is damaged.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
In the Weak Point Wizard, the maximum overpull in normal operations, as well as when the cable must break – as
percentages of the nominal cable breaking strength – are specified. The wizard then calculates the cable head tensions
for when those percentages are reached anywhere along the cable (usually at surface). Finally, a weak point that is in
between the two cable head tension values can be selected.
On the Q & A tab, select Selecting the toolstring, then What is the best weak point for this job?
Tool Fit Analysis
The Tool Fit Analysis wizard uses the highly sophisticated Finite Element Analysis (FEA) tool bending model for
its calculations.
This utility calculates what size tool will fit around a bend. The assumption can be made either that the tool is rigid
and the calculations are based entirely on geometry, or that the tool can bend. In the latter case, the amount of force
needed to push the tool around the dogleg is calculated, as are the stresses exerted on the toolstring. This advanced
calculation requires additional input data, and is the method used throughout Orpheus when using tool model 2 in
the Project Calculations Options.
Figure 122
The FEA model divides the tool into short elements and calculates the position of the tool in the wellbore. The
effects of the axial force, variations in curvature, and tool stiffness are included. Special calculations are done for
centralizers and knuckle joints and rollers. The resulting drag calculations and stress calculations for the tool are
highly accurate.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 123
String Design (CT)
Extended Reach (CT/JP)
The Extended Reach wizard is used to project past the current well TD. This helps to predict how far the
user could possibly proceed if the well continued on its present trajectory.
Figure 124
Friction Coefficient Analysis
The Friction Coefficient Wizard is used to help determine what the friction coefficient(s) should be to get the
best match between the actual surface weight (as recorded during a job) and model predictions. This is called
the "Apparent Friction.
If the wizard is launched while there is no field data associated with the current Orpheus project, all
functionalities are disabled, as shown below. Field data must be loaded in the project for the wizard to
perform friction-factor modeling.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 125
Click Import field data to browse for and load field data.
When field data was previously saved with the project, the data is displayed when the wizard is launched in
the context of an open project.
Figure 126
Using the Graph Area of the Friction Coefficient Analysis
The Surface Weight graph displays the following:

1. The points of surface weight vs. tripping depth of the field data.
The data points are divided into three categories: Disregarded, Unselected, and Selected. Only Selected
data is used in friction factor modeling.
2. The Surface Weight curves for RIH and POOH.
The surface weight curves are calculated with current project settings (specifically, current friction factors
defined in Well Editor). However, if wellhead pressure and tripping speed are available in the field data, then
these data are used to interpolate the real pressure and speed at each tripping depth.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
In the Display area of the Surface Weight graph portion of the Friction Coefficient Wizard, the following
actions are available:
3. Click (to check) Disregarded data to see the disregarded data on the graph and in the data table in the
right-hand portion of the wizard.
4. Click (to check) Selected section to shade the selected section with yellow coloration.
5. Click (to toggle) Legends, Well geometry, or Well survey to see these types of information displayed to
the immediate right of the graph.
6. Click the Maximize Graph button to see an enlarged graph, with no Data, Options, or Results tabs
(modeling “pages”) shown to the right of the graph.
Figure 127
To see the Modeling Pages again, click the Show Modeling Pages button available on the maximized graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Using the Modeling Pages Area – of the Friction Coefficient Analysis
Three types of modeling pages are available via three tabs: Data, Options, and Results.
Using the Data Tab in the Friction Coefficient Wizard
Settings on the Data tab/page determine the data points that should be used in modeling.
Figure 128
Within the Select data for modeling area, the user has two options from which to choose:
Custom selection and By friction factor sections.
 To select data by custom selection

1. Click (to toggle) Custom selection to select or un-select any data point for inclusion/non-inclusion in the
friction modeling.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
2. Click the Select All button to select all data points.
Figure 129
3. Click the Unselect All button to un-select all data points.
Figure 130
When the Selection mode is Off the user can click and drag the mouse to zoom any area of the graph. To
zoom out, right-click the graph and click Zoom out
When the Selection mode is Selected or Unselected, the zooming functionality is disabled.
Select or un-select any data point for use in the modeling. Click and drag to draw a rectangle to cover the data
points that will be included or excluded in modeling. Another option is to use the typical Windows capability of
holding down the Ctrl key while clicking to select/un-select multiple points.
To select only a specific subset of the data for modeling, click the Unselect All button, and then click the Select
Selection mode
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
 To select data by friction factor sections
Figure 131
In the Data tab of the Friction Coefficient Wizard with the selection method for modeling being By friction factor
sections, use the options available to select/un-select data by friction factor sections, as follows:
1. Use the Select All or Unselect All button to select or un-select all data, respectively.
2. Use the horizontal scroll bar next to the section field to view sections.”
3. Click (to check) Select data in all tubular sections to select the data in all available tubular sections
Figure 132
4. When the Select data in all tubular sections is unchecked, the individual sections of data can be selected
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
using the forward and backward-pointing arrows associated with the Section field.
Figure 133
5. Click (to check) the Select field to use a section’s data in modeling.
Figure 134
The Select checkbox has three states of selection: selected (checked), partially selected (box filled), or not
selected (box empty). This state of selection is reflected in the Surface Weight vs. Depth graph in the left- hand
portion of the Friction Coefficient Wizard.
Figure 135
The Data Points Count (RIH/POOH) fields show the number of points Disregarded, Selected, or
Unselected as a result of the data selection process.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Using the Options Tab in the Friction Coefficient Wizard
The Friction Factor section in the Options tab provides the user with selection options (toggle boxes) to Vary [the]
friction factor in the wellbore and/or in the wellbore sections.
1. Select from the following friction-factor variance options in determining the data modeling friction factor:
a. Equally in entire wellbore: The friction factor is constantly determined within entire wellbore.
b. Equally in tubulars only: The friction factor is constantly determined within all tubular sections.
The friction factor of openhole (if any) is not determined (current project settings are used).
c. In local section only: Here, each section has a friction factor and is determined from the top down. In
determining the friction factor of a lower section, the friction factor(s) of the section(s) above it (which
are already obtained) are used.
d. In selected section only: Here, only the friction factor of the selected section is determined. The current
project settings are used for friction factors of all other sections.
2. Input the Range of friction factor to determine the search range of the friction factor for modeling. The default
range is from 0 to 0.5.
The Vertical Section near Surface area in the Options tab provides the user with options for calculating or not
calculating the data near the surface of the wellbore.
1. The friction factor in the vertical, or nearly vertical, section near the surface has no (or negligible) effect on
surface weight. Select the Disregard data points in vertical section near surface to potentially speed up
the modeling calculation.
The critical deviation (well inclination) of the disregarded section defaults to 5 degrees. The data points within the
disregarded section are shown in the plot if the option (below surface weight graph) to display disregarded data
is selected.
2. Click (to check) Calibrate stripper friction and reel back tension using data in avertical section
IF:
a. Stripper friction and reel back tension, respectively, are the same for RIH and POOH
AND
b. Data points for both RIH and POOH are available for the vertical section near surface
THEN
c. The stripper friction and reel back tension can be easily obtained based on the data. With such obtained
stripper friction and reel back tension, the friction modeling results will be more reliable.
When the setup for Data and Options is complete as desired, click the Calculate button at the bottom of the Friction
Coefficient Wizard dialog. Results of the calculations appear in the Results tab of the Friction Coefficient Wizard dialog.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Also, available after the Calculate button is clicked are the Stop button (for canceling the calculation) and a progress
bar.
When the calculation is complete, the Update Project button is enabled. Click the button to reveal a warning of
the impending overwriting of listed project data.
Figure 136
Using the Results Tab in the Friction Coefficient Wizard
The result tables list the sectional information of the wellbore. Friction factors for both the current project settings and
the wizard solutions are listed for comparison purposes. The root-mean-square deviation (RMSD), as a measure of the
modeling accuracy, is listed to show the difference between the selected field data and the prediction.
Keep in mind that the friction in steel tubulars (tubing, casing, etc.) is usually fairly constant for a given well and
fluids. Fluctuations in surface weight may be indicative of other factors, such as corrosion or mechanical damage,
rather than friction. Avoid setting the friction for the entire well based on a single data point, but rather look for
consistent trends over large intervals.
Below is a modeling result with the friction factor varying equally in the entire wellbore and a friction factor range
between 0 and 0.5. Note the obtained friction factor for the entire wellbore is constant for RIH and POOH, respectively,
and the RMSD is increasing due to the increasing data scattering.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 137
Below is the result with friction factor varying in the local section and the friction factor range between 0
and 0.5.
Figure 138
Note the first section was not modeled because it is nearly vertical. In the second section, the minimum or maximum
value for the friction factor was reached with RIH and POOH, respectively, in modeling. The listed results represent the
best solution that can be obtained.
Catastrophic Buckling (CT)
The Catastrophic Buckling Load Calculator utility calculates a working limit for tubing force at surface in
order to avoid catastrophic buckling between the injector and the stripper. Note that the buckling load is a
compressive force.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 139
Free Fall Analysis
The Free Fall Analysis utility calculates the velocity and the energy created (upon impact of a bar dropped in a
deviated well) for the purpose of activating a tool downhole. The utility uses well fluid distribution and
wellsite parameter values defined in the current Orpheus project for RIH. The user may click (to toggle) one
of two objects to free fall: the Orpheus project toolstring (assuming the toolstring has the ability to bend
when bending is needed) or the Sinker bar (assuming a cylindrical sinker bar is perfectly rigid and will stop
when bending is required).
Figure 140
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Pump Down Rate (WL)
This utility/wizard provides the user with the option of entering iterated/varying data for wellhead
pressure (WHP) and pump rate, which Cerberus uses in pump down calculations to help find the
minimum pump rate required to reach target depth.
If the user does not opt to input iterated data, the software calculates the pump down rate using the static
WHP number specified in the main Orpheus wireline-project interface.
NOV CTES recommends using the varying-data-entry method for enhanced accuracy of the calculated
outcome
 To calculate pump down rates allowing varying WHP and pump flow-rate data
1. From a wireline project in Orpheus, select the Calculate tab; then select Calculation Tools > Pump Down Rate.
The Pump Down Wizard appears.
2. Make changes to the Tool Depth Range and/or Pump Rate Range, if desired.
3. From the Input Parameters tab, click (to check) the Use WHP vs Pump Rate data table toggle box (default).
The data table provides the user the ability to input Pump Rate and WHP parameters.
a. If no data for pressure response to flowrate is available, click (to uncheck) the Use WHP vs Pump Rate
data table toggle box. All related data input fields become unavailable. During calculation, then, the
software calculates the pump down rate using the static WHP number specified in the main Orpheus
wireline-project interface.
4. Input data in the Pump Rate (gal/min) and WHP (psi) area.
a. A new row appears when the user places the cursor in the existing bottom row.
b. Select a row and click Delete to delete a row.
c. Click Graph to view a representation of the data.
d. Select the Liquid Pump Rate or Wellhead Pressure tab to calculate respective data.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 141 - Calculated Limit Pump Rates -- WHP Varied with Pump Rate
 To include the calculated results in the printed report from Orpheus’ report generator
1. Proceed with calculations as described previously.
2. Click Include results with other Orpheus printed reports.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Force Monitor/Analysis (CT)
The primary purpose of this module is to facilitate the calculation of tubing forces from actual data (either in real time for
post-job), and to analyze the results from those calculations.
Expanding on the simple Surface Weight graph generated from the Trip in and out calculation in Orpheus (see Trip In
and Out (CT and JP)/Run in and Out (WL)), the Orpheus Force Monitor provides a thorough plug milling analysis,
which can be of help in increasing the efficiency of plug milling operations in the field.
To effectively use the module, the user must provide the data (via import or in real time) and initiate the
calculation on the Forces tab.
When launched from OrionNET, the module opens by default to the Forces tab, and the connection to the current
OrionNET database is established.
When launched from Cerberus (Orpheus > Tools > Force Monitor/Analysis), the module also opens by default to
the Forces tab, and the user can establish a connection, if desired, to an already-open OrionNET program by
clicking the Connect to OrionNET button
Figure 142
The user interface is modeled after Reel-Trak (see Reel-Trak), supporting a step-by-step process for running the
forces module post-job. Three tabs comprise the Orpheus Force Monitor:
1. Data Log: This tab displays all the data imported for use in the Forces module. It can also be used to import or
export the data.
2. Forces: This is the primary tab (and the default) used in the Forces module. This tab displays all calculation
results for the module and the controls needed to run the calculations in real time or post-job.
3. Analysis: When calculations are complete, this tab provides a summary analysis of plug milling operations.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Using the Data Log Tab
As noted, this tab displays all the data imported for use in the Forces module. It can also be used to import or export
the data.
The data imported or acquired (from OrionNET) is displayed along with any calculated data, such as speed, weight
on bit, or milling efficiency.
The data in this tab is not directly editable. Data, however, may be imported from this tab.
 To import data from the Data Log tab
 To export data from the Data Log tab

1. Click the Export button in the Data Log tab.
The Export to ASCII Windows dialog appears, from which the user can select the location to save data files.
Using the Forces Tab
As noted previously, when launched from OrionNET, the module opens by default to the Forces tab, and the
connection to the current OrionNET database is established. The module begins forces tracking and calculations
automatically in a manner similar to Reel-Trak.
When launched from Cerberus (Orpheus > Tools > Force Monitor/Analysis), the module also opens by default to the
Forces tab, and the user can establish a connection, if desired, to an already-open OrionNET program by clicking the
Connect to OrionNET button.
See To run the forces monitor in real time with a connection to OrionNET.
The user can run calculations using the playback/navigation control panel or first switch to the Data Log tab to import
data (see Using the Data Log Tab).
OrionNET data can be run in real time via a live connection to OrionNET or run after-the-fact when it is stored in a
data file and imported into the Data Log.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
 To use the Data Playback/Navigation area
As in Reel-Trak, this area is used to interact with the imported data for calculation/analysis. The functions of the
buttons are as follows:
Table 10
Icon Name Function Behavior Notes

Reset Used to return to the first data row. Disabled real-time.
Stop Used to stop the calculation when Disabled when not running.
running real-time, or when multiples
have been executed.
Run one Used to run a single calculation (the Disabled real-time or when
next in the data log). already running.
Run n Used to run a block of n calculations Disabled real-time or when
(default is 100) already running.
Number to run (n) can be
changed by right-clicking as in
Reel-Trak.
Run to Used to run to the next plug Disabled real-time or when
Plug configured on the well (plugs must be already running.
configured and automatic plug
detection turned on).
Run all Used to run all entries in the data log. Disabled real-time or when
already running.
Connect to Used to connect to a running instance Disabled real-time or when
OrionNET of OrionNET. NOTE: unlike Reel-Trak, already running.
this button does NOT launch
OrionNET.
 To run the forces monitor in real time with a connection to OrionNET

Adjacent to the Data Playback/Navigation area is the Connect to OrionNET icon. Two options are
available to run the Orpheus Force Monitor in real time:
1. Option 1: With the Force Monitor in Cerberus unopened, launch the Forces Monitor from OrionNET.
To launch the Forces Monitor from OrionNET
a. Launch OrionNET.
b. From the OrionNET Preferences dialog (Setup > Preferences), click (to check)
Always prompt for a Forces Monitor Project in the General tab and click OK.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Figure 143
c. From the OrionNET menu bar, select Orion > Monitors > Force Monitor.
The Select an Orpheus Project dialog appears, from which the user selects the appropriate project.
2. Option 2: Connect to OrionNET from Orpheus.
To launch the Forces Monitor from Cerberus
a. Launch OrionNET.
b. Launch Cerberus.
c. Open the appropriate Orpheus project.
d. Select, from the menu bar, Tools > Force Monitor/Analysis.
e. Select the Connect to OrionNET item adjacent to the Data Playback/Navigation area.
 To use the Surface Weight gauge and the Stress to Yield Ratio gauge
Both the Surface Weight and Stress to Yield Ratio gauges have a primary (red) needle and a secondary (blue)
needle. The needles display as follows:
1. The primary (red) needle displays the current value.
2. The secondary needle displays the maximum value processed. This needle (blue) may be hidden if it lies behind
the red needle.
The Surface Weight gauge displays the current surface weight. The Yield Limit is rendered in red.
The yield limit is calculated based on acquired/imported data. The yield limit represents the surface weight
corresponding to pipe yield anywhere in the current depth (from surface to current depth).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
The Stress to Yield Ratio gauge renders the current calculated stress relative to the yield limit of the tubing. The red
limit should match the Yield safety factor defined in the project options.
Figure 144
 To use the Weight on Bit gauge

This gauge displays the calculated weight on bit. The gauge displays “0” when the calculation is not being
performed. The calculation is only executed when the pipe is not moving (calculated speed = 0). Only negative
values are calculated to display the force set down on the bit. Positive pick up forces are ignored.
Figure 145
 To use the playback speed control

Visible only when processing the data post-job (or during play-back), this control allows the user to slow down the
calculation during critical operations, or to speed up the calculation when watching the job is not important.
Figure 146
1. The slider control changes the speed.

2. The Event number displays the current event being calculated. This remains visible in real-time mode.
 To use the Surface Weight plot
As each row of data is calculated in this plot, the current point (red dot) is updated to reflect the results of each
row. Markers are also rendered on the plot as the data log is processed, as follows:
Blue “+” characters are rendered for Run in Hole data every n feet (based on the Averaging Interval configured
through the Field Data Import form). See To import data from the Data Log tab.
Green “X” characters are rendered for Pull Out of Hole data every n feet (based on the Averaging Interval
configured through the Field Data Import form).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Zoom in by clicking and dragging the mouse over a rectangular area. Zoom out by right-clicking on the
chart and selecting Zoom Out. These functions are similar to other Cerberus zoom functions.
Figure 147
 To Use the CT Limits plot

Select the CT Limits tab adjacent to the Surface Weight tab. The CT Limits plot appears.
Figure 148
Similarly, to the plot available in real time in OrionNET, the CT Limits plot is available in Cerberus.
 To use the Friction Coefficient area
The Friction Coefficient area appears in the upper right-hand portion of the Orpheus Force Monitor.
Figure 149
The default, which is derived from the well and is saved with the project, is the Planned friction coefficient.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
In the example above, note that the Planned Friction Coefficient is user defined; there is no need to click
Calculate.
 To use the Planned coefficient

1. Click the Apply link associated with Planned to apply the default estimated Friction Coefficient to the data.
Alternatively, the user may calculate an estimated friction coefficient based on the acquired or imported data (the
Apparent coefficient).
 To use the Apparent coefficient
1. Click the Calculate button to complete the Apparent calculation.
The apparent friction can't be calculated until the tubing enters a deviated portion of the well and friction begins
to have an effect on the surface weight. If the calculation does not find sufficient friction to perform the
calculations, it continues to display the no value for the apparent friction. This calculation does take time to
complete; the current data values continue to be updated on the screen while the friction is calculated in the
background. When the calculations are complete, the calculation button becomes enabled again and the
calculated friction values are displayed beside the apparent friction label.
2. Click the Apply button associated with the Apparent friction coefficient. This adjusts the curves on the surface
weight plot to use the calculated apparent friction.
Using either scenario above, the curve displayed in the Surface Weight graph is updated to reflect the selected
coefficient.
 To use the Pressure/Well diagram
Appearing in the right-hand side of the Forces tab in the Orpheus Force Monitor, the pressure/well diagram displays
three pieces of information: pressure data, current depth, and bridge plug location.
Figure 150
As in other well diagrams, zoom in by clicking/dragging on the diagram, and zoom out by right-clicking.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Pressure Data
From the acquired/imported data, the pump pressure (Pp) and wellhead pressure (Pw) are displayed as
shown in the image above.
Current Depth
From the acquired/imported data, the current depth is rendered in red. This depth label moves up/down on the diagram
based on the depth.
If Auto zoom to plugs is clicked (to check), the label remains at the top of the diagram until the current depth
enters the plug zone.
Bridge Plug Locations
Bridge plugs are rendered on the diagram as shown. As progress is made and the plugs are milled, they are rendered in
green instead of gray.
Click (to check) Auto Zoom to plugs to automatically zoom into the range where the plugs begin
 To use the Depth and Pump Pressure display
The current depth and pump pressure are displayed just below the surface weight graph.
 To use the Plug Milling Operations area
This area displays all data and settings associated with plug milling operations. Through this panel, the user can
enter/edit plug depths on the well, control the plug length, and choose to manually begin plug milling or to
engage the automatic plug detection algorithm.
Figure 151
By default, Monitor Milling Operations is checked. Un-check this box to disable the milling operations
monitoring function.
To enter plug depths, click the Enter Plug Depths link in the upper right-hand corner of the area. The Well Editor’s
Quick Plug Entry dialog appears. See To configure multiple bridge plugs for more information.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
The gauge in the lower left-hand portion of this area may be referred to as the Feed Rate gauge. Its purpose is to
display a graphical representation of the rate the mill is moving into the plug. It is not measuring actual movement, but
is deriving a progress based on changes in surface weight while the measured depth is stationary. If the needle is in
the left orange zone for an extended period of time, the bit is not making significant progress and it could be an
indication that more weight on bit is needed, better hole cleaning may be needed, or the mill or motor may need
service. If the needle is in the orange zone on the right side of the gauge, the mill is progressing into the plug quickly
and there could be a risk of motor stall or large cuttings that are difficult to circulate to surface. If the needle is in the
green zone, the mill is likely progressing at a moderate speed.
All other fields update based on the acquired/imported data during processing. The Total Milling Time
field is a running total for all plugs up to the current record.
 To control how the milling time and progress are calculated
The user must define two options:
1. Plug Length – this defaults to 36 inches, and is used to determine when the plug has been completed. The
current depth is monitored, and when the change in depth from the start of a plug exceeds the plug length, the
plug is assumed to be completed.
2. Plug Start Mode – this can either be Auto Detect or Manual. When Manual, the user initiates plug milling by
clicking the Start Plug button. When in Auto Detect mode, the system attempts to detect a plug based on the
depth of plug entered in Well Editor and a corresponding drop in surface weight.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Using the Analysis Tab
In this tab, three plots are available, as well as a list of all the data from calculations related to the plug milling
operations.
Figure 152
The plots contain different combinations of the data shown in the table:
1. Milling Time by Depth – This plot renders the change in time from the plug start event to the plug end event,
plotted against the depth of the plug location.
2. Milling Time by Weight on Bit – This plot renders the change in time from the plug start event to the plug end
event plotted against the average weight on bit for the plug.
3. Average Weight on Bit by Depth – This plot renders the average weight on bit for the plug plotted against the
depth of the plug location.
4. Average Milling Pressure by Depth – This plot renders the average milling pressure for the plug plotted against
the depth of the plug location.
Stuck Point Analysis
If the CT and/or tool are stuck in the well, the stuck point depth can be calculated and a solution to free the
tool determined.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
 To calculate stuck point
1. From a CT project in Orpheus, select the Calculate tab; then select Calculation Tools > Stuck Point Analysis.
The Stuck Point Wizard appears.
Figure 153
2. Define the problem:

a. Input the Measured Depth as indicated by the depth counter.
b. Select RIH or POOH from the dropdown to specify the wellsite parameters and fluid distribution as the
user respectively: pulls up while running in-hole (the default – the procedure most often used by field
personnel) or slacks off while pulling out-of-hole.
3. Determine the probable depth of the stuck point using one of the two wizard options available.
4. Attempt to get free using one of the two wizard options available.
The stuck point calculation uses the gooseneck radius input in the preferences
The stripper friction can have a considerable effect on the stuck point calculation
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Packer & Completion Analysis
The Packer and Completion Analysis wizard calculates what happens to a packer set on the end of production
or workover tubing if conditions change surface or downhole.
Figure 154
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
Printing Orpheus Project Data
Print the configuration for a project, as well as calculated data.
The data must be calculated before it can be printed
 To Print a Project
1. Open the project in Orpheus.
The Orpheus main screen appears with the project information loaded.
2. Click Print ) on the toolbar

OR
3. Select File > Print from the Orpheus menu bar. The Cerberus Print dialog appears.
Figure 155
4. Select the print information.

Options to print include a Cover Page, Input Parameters, Survey Graph, and Survey Data.
5. Select the Printer from the dropdown. If the following is in place
a. A SharePoint URL with the related Cerberus configuration is set up as described in Cerberus Setup >
SharePoint tab
b. The CTES PDF Printer 50 printer is selected in the application.
6. Then, the Save PDF file to SharePoint checkbox becomes available in the application.
7. Click the Select Logo button to select a logo.
If SharePoint is not available or its use is not desired, a PDF file can be printed for email distribution or archival.
To view a PDF file, the free Adobe Reader must be installed on the computer. It can be downloaded from
Adobe’s Web site at www.adobe.com.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5 | Using Orpheus
 To use the CTES PDF Generator
1. Click Print ) on the toolbar or click File > Print... from the menu. The Orpheus Report Manager screen
appears.
2. Select the print information as described previously.
3. Select the printer.
In the Printer Options section, select CTES PDF Printer 50 from the Printer dropdown menu.
4. Click Print.
The Save As dialog box appears.
5. Enter a file name.
Navigate to the desired location where the file should be saved.
Ensure the Save as type selection is listed as PDF files (*.pdf). Otherwise, the file might not be saved correctly and
might be unavailable for use.
Emailing Project Data
Orpheus data files can easily be exported and emailed to other Cerberus users.
This procedure assumes the user has Microsoft’s Outlook email program installed; the steps described are
geared toward that end. If the user has a different email program, the steps require modification
 To email job data files

1. Select a project to email.
2. Click File > E-mail Project To....
The Export Orpheus window appears.
3. Select the desired project data file to export. All available project data files are listed.
4. Click OK.
The Outlook Address Book window appears.
5. Select or enter the desired recipients of the data file.
6. If the recipient is in the address book, then select the recipient from the list. Otherwise, enter an email address
for the recipient in the To field.
7. Click OK.
If an Outlook warning appears stating that another program is trying to access the email addresses in Outlook,
click Yes to allow the access.
The email message appears addressed to the selected recipient(s) and with the data file attached.
8. Click Send.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Chapter 6
Using Hydra
This section describes the process involved in using the Hydra wellbore hydraulics simulator, the Cerberus hydraulics
model for coiled tubing and jointed pipe.
About Hydra
The Cerberus Hydra wellbore hydraulics simulator model performs hydraulics calculations for coiled tubing (CT)
and jointed pipe (JP). Included in the model are a large number of tools to help design/model CT and JP pumping
operations. Options range from basic “snapshot” calculations to more complex simulations where conditions change
with time. Hydra wizards help the user to step through the complex process of choosing fluids and specifying
volumes and flow rates.
Hydra supports a wide range of fluid types and models, including gases, foams, and multiphase fluids.
Hydra incorporates the following:

1. Power Law, Bingham Plastic, Herschel Bulkley, and Newtonian fluid models
2. Foam, gas, and multiphase fluid models
3. Well unloading and gas lift design wizards
4. Fill Removal wizard, for sand cleanouts
5. Velocity String Design wizard
6. Job Design wizard, for rapid configuration of multi-stage jobs
7. “Stage Table” data-entry for time-based simulations
8. Reservoir inflow/outflow calculations
9. Nozzle and choke calculations
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
The Hydra Process
The process involved in using Hydra is as follows:
1. Create a new Hydra project or select an existing project

2. (Optional) Create a tool string or select/edit an existing tool string
3. Create a well or select/edit an existing well
4. Select fluids in the job
5. Set initial fluid distribution parameters
6. (Optional) Set advanced project options
7. Perform calculations using application wizards, standard/snapshot calculations, and/or stage tables
Hydra (along with the other Cerberus models) is organized by projects.
Table 11
Standard Snapshot Stage Table

a. Set Parameters a. Set up stage table
b. Calculate b. Calculate
c. View results and print for hardcopy c. View results and print for hardcopy
or electronic transmission or electronic transmission
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Accessing Hydra
 To access Hydra from the Cerberus home page
1. Select the Hydra button.
OR
2. Select Models > Hydra from the menu bar.
The Hydra model loads, as indicated by the following display screen:
Figure 156
The opening dialog of the Hydra Wellbore Hydraulics model appears.
Figure 157 - Hydra Opening Dialog
This Hydra Hydraulics Simulator opening dialog contains the Setup Wizard, which is used to model the circulation of
liquids, gases, and multiphase fluids in the pipe, wellbore, and reservoir.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Hydra’s Opening-dialog Tools
Hydra’s opening-dialog toolbar contains the following tools:
Table 12 - Hydra Opening-dialog Toolbar

Exit Exits Hydra
New Opens the dialog box to create a new Hydra project
Open Opens the dialog box to open an existing Hydra project
Save Saves the current project to disk.
Delete Deletes the current project
Print Opens the dialog box to print the current project.
Opens the dialog box to select the fluids for the project and
Select Fluids
their colors.
Initial Fluid Distribution Opens the dialog box to select the initial fluid distribution
Opens the calculation setup dialog box to select the flow

Calculation Setup
path and the inputs for the project
Displays the dialog box to set Hydra options (if in Stage

Options
Table mode)
Starts String Editor with the current string

String Editor
loaded
Starts Reel Manager with the current reel

Reel Editor
loaded
Starts Well Editor with the current well

Well Editor
loaded
Tool String Editor Starts Tool Editor with the current
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Table 13 - Hydra Opening-dialog Toolbar

Help Provides Hydra-related help
Stop Calculations Cancels a calculation
View Well Zooms in on the well view
Zooms in on the surface and shows

View Surface
pressures or geometry
Zooms in on the choke, so the choke

View Choke
inputs can be specified
View Tool Zooms in on the tool
View Reservoir Zooms in on the reservoir
Data Table View data in table format
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
The Hydra model is organized by projects.
CT projects and jointed pipe projects are configured similarly. Calculations are also performed similarly. The
main differences between the two types of projects are as follows:
1. CT projects use a string of CT; jointed pipe projects use a string of JP.
2. CT projects involve a reel and gooseneck; jointed pipe projects do not.
Creating a New Hydra Project
The following procedure outlines how to create a new Hydra project.
1. From the Hydra Opening Dialog, choose one of the following:

a. Select File > New Project from the menu bar.
b. Click the New toolbar button:
If either of the options are chosen, the New Hydra Project dialog appears:
Figure 158 - New Hydra Project dialog
Start a new Hydra project directly from the Cerberus home page by selecting File > New > Hydraulics Project
(Hydra)
2. Select the Project Type (CT or Jointed Pipe) if available

3. Select the folder into which the project is added.
4. Provide a new name for the project. The name may consist of letters, numbers, and spaces, with a maximum of
32 characters.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
T
Figure 159 - he Configuration display screen appears.
5. Configure the project (see Entering Project-configuration Information for more information).
Opening an Existing Hydra Project
The following procedure describes how to open an existing project.

1. From the Hydra Opening Dialog, choose one of the following:
a. Select File > Open Project from the menu bar
b. Click the Open Project toolbar button:
c. Click the Open an Existing Project button on the opening dialog

OR
d. Click the Open an Existing Project button in the Setup Wizard.
2. Select a Hydra Project dialog appears, from which to select the desired project.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Figure 160
Organizing Projects into Folders
Hydra is designed with default folders for each type of project (Coiled Tubing Projects; Jointed Pipe Projects).
The default folders cannot be renamed, moved, or deleted.
When a new project is created, a folder for the project’s placement is automatically selected.
These folders are internal to Cerberus, and unrelated to folders in Windows Explorer
Projects or folders cannot be placed under different project types. (For example, CT projects cannot be
placed under the Jointed Pipe Projects folder.)
Saving a Hydra Project
The project configuration and last set of calculated values is retained when the project is saved. There are two
ways a project can be saved:
o
1. Click Save n the toolbar.
OR
2. On the menu bar, click File > Save or Save As....
Deleting a Hydra Project
When a project is deleted, the information is not recoverable.
1. On the menu bar, select File > Delete Project.
Files can be shared between computers by importing and exporting them. Components and even entire projects can be
exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media, a job can be imported
into Cerberus. The export files may also be emailed to another person for use on their computer.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
1. From the main Hydra display screen, click the yellow-folder icon to browse and select from existing CT Strings
or JP Strings.
Figure 161
 To configure a tool string

1. (Optional) Configure a tool string.
a. From the Config display-screen Tool tab, select Simple Tool, Advanced Tool, or No Tool.
 To select a well
2. Select a well.
a. From the Configuration tab (available after providing a name for the new project, or available from the
menu-bar item Configuration > Well), complete the following:
i. Click the yellow-folder icon to browse and select from existing wells.
OR
ii. Click the Well Editor button ( )to access the Select Well display screen.
 
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To select fluids in a job
3. Select fluids in the job.
a. From the Hydra display-screen Config (default) tab, click the Selection button associated with Fluids.
Figure 162
Figure 163 - The Select Fluids display screen appears
b. Use the dropdown(s) to select fluids to be added or removed from the project.
c. Click the color associated with the selected fluid to change fluid color.
 To set initial fluid distribution
4. Set initial fluid distribution.
a. From the Hydra display-screen Config tab, click the Distribution button associated with Fluids.
Figure 164
Figure 165 - The Initial Fluid Distribution display screen appear
b. Enter information so that Hydra “understands” the fluid or fluids initially present in the conveyance and
the well. The parameters entered here act as a starting point for calculations. (Use the Help button on this
display screen for more information.)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To set advanced project options
5. Optional) Set advanced project options
a. From the Hydra display-screen Config tab, click the Project Options button. The Project Options display
screen appears.
Figure 166
b. Click (to check) available toggles or input information into the four tabbed areas: General, Calculations,
and Models.
6. Perform calculations using any of the methods described in Performing Calculations.
Performing Calculations
Various methods of performing calculations are available in Hydra:

1. Standard “snapshot” calculations for general, current-conditions hydraulics calculations in which time is not a
variable.
2. Stage Table calculations, wherein a sequence of fluids and pump rates are specified in order to simulate the
progress of a job as the fluids circulate over time.
3. Wizard calculations, where the user is “walked through” various types of calculations, including foam, fill
removal, well unloading, multiphase, analysis, and pump.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Standard “Snapshot” Calculations
 To specify the Standard calculation method
Figure 167 - Select the Mode tab from the Hydra display screen
OR
Figure 168 - Select the Mode menu-bar item from the Hydra display screen
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To configure and run standard calculations
1. Select the Run-time tab from the Hydra display screen.
Figure 169
2. Edit any red-colored parameter, as desired.

3. Click the Update button.
4. Hydra calculates the values in blue on the Run-time tab and on the diagram.
a. View calculated values on the Run-time tab and the Summary tab.
b. Left-click the Well View area of the diagram to see graphs.
Advancing Fluids in a Standard Calculation
When a standard calculation is first performed, Hydra uses the initial fluid distribution. Fluids can then be
advanced through the system using a method like the Control Panel, but with more control.
Figure 170
Advance fluids using the following methods:

 Advance the fluids by volume: Equivalent to pumping the specified volume of the pump fluid.
 To advance fluids in the standard calculation

1. Perform an initial standard calculation.
2. Click the button to access the Advance Fluids screen
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Figure 171 - Advance Fluids
a. Select parameters to test. Click OK.

3. Click the Forward button on the main screen
4. Hydra advances the fluid distribution by the amount specified and calculates the outputs for the new fluid
distribution.
a. Continue to click Forward until the current criteria for advancing the fluids no longer makes sense.
b. Change the Advance Fluids parameters for further testing; then click Forward.
c. Reset to the initial fluid distribution by clicking the Reset button.
Stage-table Calculations
Hydraulics calculations can often be broken down into stages. A “stage” is described as a specific depth
range to which a single fluid is pumped. A stage table stores flow and depth data describing a sequence of
events over time. In stage-table calculations, the stage table is “played” so that Hydra steps through the
sequence of events and calculates additional data for each event.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To specify the use of the stage-table calculation method
1. Select the Mode tab from the Hydra display screen:
Figure 172
OR
2. Select the Mode menu-bar item from the Hydra display screen:
Figure 173
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To configure the available stage-table parameters
The Stage Table Configuration dialog allows the user to select Time, Pressure, Pump, and Miscellaneous parameters
that dictate the availability of these parameters when displaying and printing a stage table.
1. From the Mode tab > Stage Table area in the Hydra display screen, select the Configure button
OR
2. From a stage-table display screen (see To open a stage table for viewing only), select Options > Stage Table
Configuration from the menu bar.
Figure 174 - The Stage Table Configuration dialog appears
3. Within each tab, click (to check) the various stage-table parameters to display/print.
If certain parameters are visible but not available for clicking, set Advanced Project Options to rectify the
situation
 To open a stage table for viewing only
on
1. Click the Stage Table button the Hydra toolbar.
 To edit a stage table
1. On Hydra’s Mode tab, click the Edit button associated with Stage Table.
OR
2. From the Hydra menu bar, select Mode > Stage Table. The Stage Table area becomes highlighted on the Mode
tab. Click the Edit button associated with Stage Table.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To configure the stage table
Each row in the stage table represents one event. The shorter the duration of an event, the more detailed the results.
To enter data in a row, simply type in the table. Use the following shortcuts to help facilitate data
entry/configuration.
Table 14
To … Do This …
Quickly enter multiple rows describing an entire job Use the Job Design wizard.
Quickly change the fluid in a single event Click the fluid name, click the dropdown, choose the new
fluid
Click the comments field; click the dropdown; choose the

Quickly add comments to a single event
new comment or insert a new one.
Table 15
To … Do This …
Add a row after the current row Click the Insert button on the toolbar
Add a row to the end of the stage table Click the New Row button on the toolbar
Select the row or rows to delete. On the Edit menu, select

Delete a row or rows from the stage table
Cut
Clear all the rows in the stage table Click the Clear All button on the toolbar
See the data for a single row in dialog box format Use the Row Editor
Set all the cells in a column after a specific row to a single Enter the new value in the first cell to change. Then right-
value click the cell and select Copy Down from the menu
Expand one or more rows with long durations into multiple Select the rows; then click Edit > Expand. Enter the time
rows with shorter durations interval for each new row; then click OK
Show or hide stage-table columns. Click Options > Stage Table Configuration
and select the columns to view or prin
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Table 16 - Strip Charts
To … Do This …
View strip charts Click the View Chart button on the toolbar
View a different strip chart Select a different chart in the dropdown box in the lower
left
Resize the strip chart Resize the strip chart window
Create a new strip chart that will be available to all the In the menu bar, click File > New Chart
projects Select the data to include on the chart
Print a strip chart Select File > Print from the Chart menu bar OR click the
Print button in the lower right-hand portion of the chart
Select the printer options (including the availability of

printing to PDF), and click the Print button
Using the Row Editor
Use the Row Editor to modify a single row of data in the stage table.
 To enter a data row with the Row Editor
1. Open the stage table for the project in Hydra
2. Click anywhere in the row of the stage table to edit
3. Click the Row Editor button on the toolbar
Using the Job Design Wizard
Use the Job Design wizard to enter multiple data rows into the stage table.
 To enter multiple data rows with the Job Design wizard
1. Click the Job Design Wizard ton on the toolbar

OR
2. Press F9
3. Follow the on-screen instructions
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Running Stage-table Calculations
 To run stage-table calculations
1. Select the Run-time tab on the Hydra display screen.

OR
2. Use the Hydra Stage Table toolbar buttons.
3. To run the entire stage table, click the Run All button.
4. To run the next line of the stage table, click the Run Next button
5. To reset the stage table to the beginning, click the Reset button.
6. The job is done playing when the green stop button turns grey.
7. View the calculation results from the Summary tab on the Hydra display screen.
Application-wizard Calculations
Use application wizards to calculate data of interest to specific applications.

 To access the application wizards
8. From the Hydra display screen’s menu bar, select Applications.
9. Click the name of the desired wizard.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Foam Wizard
Figure 175
Use the Foam Wizard to optimize the fluid pump rates and pressures to achieve desired foam qualities in the
wellbore. Once the liquid and gas pump rates have been determined, exit the Wizard and use the main Hydra view
screens to complete the analysis and print charts. The Foam Wizard provides basic foam calculations.
Two types of foam calculations are provided in this wizard. Either a set of pump rates are calculated for the inputs
or for a specified range of pump rates, the system pressures and the foam quality are found.
Figure 176 - Fill Removal Wizard
Use the Fill Removal Wizard to calculate the minimum and maximum pump rates and pressures to remove fill,
such as sand, from the wellbore. Other data of interest to a fill removal job, such as annular velocity at top of fill,
lowest annular velocity, wellhead pressure, maximum pressure, bottoms up time, and maximum penetration rate are
also available.
Hydra can use one of the following criteria for determining the success of a fill removal.
1. The velocity factor method – based on the fact that fill is removed as long as the fluid lifts the fill particles
faster than they fall. A fill removal is considered successful if the annular velocity exceeds the settling
velocity by a specified amount. This method applies to vertical wells.
2. The bed formation method – calculates the height of the fill material settled in the annulus. A fill removal is
considered successful if the bed height is reduced to a specified amount. This method is suited for deviated and
horizontal wells. Note: In near-vertical sections (where beds do not form), this method reverts to the velocity-
factor method.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
The maximum pump rate is determined by the limits of the surface equipment and any limits on the downhole
pressure. Many of the questions in the Fill Removal Wizard relate to finding the maximum pump rate.
If the fill removal cannot be performed as configured, the minimum pump rate to remove the fill is higher than the
maximum pump rate allowed. To be able to perform the fill removal, select a lighter fluid, adjust the constraints, or
experiment with other inputs.
Well Unloading Wizard
Liquid loading is a common problem in many gas wells. The well can be loaded by workover or completion
fluids following a workover or completion job. Wellbores can also be loaded with produced liquid (such as
water or hydrocarbon condensate in the late life of a gas well) when the reservoir pressure has decreased. In
either case, the accumulated wellbore liquid needs to be removed; in other words, the well needs to be
unloaded to restore the well’s production.
Using coiled tubing (CT) to unload a well with nitrogen is a quick and cost-effective method to remove the
liquid load of the wellbore. During a CT unloading process, CT is run into the wellbore. Nitrogen can be
pumped through the CT while it is RIH or after the CT has reached a certain depth. The nitrogen aerates the
liquid column in the annulus. This reduces the hydrostatic pressure of fluid in the annulus; hence, the
downhole pressure is reduced. When the downhole pressure is lower than the reservoir pressure, the
reservoir fluid starts to flow into the wellbore.
During a typical unloading process of a gas well, the reservoir does not produce until the bottom hole pressure
is reduced below the reservoir pressure. For the upward multiphase flow in the annulus, liquid flow rate comes
solely from the initial wellbore liquid. During this period, as far as the annular multiphase flow is concerned,
the initial wellbore liquid behaves like a virtual liquid (water) reservoir, constantly feeding the upward annular
flow with liquid. Apparently, the rate of liquid feeding the annulus flow is related to the run-in-hole (RIH) speed
of the CT. In the well unloading wizard, the liquid unloading rate is calculated based on the well geometry, the
CT RIH speed, and initial liquid level – as well as the target unloading depth.
Approached somewhat differently than the other Hydra wizards, the well unloading wizard is implemented
on three tab views, as described below.
The reservoir must be defined to use this wizard
Depth Analysis Tab
The main objective of the depth analysis is to estimate the required gas in order to achieve a given target Bottom Hole
Pressure if the CT is set at different depths. Typically, the deeper the CT is set, the less gas rate is required. This is
because more liquid is mixed with gas so that the total hydrostatic pressure is reduced. For a given target bottom hole
pressure, less gas is required. But when gas injection depth is deeper, the required pump pressure is usually greater.
The result of depth analysis will be helpful for users to select a proper gas injection depth and gas rate.
Upon access, the Well Unloading Wizard’s Depth Analysis tab appears similarly to the following:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Figure 177
1. Input salient parameters into the available fields.

The inputs within this tab define the required input parameters for depth analysis; in other words, the analysis of
required gas injection rate if the coiled tubing is set at different injection depths. More specifically:
a. Loading Fluid – This specifies the liquid that has loaded the well. Only liquids are displayed in the list.
b. Liquid Level – This is the initial liquid level of the loading liquid in the wellbore.
c. Specified CT RIH Speed – This is used to estimate the liquid rate at which the well is unloaded. It is
assumed that the faster the CT RIH Speed, the greater the liquid unloading rate.
d. Unloading Fluid – only gases are allowed to be used as unloading fluid. This is the fluid to be pumped
through the CT.
e. Gas Rate – Minimum, Maximum and Step specify the range of gas pump rate to be simulated. The gas
rate Step is used to break the gas rate range into a number of intervals so that the unloading hydraulics
can be calculated at various gas pump rates.
f. Wellhead Pressure – this is the fluid pressure at the location of the wellhead. It is used as one boundary
condition for the hydraulics calculation.
g. Bottom Hole Pressure – this is the target pressure to be achieved by unloading. This Bottom Hole
Pressure and the Wellhead Pressure define the two boundary conditions for pressure calculations.
h. Calculate button – click this button to obtain the plot of depth analysis. The depth analysis plot is
displayed in the area on the right portion of the tab page.
2. Click the Calculate button to view a display screen similar to the following.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Figure 178 - Well Unloading Interface, Depth Analysis Tab
The chart plots Depth vs. Gas Flow Rate loaded from Hydra’s calculations. A red dot is displayed showing the
Calculated CT Depth if no Selected CT Depth is loaded from Hydra. Otherwise, the red dot shows the
Selected CT Depth, and the graph does not represent actual data from Hydra.
a. Selected CT Depth – this is the CT depth the user selected for Rate Analysis. To select a Selected CT
Depth directly on the graph (rather than inputting a value in the available field), left-click in the desired
position on the graph.
3. Right-click the graph to open a context menu displaying various user-available options: Show Range Lines,
Clear Range Lines, or Zoom Out. Clear Range Lines is initially disabled.
a. Click Show Range Lines to view the Well Unloading: Range Options dialog
Figure 179 - Input the desired range; click OK
The ranges lines become visible on the graph.
 To remove the range lines from the graph

1. Right-click the graph to open the context menu.
2. Click the now-visible Clear Range Lines option.
a. Click Zoom Out from the graph’s right-click menu or left-click on the graph and drag to zoom out on the
graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To zoom in on the graph
Left-click and drag the mouse over the graph.
Rate Analysis Tab
The purpose of this tab is to perform sensitivity analysis of gas pump rate on the bottom hole pressure for a given
gas injection depth; in other words, the CT Depth. As indicated in the related figure (below), as N2 pump rate is
increased, the bottom hole pressure is first reduced significantly. This occurs as a result of the nitrogen gas entering
the annulus liquid, which reduces its density and therefore the hydrostatic pressure is decreased. At a certain N2 rate
(about 340 scfm in the figure), the bottom hole pressure reaches the minimum value. A further increase of N2 gas
rate (from 340 scfm in the figure) results in increased bottom hole pressure. This unexpected result occurs due to
increased friction pressure loss at high N2 pump rates, which more than offsets the decrease in hydrostatic pressure
that is achieved with the additional N2 being pumped. This result helps the user to select the optimum gas pump rate.
1. Input salient parameters into the available fields. A few inputs are different from those in the Depth Analysis tab:
a. Effective Unloading Time – the time it takes for CT to reach from the initial Liquid Level to the target
CT Depth. This can be calculated based on the CT RIH Speed. Or, if the Effective Unloading Time is
given, the CT RIH Speed can be calculated.
b. CT Depth – the target unloading depth.
If coiled tubing depth is not loaded from Hydra and the user does not click the Calculate button on the
Depth Analysis tab, the CT Depth field defaults to-1
If the coiled tubing depth is loaded from Hydra or the user clicks the Calculate button on the Depth
Analysis tab, the value for CT Depth is the Selected CT Depth.
c. Plot of Bottom Hole Pressure vs. Gas Flow Rate – gives the graphical result of the effect of gas pump
rate on the bottom hole pressure.
d. Selected Gas Rate – the user-selected gas rate, based on the result shown on the plot. This value is
used in the result calculation. To change the selected gas rate, left-click the graph in the desired area, or
input the rate directly into the field.
If no data was loaded from Hydra for selected gas rate, the Selected Gas Rate field is hidden
2. Click the Calculate button to view a display screen like the following.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Figure 180 - Well Unloading Interface, Rate Analysis Tab
RESULTS TAB
This tab summarizes the results of the unloading wizard analysis, providing detailed hydraulics results for a given gas
injection depth and given gas pump rate. A brief summary includes CT Depth, Unloading Gas Rate, BHP, Pump
Pressure, and total required gas volume (Calculated Unloading Volume). The pressure profiles in the CT, annulus
and well sections are displayed on the plot of Pressures vs. Depth, with different line colors (blue, green and red)
representing different flow paths. The View Data button provides the option to display the detailed hydraulics data in
tabular format.
The Print Report button allows the user to print wizard results.
Figure 181 - Well Unloading Interface, Results Tab
1. Click Zoom Out from the graph’s right-click menu or left-click on the graph and drag to zoom out on the graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
 To zoom in on the graph
Left-click and drag the mouse over the graph.
Figure 182 - Multiphase Wizard
Use the Multiphase Wizard to calculate a steady state solution for a multiphase fluid.
Figure 183 - Analysis Wizard
The Analysis Wizard is used to see how varying the pump rate affects key parameters(such as the bottom hole
pressure, annular velocity, fluid density, and foam quality).
If a multiphase fluid was selected, the wizard analyzes each combination of liquid and gas pump rates.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
6 | Using Hydra
Figure 184 - Job Design Wizard
The Job Design Wizard is used to enter multiple rows into the stage table
.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
7 | Using Velocity String
Chapter 7
Using Velocity String
This section describes the process involved in using Velocity String, the Cerberus Hydra based model for coiled tubing
and jointed pipe gas wells.
A velocity string is a small-diameter tubing string run inside the production tubing to resolve the problem of
insufficient velocity available to transport liquids from the wellbore. These liquids may, in time, accumulate and impair
production. Installing a velocity string reduces the flow area, thereby increasing the flow velocity, which enables
liquids to be carried from the wellbore.
The Velocity String model calculates the best characteristics of an intended velocity string to optimize its effectiveness
in an intended application.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
The Velocity String Process
The process involved in using the Velocity String model is as follows:

1. Create a new Velocity String project or select an existing project
Velocity String (along with the majority of other Cerberus models) is organized by projects
2. Select a well with the reservoir defined

3. Verify reservoir parameters
4. Select one or more velocity string(s)
5. Calculate
6. View results and print
Accessing Velocity String (H7ydra)

 To access the Velocity String model from the Cerberus home page
1. Select the Velocity String button.
OR
2. Select Models > Velocity String from the menu bar.
The Velocity String model loads, and the opening dialog of the Hydra (Velocity String) model appears.
Figure 185 - Velocity String Opening Dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
The Velocity String model is organized by projects.
Using the Velocity String Opening-dialog Tools
The Velocity String opening-dialog toolbar contains the following tools:
Table 17 - Velocity String Main Toolbar

Exit Exits Velocity String
Opens the New Velocity String Project dialog to create a

New
new project
Open Opens the Select Job dialog box to open an existing job.
Save Saves the current project to disk
Setting Program Preferences
 To set program preferences

1. Select Options > Units from the menu bar.
OR
2. Click + to expand the tree’s Program Preferences node; click Units.
Creating a New Velocity String Project
The following procedure outlines how to create a new Velocity String project.
1. From the Velocity String Opening Dialog, choose one of the following:
a. Select File > New from the menu bar
b. Click the New toolbar button:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
The New Project dialog appears:
Figure 186 - New Velocity String Project dialog
Start a new Velocity String project directly from the Cerberus home page by selecting File > New >
Velocity String Project.
32 characters.
Figure 187 - The Velocity String configuration display-screen appears
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
Opening an Existing Velocity String Project

1. Choose one of the following from the Velocity String opening dialog
a. Select File > Open from the menu bar
c. From the tree on the left-hand portion of the display screen, select Existing Projects or Recent Projects
within the Open Project folder
2. The following Hydra (Velocity String) display screen appears, opened to the (default) Existing Projects tab.
Figure 188
3. Select the desired project within the tab page on the right-hand portion of the display screen, and click the Open
Project button in the tab page.
From the Cerberus main menu, double-click the project name in the left-hand tree to open an existing
project
Saving a Velocity String Project
The project configuration and last set of calculated values is retained when the project is saved. There are
two ways a project can be saved:
1. Click Save on the toolbar.

OR
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
Deleting a Velocity String Project
1. From the menu bar, select File > Delete.
2. From the Velocity String Opening Dialog, select the project and click the Delete Project button.
Files can be shared between computers by importing and exporting them. Components and even entire
projects can be exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media,
a job can be imported into Cerberus. The export files may also be emailed to another person for use on their
computer.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
Configuration information in the Velocity String model is accessible/editable via The Hydra (Velocity String) display
screen. View/edit information by clicking the associated tab, or by selecting the related item in the tree.
Configuration information is stored within a project, so it is quickly accessible without the necessity of re-
input.
Select a Well with a Defined Reservoir
1. Within the Hydra (Velocity String) display screen:
a. Click the Well tab.
OR
b. Select Well Geometry from the tree.
2. Use the Well dropdown to select an existing well.
OR
3. Click the associated Open button to access the Select Well dialog.
Figure 189
4. (Optional) To edit the selected well, click the associated Edit button. The Well Editor appears.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
Verify Reservoir Parameters
The reservoir model is used to calculate reservoir IPR curves. When a project is opened in the Velocity String
Model, the reservoir parameters default to those specified in Well Editor. The parameters for the current session
can be changed in Reservoir tab of the Hydra (Velocity String) display screen. However, the next time the project
is opened, it will once again have the original inputs specified in Well Editor.
 To verify reservoir parameters

a. Click the Reservoir tab.
OR
b. Select Reservoir from the tree.
2. Ensure that the reservoir parameter-fields are filled as desired.
Figure 190
Current reservoir pressure is the average reservoir pressure currently in the drainage volume. Future
reservoir pressure is the average reservoir pressure at a future depleted reservoir condition
Only a multiphase fluid can be selected as a reservoir fluid. If this type of fluid does not currently exist in the
software, it can be created in Fluid Editor .
If the reservoir fluid is a wet gas, then Darcy Gas and Fetkovich models can be used. If the reservoir fluid is not gas
in the reservoir, then Constant Productivity Index, Darcy Oil, Fetkovich, and Vogel-Standing models are allowed.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
Select One or More Velocity Strings
 To select velocity string (s)

a. Click the Velocity String tab.
OR
b. Select Velocity String from the tree.
2. Select the pipe type and installation depth.
3. Select between Simple and Advanced string types.
A Simple String refers to tubing string that has only one OD and wall thickness while an Advanced String can
consist of tubing sections with different tubing wall thicknesses.
a. If Simple Strings is toggled:
Use the associated dropdowns to select tubing OD and Wall sizes.
Figure 191
b. If Advanced Strings is toggled:

Use the associated dropdowns to select existing string(s).
OR
a. Click the New button to access the Select String dialog, from which the user may select an existing string
or create a new string.
Figure 192
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
Enter Runtime Data
 To enter runtime data

a. Click the Runtime Data tab.
OR
b. Select Runtime Data from the tree.
Figure 193
2. Ensure the Wellhead Pressure and Multiphase Model information is in place as desired. See Verify Reservoir
Parameters for more information about multiphase fluids.
Calculating Data
The user may customize the way the Velocity String model calculates data.
 To customize calculation options
1. Create or open the project.
2. Click the Calculations button under the Project Options folder in the menu tree.
3. Perform edits as needed.
4. Select the type of friction calculations to use (smooth pipe or rough pipe). If rough pipe is selected, enter the
roughness for the inside pipe and annulus. Roughness has no effect on flows in the laminar regime.
Figure 194
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6
 To perform the calculation
1. After all parameters are in place as desired, click Calculate from any of the Velocity String tabs.
2. If all parameters contribute to a successful calculation, the calculation output becomes available, as follows:
Figure 195
Using the Output Data
 To view the velocity string graph (default)

1. Click the Graph tab
OR
2. Select Output Data > Graphs from the left-hand tree.
 To view the velocity string data
1. Click the Data tab
OR
2. Select Output Data > Data from the left-hand tree.
 To print the velocity string data
1. Click the Print tab
OR
2. Select Output Data > Print from the left-hand tree.
3. Toggle the options desired.
Figure 196
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Chapter 8
Using the Packer and Completion Analysis (PACA)
This section describes the process involved in using PACA, the Cerberus model/wizard that calculates what happens
to a packer set on the end of production or workover tubing if conditions change at surface or downhole.
About PACA
Change in conditions at surface or downhole may cause a packer set on the end of production or workover tubing to
experience movement. Buckling in the tubing may also occur as an effect of condition change. The resulting forces
on the packer or tubing may be damaging.
“Change in conditions” may include any combination of:
1. Set-down or pickup of the tubing at surface.

2. Change of temperature-profile downhole.
3. Change of fluids in the tubing and/or annulus.
4. Change in the fluid-flow rate.
5. Change of pressure on the tubing or annulus.
6. The Packer and Completion Analysis wizard (given the change of conditions) calculates:
7. Tubing movement at the packer, if any (depending upon packer type).
8. Force acting on the packer communicated by the tubing.
9. Force on the casing communicated by the packer.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
The PACA Process
The process involved in using PACA is as follows:

1. Create a new PACA project or select an existing project
PACA (along with the majority of other Cerberus models) is organized by projects.
2. Select the application

Depending on the application-type chosen, the wizard follows one of two paths:
a. Permanent tubing completion
b. Temporary packer run on coiled tubing or pipe
3. Select a well
4. For permanent tubing completion, select a well with a tubing string and a packer
5. For a temporary packer run on CT or pipe, select the CT or pipe
6. For a temporary packer run on CT or pipe, select a tool with a packer
7. Configure the packer properties
8. Define initial conditions
9. Define one or more subsequent scenarios
10. Analyze; view the analysis and print a report
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Accessing the PACA Model/Wizard
 To access PACA from the Cerberus home page
1. Select the PACA button.
OR
2. Select Models > PACA from the menu bar.

Accessing the Well Editor and Fluids Manager
 To access the Well Editor or Fluids Manager

1. Select, from the menu bar, Managers > Well Editor, or Managers > Fluids Manager.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
The PACA model/wizard is organized by projects.
Creating a New PACA Project
The following procedure outlines how to create a new PACA project.

1. Select File > New from the Packer and Completion Analysis menu bar. The
New Paca Project dialog appears:
Figure 197
Start a new PACA project directly from the Cerberus home page by selecting File > New > PACA Project
2. Provide a New Name for the project. The name may consist of letters, numbers, and spaces, with a maximum of
32 characters.
Figure 198 - The Packer and Completion Analysis wizard display screen appears
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Opening an Existing PACA Project

1. Select File > Open from the menu bar.
2. Select the desired project, and click OK.
The Packer and Completion Analysis wizard display screen appears.
Saving a PACA Project
 To save a project
1. On the menu bar, select File > Save or Save As.... OR
2. After parameter input, click Exit. The following dialog appears:
Figure 199
Deleting a PACA Project

 To delete a project
1. From the Packer and Completion Analysis menu bar, select File > Delete.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Using the PACA Wizard
The Packer and Completion Analysis wizard “walks” the user through complex configuration and design tasks,
stepping through key decisions in a logical sequence, and presenting choices based on context and previous
selections.
Use the Next, Back, and Exit buttons to move through the wizard.
Entering Calculation Options
 To enter Safety Factors, Calculation Options, and Hydraulic Options for a project
1. Click the Options button on the main Packer and Completion Analysis display screen.
Selecting the PACA Application
 To select the PACA application

From the Packer and Completion Analysis display screen, select from the following application types:
1. Permanent tubing completion
2. Temporary packer run on coiled tubing
3. Temporary packer run on pipe
Depending on the application-type chosen, the wizard follows one of two paths:
a. Permanent tubing completion
b. Temporary packer run on coiled tubing or pipe
After selecting a “temporary packer run on coiled tubing or pipe” application, go to Following the
“Temporary Packer Run on Coiled Tubing or Pipe” Path.
Following the “Permanent Tubing Completion” Path
After selecting a permanent-tubing-completion application, complete the following steps, as laid out in the wizard.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Selecting a Well that Includes Tubing String and Packer
 To select a well that includes tubing string and packer

1. Click the yellow-folder icon beside the Well field to select an existing well or to create a new well.
Figure 200
OR
2. Click the Edit Well icon (also beside the Well field) to edit the well shown in the field or to create a new well.
Figure 201
If the selected well has multiple packers, only the bottom packer is used in the calculations
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
3. Review and/or modify the production tubing string.
Figure 202
At this point, go to Following the Converged Path to continue the permanent-tubing-completion process.
Following the “Temporary Packer Run on Coiled Tubing or Pipe” Path
After selecting a “temporary packer run on coiled tubing or pipe” application, complete the following
steps, as laid out in the wizard.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Selecting a Well
1. Click the yellow-folder beside the Well field to select an existing well or to create a new well.
Figure 203
OR
2. Click the Edit Well (also beside the Well field) to edit the well shown in the field or to create a new well.
Figure 204
Selecting the Coiled Tubing String or Jointed Pipe
 To select the CT string or jointed pipe

1. From the Reviewing... PACA-wizard display screen, click the yellow-folder icon beside the String field to select
an existing string or to create a new string.
OR
a. (Jointed Pipe) Click the Edit Pipe icon beside the String field to edit an existing JP workstring or to
create a new string.
b. (Coiled Tubing) Click the Edit String icon beside the String field to edit an existing CT string or to
create a new string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Selecting a Tool with a Packer
 To ensure that a string includes a tool with a packer

1. From the Cerberus main menu, select, from the menu bar, Managers > Tool String Editor.
2. From the Select Tool String dialog, double-click the tool string intended for use in the PACA wizard.
Figure 205 - The Tool String Editor appears.
3. Within the Toolbox tab, double-click a toolbox (or click the “plus sign” (+) associated with the toolbox) to
display its included tools.
4. Double-click the tool in which to include a packer
Figure 206 - The Tool Editor display screen appears
The Tool Editor is only accessible from the Tool String Editor.
5. Within the Tool Features section, double-click Packer

The Packer toggle box appears
6. Click within the toggle box and click the Save button (or select File > Save from the menu bar).
7. Close the Editors and return to the PACA wizard.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Following the Converged Path
The two paths, “permanent tubing completion” and “temporary packer run on coiled tubing or pipe,” converge at the
point of configuring packer properties.
Configuring Packer Properties
1. Use the Configure the Packer display screen to configure packer properties.
Figure 207
Defining Initial Conditions
1. Use the Initial Conditions display screen to configure initial conditions.
Figure 208
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Defining One or More Subsequent Scenarios
1. Use the Subsequent Conditions display screen to define one or more subsequent scenarios.
Figure 209
2. Click each related ellipses button to find/include information about the scenario and the various input data.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
Conducting the Analysis
 To conduct an analysis
1. Click the Analysis button to initiate calculations. The Results – Initial Conditions display screen
appears.
Figure 210
 To view details for each Summary category

1. Review/print the Summary (default) information, including Packer Status, Tubing Status, and Movement Status.
a. Click the category’s related ellipses button .
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
 To review/print the results graphs and tables
1. Review/print graphs, tables, and other related information generated from the calculations.
a. Select the Graphs and Tables node on the Results – Initial Conditions display screen.
Figure 211
b. To view each graph, click on its related Graph button .
c. To view each table, click on its related Table button .

d. To view the stress analysis, click on the button by the same name.
e. From any graph, table, or analysis dialog, click the Print button to view and set up print options, and to
print analysis results.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8 | Using PACA
 To view the initial-condition results in 3-D
1. View the initial-condition results in 3-D.
a. Select the 3-D View node on the Results – Initial Conditions display screen.
Figure 212
___________________________________________________________________________________________
9 | Using Solids Cleanout
Chapter 9
Using Solids Cleanout
This section describes the process involved in using Solids Cleanout, the Cerberus Hydra based model for coiled
tubing. Solids Cleanout calculates pump rates and the pressures involved in removing fill, such as sand, from a
wellbore.
The Solids Cleanout Process
The process involved in using Solids Cleanout is as follows:

1. Create a new Solids Cleanout project or select an existing project
Solids Cleanout (along with many other Cerberus models) is organized by projects
2. Select well
3. Enter fill data
4. Select equipment
5. Select fluid data
6. Enter constraints
7. Calculate sensitivity
8. Enter pump rates for each stage
9. Adjust any other operating parameters
10. Perform the job-design calculation
11. Use/print the output data
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Accessing Solids Cleanout (Hydra)
 To access Solids Cleanout from the Cerberus home page
1. Select the Solids Cleanout button.
OR
2. Select Models > Solids Cleanout from the menu bar.
The Solids Cleanout model loads, and the opening dialog of the Hydra (Solids Cleanout) model appears.
Figure 213 - Solids Cleanout Opening Dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Solids Cleanout model is organized by projects.
Using the Solids Cleanout Opening-dialog Tools
Table 18 - Solids Cleanout opening-dialog toolbar tools

Exit Exits Solids Cleanout
Opens the New Solids Cleanout Project dialog to create

New
a new project.
Open Opens the Select Job dialog box to open an existing job
Save Saves the current project to disk

OR
2. Click + to expand the tree’s Program Preferences node; click Units.
Creating a New Solids Cleanout Project
The following procedure outlines how to create a new Solids Cleanout project.
1. From the Solids Cleanout Opening Dialog, choose one of the following:
a. Select File > New from the menu bar
b. lick the New toolbar button:
2. The New Project dialog appears:
Figure 214 - New Solids Cleanout Project dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Start a new Solids Cleanout project directly from the Cerberus home page by selecting File > New >
Solids Cleanout Project.
32 characters.
4. The Solids Cleanout configuration display-screen appears.
Figure 215
Opening an Existing Solids Cleanout Project

1. Choose one of the following from the Solids Cleanout opening dialog:
a. Select File > Open from the menu bar
c. From the tree on the left-hand portion of the display screen, select Existing Projects or Recent Projects
within the Open Project folder.
2. The following Hydra (Solids Cleanout) display screen appears, opened to the (default) Existing Projects tab.
Figure 216
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Select the desired project from the list on the right-hand portion of the display screen, and click the Open
Project button.
From the Cerberus main menu, double-click the project name in the left-hand tree to open an existing
project.
Saving a Solids Cleanout Project
The project configuration and last set of calculated values is retained when the project is saved. There are two ways
a project can be saved:

OR
Deleting a Solids Cleanout Project
1. From the menu bar, select File > Delete Project.
2. From the Solids Cleanout Opening Dialog, click the Delete Project button.
can be exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media, a job can be
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuration information in the Solids Cleanout model is accessible/editable via The Hydra (Solids Cleanout)
display screen. View/edit the information by clicking the associated tab, or by selecting the related item in the tree.
Configuration information is stored within a project, so it is quickly accessible without the necessity of re-
input.
Select a Well
1. Within the Hydra (Solids Cleanout) display screen:
a. Click the Well tab.
OR
b. Select Well Geometry from the tree.
2. Use the Well dropdown to select an existing well.
OR
3. Click the associated Open button to access the Select Well dialog.
Figure 217
4. (Optional) To edit the selected well, click the associated Edit button. The Well Editor appears.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Enter Fill Data
 To enter fill data

a. Click the Fill Data tab.
OR
b. Click (to check) Fill Data from the tree.
2. Enter the properties of the fill material and the calculation options.
Select Equipment (Reel, Coiled Tubing, and Tool String)
 To select equipment
a. Click the Equipment tab.
OR
b. Select Equipment from the tree.
2. Select the reel.
a. Click the Open button .
b. The Select Tell dialog appears
Figure 218
c. Select the desired reel.

OR
d. Click the New button to create a new reel. The Reel Editor dialog appears.
e. Edit the properties of the selected reel.
f. Click the Edit button associated with the reel to access the Reel Editor.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Select the coiled tubing.
a. Click the Open button . The Select String dialog appears:
Figure 219
b. Select the desired string.

OR
c. Click the New button to create a new string. The String Editor appears.
d. Edit the properties of the selected string.
4. Click the Edit button associated with the string to access the String Editor.
a. Select the tool string (BHA).
Click the Open button .
Figure 220 - The Select Tool String dialog appears
b. Select the desired tool string.

OR
c. Click the New button to create a new tool string. The Tool String Editor appears.
d. Edit the properties of the selected tool string.
e. Click the Edit button associated with the tool string (BHA) to access the ToolString Editor
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Select Fluid Data
 To select fluid data

a. Click the Fluid Data tab.
OR
b. Select Fluid Data from the tree.
2. Select the job fluid(s).
a. Click the Open button associated with each fluid type to access the Fluid Selection dialog.
Figure 221
b. Check/toggle the fluid type(s) to view (liquid, gas, commingled, or reservoir fluids).
c. Select the desired fluid.
3. Edit the properties of the selected fluid(s).
a. Click the Edit button associated with each fluid type to access the Fluid Editor dialog.
Enter Constraints
 To enter constraints
a. Click the Constraints tab.
OR
b. Select Constraints from the tree.
2. Enter any constraints that would help to make the calculated outcome more accurate
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 222
For a deviated well, the Wiper Trip Pullback Depth can be determined either by entering the wiper trip
pullback depth directly or by specifying the well inclination angel from which the wiper trip pullback depth
can be calculated based on well survey data.
Calculate Sensitivity
 To calculate sensitivity
a. Click the Sensitivity Analysis tab.
OR
b. Select Sensitivity Analysis from the tree.
Figure 223
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Click the Go button to calculate:
a. Minimum and maximum conditions of operating parameters.
b. A sensitivity analysis on pump rates between the above limits at all job stages.
If the Go button is disabled, data errors are present within other Input Data screens
Also, if the sensitivity calculation determines that a solids-cleanout operation would be unsuccessful given
the provided parameters, a popup appears describing possible actions to take to correct the situation
Enter Pump Rates for Each Stage
After analyzing sensitivity, enter pump rates for each stage (from the Sensitivity Analysis tab), in preparation for
the final calculation step.
Although the Calculate button appears within each tab, it is prudent to wait until all parameters are
properly entered before calculating.
 To enter pump rates for each stage

1. Within each stage (RIH, POOH, and Cleaning), observe the Liquid Rate (gal/min) in relation to the Pump
Pressure, BHP, and other available parameters.
Figure 224
2. Determine a pump rate (Liquid Rate (gal/min)) that satisfies both Pump Pressure and BHP requirements for use
in the final calculation.
a. Choose the Pressure and BHP numbers in the table row that best correspond to the situation at hand, and
observe the associated Liquid Rate.
3. Input the Liquid Rate that corresponds to the Pressure and BHP table-numbers within the
Use this pump rate field underneath each stage’s table.
OR
4. Input a value that is not included in the table. In this case, a new row is calculated within the table.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Click Use or Use in Job Design
Each value “used” is automatically entered in the Operating Parameters list for use in the job- design calculation.
6. (Optional) Click Copy or Copy to Clipboard
The table-data is copied to the clipboard for use in an electronic spreadsheet.
Adjust Any Other Operating Parameters
 To adjust any other operating parameters

a. Click the Operating Parameters tab.
OR
b. Select Operating Parameter from the tree.
Figure 225
8. Adjust parameters as needed.
Perform the Job-design Calculation
 To perform the job-design calculation

1. After all parameters are in place as desired, click Calculate from any of the Solids Cleanout tabs
2. If all parameters contribute to a successful calculation and solids-cleanout operation, the Output Data becomes
available, as shown in Figure 223:
Figure 226
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Using the Output Data
 To view the solids removal procedures (default)

1. Click the Procedures tab
OR
2. Select Output Data > Procedures from the left-hand tree.
 To view the solids removal stages
1. Click the Stage Data tab
OR
2. Select Output Data > Stages from the left-hand tree.
 To print the solids removal data
1. Click the Print tab
OR
2. Select Output Data > Print from the left-hand tree.
3. Toggle the options desired.
Figure 227
___________________________________________________________________________________________
10 | Using the String Editor
Chapter 10
Using the String Editor
String Editor is used to configure all the parameters that describe a coiled tubing string. String Editor stores each string
in a different database. String inputs apply only to the tubing itself. The reel where the tubing is spooled is considered
separately because a string can be moved from one reel to another during its working life.
1. Starting String Editor

2. The String Editor Display Screen
3. Working with Strings
4. Receiving a String on Removable Media from a Manufacturer
5. Using CT Specifications
6. Configuring Strings
7. String Utilities
8. String Services
9. String History
10. String Fatigue
11. Troubleshooting in String Editor
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Starting String Editor
The following methods are available to start the String Editor:

1. Orpheus and Hydra models include direct access to the String Editor via the String Editor toolbar button . In
Reel-Trak (Job Manager), a String Editor icon is associated with the
String field (in the Job Setup tab) when/if a string is selected.
2. Within the Cerberus main menu, select Editors > String Editor from the menu bar.
String Editor opens in Simple Mode (showing a minimum of options) or Expanded Mode (showing a full range of
options), depending on the following:
1. If launched from Orpheus or Hydra, String Editor opens in Simple Mode.
2. If launched from Reel-Trak, String Editor opens in Expanded Mode.
3. If launched from the Cerberus main menu, String Editor opens in Expanded Mode if fatigue modeling
capabilities are included in the user license.
 To manually select the String Editor mode
1. Select Options > Expanded/Simple Mode from the main String Editor menu bar.
Upon launching of String Editor, the editor opens with the selected string loaded. If String Editor is launched without a
string selected, the Select a String dialog appears.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The String Editor Display Screen
The String Editor display screen is used to create new strings, open existing strings, and to manage strings after their
creation.
The string name is shown alongside the display-screen name in the title bar.
String Editor Toolbar
Rest the cursor over a tool button for a few seconds to display the tool name.
Table 19 describes the icons on the main String Editor toolbar, along with each icon's function.
Table 19 - String Editor Main Toolbar

Exit Exits String Editor.
New Opens the New String dialog to create a new string.

Opens the Select a String dialog to open an existing
Open string.
Save Saves the current string.
Delete Deletes the current string from the hard drive.
Print Opens the String Print dialog to print the current string
Opens the Sections properties screen to configure

Sections sections
Welds Opens the Welds screen to configure welds
Zones Opens the Zones screen to manage zones.
Lock Allows the user to lock the string
Fatigue Profile Opens a fatigue graph for the string
History Opens a history log for the string.
Opens the Corrosion screen for the string, from which

Corrosion the user can choose between using the Wall Reduction
or the String Life Reduction method
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cut String Opens the Cut String screen
Splice String Opens the Splice String screen
Opens the Reverse String screen, with options of

Reverse String reversing the current string (no fatigue included) or reel-
to-reel spooling operation (fatigue added to string)
Opens the String Weight dialog showing an estimate of

Weight the string weight
Opens the String Volume dialog showing an estimate of

Volume the string volume.
Opens the Summary screen with associated information

Cost for recording and estimating string cost
Help Opens the Cerberus User Guide
String Summary
The default view within a String Editor display screen is the string Summary information.
 To access the String Summary
1. Select the Summary button in the left-hand portion of the display screen (unless the Summary information
already appears as the default).
OR
2. Select Edit > Summary from the menu bar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Properties
Select the Properties tab in the right-hand area of the display screen to access string-property information.
1. Tubing Type - A dropdown from which the user may select from Standard CT, Capillary, or FLATpakTM.
Tubing Type is not visible by default. To view and use the Tubing Type field, select Options > Show
Tubing Type from the String Editor menu bar
When the FLATpak tubing type is selected, fatigue is reset for the string. The Properties area expands to include
additional parameters, from which the user may verify/alter the available properties.
FLATpak is a jacketed/encapsulated CT product manufactured by CJS Coiled Tubing Supply and Source
Rock Energy Partners. FLATpak can be used as a production conduit or to deploy downhole pumps, as
well as other services. It consists of one or more individual CT and/or electric string encapsulated in a
plastic/ polymer jacket.
For this release of Cerberus, FLATpak strings are supported in Orpheus and Job Manager. FLATpak
tubing that includes cable may not be defined
2. Total Length - Shows the length of the CT string.

3. Material - A dropdown menu from which the user may choose from among various CT material types.
4. Diameter - A dropdown menu from which the user may choose from among possible CT diameters. This
information is automatically supplied by Cerberus when the string is selected.
5. Wall Size - A dropdown menu from which the user may choose from possible CT string wall sizes. This
information is automatically supplied by Cerberus when the string is selected.
If a cable is installed in the coiled tubing, the user may click (to check) the Cable installed togglebox
(associated with the cable icon) to include related parameters:
6. Cable type - The type of cable installed in the CT.
7. Weight - The cable weight in lbf/ft.
8. Cable diameter - The cable diameter in inches.
9. Date installed - The date on which the cable was installed in the CT.
10. H2S rated - Click (to toggle) this field if the installed cable is H2S rated.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Info
Select the Info tab to access secondary properties for a specific string. This action repopulates the screen to
include the following:
1. Date Manufactured - The date the CT was manufactured. To change this value, select the Sections button
(in the left-hand portion of the display screen); then click the Manufacturer Data button and input the date
in the Date of Manufacture field. The date then automatically populates the Date Manufactured field in
secondary properties (Info).
2. Date Commissioned - The date the CT string entered service. Change this value to the current date by
clicking the associated ellipses button .
3. Primary Application - The primary use for the CT string, such as Workstring, High Pressure Workstring,
Drilling, and so forth. Choose from among the various options available in this drop down menu.
Figure 228
4. Database - The file name of the string.

5. Total Running Feet - Automatically populated by fatigue calculations in Reel-Trak. In Cerberus, running
feet is calculated only while running in-hole. For example, if the string is run in to 1000 ft, pulled out to 500
ft, then run back in to 1000 ft, and then pulled out of the well, the running feet will be 1500 ft.
6. Archived - Indicates the archival status of the string. Click (to toggle) this field if the string is archived.
Actual Cost
Invoice Number and Actual string cost (US$) may be manually input in the two available fields.
String Diagram
A visual representation of the string is shown in the middle left-hand portion of the String Editor display
screen.
The following may also be viewed:

1. Data Protection - Also present within the string diagram portion of the display screen, data protection
indicators show whether the string is protected (locked) or editable. Lock the string by clicking the
associated lock button. When the string is locked, the button appears as a closed lock . When the string
is not locked, the button appears as an open lock .
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with Strings
Creating a New String
A new string can also be created by saving a copy of a string, either in its entirety or without the fatigue
and history.
Manually Creating a New String
The following procedure outlines how to manually create a new string.

 To manually create a new string
1. Complete one of the following:
a. From the Cerberus main menu, select Managers > String Editor from the menu bar; then click the New
String button on the Select a String dialog.
b. From the String Editor display screen, click New on the toolbar
c. Select File > New from the String Editor menu bar
Figure 229 - The New String dialog appears
2. Enter the New String Name

The string name can be up to 32 characters, letters and numbers, including spaces.
3. Click (to check) Include Standard Strings, Include Archived, Include FLATpak,and/or Include Capillary,
as appropriate.
4. (Optional) Click (to check) Show String Diagram.
5. Click OK. The String Configuration Wizard appears, with Show Wizard on start-up automatically checked. Click
(to un-check) to discontinue showing the wizard on start-up.
6. To configure the string manually, see Configuring Strings.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a String using the String Configuration Wizard
This wizard helps to create a new string when the configuration of the string is known. If help is needed to design
a string for a particular application, see Creating a String using the String Design Wizard instead.
 To create a string using the String Configuration Wizard
1. Select Help > String Configuration Wizard from the String Editor menu bar, if the String
Configuration Wizard did not appear automatically after entering a New string Name from the New String
dialog.
2. If not already entered in the New String dialog, enter a name for the new string. The name may be up to 32
characters long and may contain letters, numbers, and spaces. Then click Next.
3. Click (to toggle) the name of the supplier for this string. (Some parameters and specifications vary with each
supplier. Clicking one of these toggles enters all the relevant supplier-specific information automatically.)
When finished, click Next.
Cerberus supports Quality Tubing Inc.’s True Taper section-wall type, as well as Global Tubing’s
SMARTaper wall types
4. Click (to toggle) the type of material to be used in the string. Click Next to continue.
When a material type is toggled, information about that material is displayed on the left-hand side of the
wizard scree
If Quality Tubing was selected in the previous wizard screen, the user must select QT-800, QT-900, or
QT-1000 to use True Taper characteristics in wizard calculations.
If Global Tubing was selected in the previous wizard screen, the user selects from among GT-80, GT-90,
GT-100, or GT-110 material types. SMARTaper capabilities can then be used in wizard calculations
5. From the String Diameter screen, select the diameter of the string from the dropdown. Click Next to continue.
All available diameters for the chosen manufacturer are listed. It is assumed the diameter will remain
constant along the entire length of the string
6. The Straight or Tapered? screen appears. Click (to toggle) Straight Wall (indicating the wall is consistent along
the length of the string) or Tapered Wall (indicating that the string has more than one wall size).
a. If Quality Tubing’s material type QT-800, QT-900, or QT-1000 was selected in Step 4, above, a
togglebox becomes available, within which the user may: Check this box if the string has any True
Taper sections.
b. If Global Tubing’s material type GT-80, GT-90, GT-100, or GT-110 was selected in Step 4, above, a
togglebox becomes available, within which the user may: Check this box if the string has any
SMARTaper sections.
7. Use the dropdown menu to select the Number of Sections. Click Next to continue.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Within the Section Properties dialog, complete the following:
a. Input the Section End numeric value from the core end of the string.
b. Select, from the dropdown menu, the Weld Type for the section described above.
i. For sections that are to be comprised of Global Tubing’s SMARTaper Weld Type, select None
(SMARTaper).
c. Select, from the dropdown menu, the Nominal Wall Size for the section.
i. If the togglebox named Check this box if the string has any True Taper sections was checked
on the Straight or Tapered? Quality Tubing-related screen, both an Uphole Nominal Wall Size
and a Downhole Nominal Wall Size dropdown now appear for each section.
ii. If the togglebox named Check this box if the string has any SMARTaper sections was
checked on the Straight or Tapered? Global Tubing-related screen, both an Uphole Nominal
Wall Size and a Downhole Nominal Wall Size dropdown now appear for each section.
d. For each additional section, input the information described in the step above and click Next to continue.
The last section-end is used to determine the length of the string.
9. Click Finish to save the new string and exit the Wizard. The new string now opens.
Creating a String using the String Design Wizard
The String Design Wizard is used to create a new string for the meeting of certain conditions or for a specific
application. In other words, the wizard helps the user determine the best string to use in each well (or in multiple
wells). The String Design wizard helps the user optimize the diameter, wall size(s), and material type for specific
job conditions, such as in the design of a deviated well. The wizard also allows for the use of pre-designed data from
Orpheus.
 To create a new string using the String Design Wizard
1. Select Help > String Design Wizard from the String Editor menu bar.
OR
2. Select Utilities > CT String Design... from the Cerberus main menu.
The String Design Wizard appears. Use the wizard to compare a variety of manufacturers’ tubing types in
relation to the well condition, job requirements, and job restrictions to determine the best tubing choice for a
job.
Figure 230 - String Design Wizard

___________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Use the editable fields to alter the Well Condition & Design Criteria in the upper left portion of the wizard.
AND / OR
4. Click the Edit button within this section of the String Design Wizard
The String Design Wizard-Wells dialog becomes available. The well(s) information is displayed and may be
edited in this dialog.
Figure 231
a. Click (to toggle) either Vertical or Simple deviated well within the Generate a simple well area.
Optionally, click (to toggle) select from Existing wells.
When Vertical or Simple deviated is selected, a single well is used in string design. When select from
Existing wells is selected, string design can be performed with multiple wells.
i. Select any well type (left-side toggle option) to allow the input of Fluid density.
Figure 232
ii. To alter the Target depth, select the Options button, which accesses the String Design Options
dialog. Here, various string-design options are available. Altering these options can have a
profound effect on the design of the string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 233
Following is an explanation of the various options:
Table 20
Option Description
Check depth from zero When selected, tripping calculation starts from surface.
When unselected, the user can specify the start depth for
the tripping calculation, which can reduce calculation time
Always set well TD as target depth When selected, target depth is always well TD
Check extended reach capability Extended reach is tested for candidate strings
Depth increment for extended reach calculation The number input specifies the precision of the extended
reach calculation
Check all materials available When selected, all materials are involved in the design
calculation (not recommended).
Wall thickness for a diameter Toggled item determines how wall thickness is specified.
No wall section length may be less than . . When checked, this input determines the minimum length
of any wall section
Maximum wall thickness steps per taper Maximum number of wall thickness steps per taper. Effect
especially noticeable when well has a long horizontal
section
Yield safety factor Used in tubing yield calculation
Generate debug data When selected, a text file (located on the user’s desktop)
is updated. If there is any question or problem with the
wizard, then the user can send the file to CTES
Show tips Help tips are displayed when this is selected
iii. To allow the input of Total depth and Wellbore diameter, select either a Vertical or Simple
deviated well.
iv. To allow the additional input of Kick-off depth, Build end depth, and the selection and input of
End inclination or Build rate, select a Simple deviated well.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
v. To use multiple existing wells, select Existing wells.
 Click the Add and Remove buttons to fill the Selected well(s) area.
 Click the View/Edit button after selecting a well to access the well editor.
vi. Click OK to exit the String Design Wizard-Wells dialog.
b. Within the Well Condition & Design Criteria area, click (to check) Work zone, if desired (default is
checked). Work zone provides input pertaining to the well depth at which the tubing is cycled. The wall
thickness is increased in the specified range.
Click the down-pointing green arrow to input the Top, Bottom, and Pump pressure details.
5. To alter the Tubing Selection information (upper middle portion of the String Design Wizard), click Edit in that
area.
The Tubing Selection dialog appears. This dialog can provide a list of qualified tubing dimensions based on the
desired string length, fluid density, job restriction(s), material(s), and diameter/walls.
Table 21
a. Various basic settings are available on the left top-of-page. These include Desired string length, Fluid
density, Maximum pump pressure, and Maximum wellhead pressure. Edit these as desired.
Desired string length must not be less than target depth
___________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Job Restrictions-area settings determine the diameters and walls that are used in CT string design.
To edit settings in the Job Restrictions area, click (to check) individual checkboxes. Related edit/input
fields become available. Categories include:
i. Crane/road weight limitation: When selected, the validity of the tubing weight is checked
based on the diameters and walls of user selections to determine if the total weight will exceed
the weight limit.
ii. Flow capacity: When selected, the validity of the tubing’s internal diameters are checked to
determine if fluid can flow through the entire tubing with the maximum pump pressure.
iii. Reel capacity: When selected, the validity of tubing dimensions are checked to determine if a
tubing of the desired length and a certain diameter will fit the reel.
iv. Tubing collapse: When selected, the validity of tubing strength and dimensions are checked to
determine if a tubing’s collapse ratio will exceed the collapse safety factor with the maximum
wellhead pressure
Changing information in the Job Restrictions area affects the information displayed in the Tubing
Qualifications Chart in the right-hand portion of the Tubing Selection dialog
c. Specify tubing manufacturer, material (grade), and range(s) (minimum and maximum) for both diameters
and walls in the Tubing Specification (lower left of the Tubing Selection dialog) area.
To edit information in the Tubing Specification area, select the Manufacturer from the available
dropdown, click (to check) the Materials, and input Minimum and Maximum Diameters and Walls
using the dropdowns.
d. The Tubing Qualifications Chart in the right-hand portion of the Tubing Selection dialog allows the
user to review whether the selected tubing dimensions satisfy or do not satisfy the job restriction(s).
The Tubing Qualifications Chart details appear only when Job Restrictions are specified
i. Select the Material (from the dropdown) in the upper left-hand portion of the Tubing
Qualification Chart.
The Material dropdown selection is dependent on the materials checked in the Materials field-group of
the Tubing Specification area on the Tubing Selection dialog
ii. 2.) Click the Update Chart button underneath the Tubing Qualification Chart to see the
calculated values because of the Job Restrictions specified by the user. If a job restriction is not
specified, it is not displayed in the chart.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 234
Color codes displayed reflect the following:
Green: Satisfies the job restriction

Orange: Is within but close to the job restriction
limit Red: Does not satisfy the job restriction
iii. Select a different Material (if available) and click the Update Chart button to see new
calculations in relation to that material.
iv. Click (to check) View Values (default is checked) in the upper right-hand portion of the chart
area to toggle on/off the visibility of the values (while retaining the coloration) in the chart.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Use the information and options in the lower portion of the String Design Wizard to weigh the viability of using
any of the various available strings to complete a job.
a. When all of the Well Condition & Design Criteria and the Tubing Selection specifications are in place,
click the Update Design button. This action sets in motion the calculation of all potential CT diameter and
wall designs. The String Design Calculation dialog appears, which shows how many candidate CT strings
and wells are involved in the design calculation.
Figure 235
If too many CT strings and/or wells are being tested, it may cause the calculation to take a very long time.
In this case, click the Cancel Calculation button and determine whether the number of materials, range
of tubing diameters/walls, and/or the number of wells should be reduced.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
i. When the calculations are complete, the strings that meet the job requirements are displayed
graphically (plotted) in the previously blank lower portion of the String Design Wizard. A single
vertical well is plotted in the example below.
Figure 236
ii. Directly below each potential string representation is a performance summary for each string.
Each line in the summary lines up with labels to the left of the plot area. The labels provide the
following information:
Table 22 - Label Information
Label Description
Meet design criteria Summary flag: Green = Qualified; Red = Not Qualified
Reachable depth Whether target depth can be reached during RIH
Safe pulling depth Whether yield limit with safety factor will be exceeded
during POOH
Available setdown Displays number if it exceeds required setdown margin

(in green); displays “Not met” if required setdown margin
cannot be met (in red).
Available pickup Displays number if it exceeds required pickup margin (in

green). Displays “Not met” if required pickup margin
cannot be met (in red).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Label Description
Extended reach Displayed if Check extended reach capability
is checked in the String Design Options
dialog.
Displays number (in black) if depth exceeding

the well TD can be reached during RIH and
can be pulled safely during POOH.
Displays “No” if depth exceeding well TD

cannot be reached during RIH or cannot be
pulled safely during POOH.
NOTE: Depth is estimated roughly and its

accuracy depends on the Depth increment for
extended reach calculation.
Available Trips Displayed if Work zone is checked in the Well Condition &
Design Criteria portion of the String Design Wizard.
b. Click (to check) Only show qualified strings to see only strings that meet the design criteria (have green
Summary flags).
c. Sort strings according to the available dropdown selections using Sort by.
Figure 237
When strings are sorted by Available setdown, sorting occurs in ascending order. All other sorting
methods result in descending-order sorts.
d. When a string is selected by mouse-click, the buttons String Details... and Save String...appear.
i. Click the String Details... button to reveal the dialog of the same name.
Figure 238
ii. Click the Save String... button to reveal the Save String As dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
e. When a string design is complete, click the Add to Proposed button to keep the design settings and
designed strings in memory. The design name is displayed in the Proposed Designs area in the upper
right-hand portion of the String Design Wizard.
Click a design in the Proposed Designs area to make available the Load and Remove options, to either
load an existing design into the software, or to remove the design.
f. Click the Options button in the lower left-hand corner of the String Design Wizard to reveal the String
Design Options dialog previously described.
g. Click CTES Defaults to restore the default settings as in place the first time the wizard is launched.
h. Click Save Defaults before exiting the wizard so that the current settings are loaded the next time the
wizard is launched.
Default String Options
 To set the initial options for all newly created strings

1. Select Options > Default String Preferences from the String Editor menu bar. The Default String Preferences dialog
appears.
Figure 239
2. Input the Default Application Factor. This is normally “1” unless it is company policyto modify fatigue by some amount.
a. Select the Fatigue Model from the dropdown.
The Fatigue Model in Achilles should default to the fatigue model selected in String Editor. For more
information about fatigue models, see the Coiled Tubing Fatigue Models appendix
3. Input/select the Default Segment Length, Default Diameter, and Default String Length.
4. Click (to toggle) the default Material for new strings.
5. Click the Set As Defaults button to finalize the settings.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Opening an Existing String
The user may open strings from the local database, import strings from removable media, or load strings from another
computer on the network or from the Internet. Strings may be sorted according to various criteria.
If the desired string isn’t listed, it may be archived. Try changing the string editor preferences to show
archived strings
 To open an existing string

1. Click Open on the String Editor toolbar.
OR
Saving a String
Saving strings records any changes to the string in the database on the hard drive.
The changes are only applied to any new uses of that string. If the edited string is already in use, it will
continue to use the old criteria
 To save a string
Complete one of the following:

2. Select File > Save from the menu bar to save a string with the same name.
3. Select File > Save As from the menu bar to save the string under a new name.
Saving a String with or without Historical Data
 To save a string with or without historical data
1. Select File > Save As from the menu bar.

2. From the Save Criteria field in the lower portion of the dialog, use the dropdown to select Save With Historical
Data or Save Without Historical Data. See String History
3. Verify the method of saving the string selected in the previous step by visual examination.
When the user selects Save With Historical Data, the current string backup is copied and renamed to the new
string. See To export a string or strings
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Saving a Copy of a String
1. Saving a string records changes to the string in the string database on the hard drive. Saving a copy of a string,
except for the fatigue and history, is useful if the user wants to re-run the jobs a string has performed.
2.
3. To save a copy of a string
4. Select File > Save As from the menu bar. The Save As dialog appears.
5. Enter a new name for the string.
6. Select the save criteria.
7. Click OK.
8. The string is saved under the new name.
Deleting a String
Use caution when deleting strings. When a string is deleted, the information cannot be recovered. Instead, consider
archiving or retiring it.
Do NOT delete a string via Windows Explorer. A string should only be deleted using this procedure in
Cerberus. Otherwise, Cerberus will indicate the string is still present and generate an error if a user tries to
select and use that string.
 To delete a string
1. Start String Editor.
2. Click Delete on the toolbar. The Delete Strings dialog appears.
3. Choose the string or strings to delete.

4. Click OK.
5. Click Yes to confirm deleting the string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Using CT Specifications
Within CT Specifications, four parameters pertaining to the CT (manufacturer, material type, diameter, and wall
(nominal)) may be altered by the user so that the software calculates the potential effects of these changes in
material properties and tubing specifications.
 To use CT Specifications
1. Select, from the menu bar, Help > CT Specs. The CT Specifications dialog appears.
Figure 240
2. Using the dropdowns in the top portion of the dialog, select from the available parameters Manufacturer,
Material type, Diameter (nominal), and Wall(nominal)
3. Observe the changes that occur in the Material Properties and Tubing Specifications as the above-described
parameters are altered.
4. Determine the coiled tubing specifications most likely to correspond to the needed CT for a particular job.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Locking or Unlocking a String
Strings must be locked before a job can be run in execute mode in Reel-Trak. Locking a string also prevents
inadvertent changes to the string database, although the string properties can still be viewed. Conversely, a string must
be unlocked before any changes can be made to it.
A visual representation of the string is shown in the middle left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
 To lock or unlock a string
1. Click Lock on the toolbar.
OR
2. Click the lock icon in the lower-left-hand portion of the visual-representation area (string diagram area) of the
string.
OR
3. Select File > Locked from the menu bar.
a. A Warning dialog box appears stating a permanent entry will be recorded in the string history log. If the
string is unlocked it will become locked (unavailable for editing) when one of the lock methods is
used. If the string is locked , it will become unlocked (available for editing) when one of the lock
methods is used.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Archiving a String
Strings that are no longer in use can be archived, or “retired.” When archived strings are hidden, they are no longer
visible in the list of strings. However, the string database remains on the hard drive.
 To archive a string or remove a string from the archive in String Editor only
1. Select File > Archived from the String Editor menu bar
The check acts as a toggle; when Archived is checked, the string is archived. When
Archived is not checked, the string is not archived.
 To generally archive a string and all of its associated job files or to remove a string from the archive
1. Select Utilities > Retire String from the String Editor menu bar.
Figure 241 - The Retire String dialog Appears
2. Click (to toggle) one choice from each category

Deleting a string removes the string and its associated jobs permanently.
3. Click Retire String.
Printing String Data
Print the status, configuration, used life, and history of a single string in String Editor.
Printing a Single String Report
The following procedure outlines how to print a single string report.

 To print string data to a printer
1. Click Print on the toolbar
OR
2. Select File > Print... from the menu bar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 242 - The String Print Dialog Appears.
3. Select/input Print Data.

a. Leave the default Title as-is, input a new title, or delete the default title to have no title on the printout.
b. Click (to check) Print Data options, as needed: Status, Sections/Welds/Zones, History, Job Analysis
Report, Fatigue Graph and Diameter Graph.
4. Select the Printer Options.

a. Select the Printer from the dropdown. If the user has:
i. A SharePoint URL with the related Cerberus configuration set up as described in Cerberus Setup
> SharePoint tab, and
ii. The CTES PDF Printer 50 printer selected in the application.
b. Click the Select Logo button to select a logo.
If SharePoint is not available or its use is not desired, a PDF file can be printed for email distribution or for archiving.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To use the NOV CTES PDF Generator
OR
2. Select File > Print... from the menu bar
The String Print dialog appears.
3. Select/input Print Data as described previously.
4. Select the printer
In the Printer Options section, select CTES PDF Printer 50 from the Printer dropdown menu.
5. Click Print
The Save As dialog box appears.
6. Input a file name
Navigate to the desired location where the file should be saved
Ensure that the Save as type selection is listed as “PDF file (*.pdf)”. Otherwise, the file might not be saved
correctly and might be unavailable for use.
7. Click the Save button.
Printing a Zoomed View of the String Life
 To print a zoomed view of the string life

1. Click Fatigue on the String Editor toolbar.
OR
2. Select View > Fatigue Profile from the menu bar.
3. Select the scale ratio for the graph; (optional) select other plot options.
a. Right-click the graph to adjust the scale of the string diagram for the printout.
Zoom Out
If the main Cerberus Setup dialog option Auto-scale fatigue viewers is clicked (checked), the
option on the fatigue-profile Zoom Out menu is called Zoom out (autoscale).
If the main Cerberus Setup dialog option Auto-scale fatigue viewers is not clicked (checked),
the option on the fatigue-profile Zoom Out menu is called Zoom out (100%).
Set the Auto-scale fatigue views option on the main Cerberus screen by selecting Options > Cerberus
Setup from the menu bar
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Percentage Range
Click to select from among a variety of percentage-range zoom options:
0 - 100%, 0 - 50%, 0 - 25%, 0 - 10%.
b. For additional plot-option selections, right-click the graph and select Options to reveal the Plot Options
dialog.
i. From the Fatigue screen, click (to check or to toggle) Auto-scale fatigue viewer, Used life scale,
Display high used life warning at [input number] %, Display fatigue due to corrosion.
ii. From the Diameter tab, click (to check) Display high diameter warning, under which the user
may click (to toggle) Percent growth: Nominal diameter + [input number] %, or Absolute
growth: Nominal diameter + [input number] in.
iii. From the Options tab, click (to toggle) Plot orientation options Plot from Core-end or Plot
from Free-end. Click (to toggle) Plot style options Line or Filled area. Finally, click (to check)
Display grid, Display string diagram, and/or Display zone diagram.
iv. Click OK.
OR
5. Select File > Print... from the menu bar. Complete printing steps as previously described.
Receiving a String on Removable Media from a Manufacturer
New string information received on removable media from the manufacturer should be imported.
 To receive a string from manufacturer’s removable media
1. Import the string in String Editor.
2. If the string arrived on a shipping spool and is being transferring to a work reel, reverse the string.
3. If the string has a different segment length from the rest of the strings at the field location, change the segment
length to be the same.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Using CT Specifications
Within CT Specifications, four parameters pertaining to the CT (manufacturer, material type, diameter, and
wall (nominal)) may be altered by the user so that the software calculates the potential effects of these
changes in material properties and tubing specifications.
 To use CT Specifications
1. Select, from the String Editor menu bar, Help > CT Specs. The CT Specifications dialog appears.
Figure 243
2. Using the dropdowns in the top portion of the dialog, select from the available parameters
Manufacturer, Material type, Diameter (nominal), and Wall(nominal).
3. Observe the changes that occur in the Material Properties and Tubing Specifications as the above-described
parameters are altered.
4. Determine the coiled tubing specifications most likely to correspond to the needed CT for a particular job.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Strings
Before configuring a string, obtain a basic understanding of the manner in which Cerberus deals with strings and the
inputs required for various tasks. The following links direct the user to paragraphs that cover these topics.
1. Cerberus's View of a String
2. Required String Data
3. If configuring a used string, allow for existing fatigue
Create, configure, and delete strings using the Configuring Diameter procedure, which can be performed across
the Cerberus software suite.
NOV CTES recommends configuring strings in the following sequence:

1. Configuring Diameter
2. Configuring Length
3. Configuring Date Commissioned
4. Configuring Sections
5. Configuring Welds
6. Configuring a Cable in String Editor
During the life of a string, 'flags' can be used on all or part of the string for special attention. For example, the
user may develop concerns about particular areas with excessive corrosion or unrecorded bending cycles. Those
areas can be identified as zones.
7. Configuring Zones
If tracking string corrosion is of interest, configure corrosion calculation options.
8. Configuring Corrosion
Cerberus's View of a String
When working with String Editor, the user must have a basic understanding of how String Editor looks at a string.
The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics.
1. What is Segment Length?
2. What is Position on the String?
3. What is Derating?
___________________________________________________________________________________________
What is Segment Length?
Segment length is the smallest length of tubing for which used life (fatigue) is monitored. The smaller the
segment length, the more accurate the fatigue profile. However, smaller segment length increases the
number of calculations and the calculation time.
The default segment length of ten (10) feet (two (2) meters) should be adequate for the majority of
applications. The smallest acceptable segment length is five (5) feet, or one (1) meter.
Understanding segment length is important to performing string operations. Strings can be spliced only as
long as they have the same segment length. The segment length can be changed if there is no fatigue on the
string. To change the segment length, select Edit > Fatigue Model from String Editor.
A given job location must always use the same segment length and units to ensure strings can be spliced.
The total number of segments in a string is the string length divided by the segment length.
To set units, select Options > Units from the main Cerberus menu bar. Then use the dropdown to select
a unit set.
What is Position on the String?
A position on the string is measured from the reel core end of the string. The CT manufacturers use this
method. In a 15,000-foot string, the reel core end is at zero (0) feet, and the downhole end is at 15,000 feet.
String position should not be confused with depth, which is a relative measurement measured from the free
end of the CT and can vary, dependent on the zero-depth datum.
In general, positions are measured from the reel core end. However, positions measured from both the
reel core end and the downhole end are seen in the String Viewer.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Position 0 ft
Position 15,000 ft
What is Derating?
String life is calculated assuming plain pipe is in good condition. Welds and other physical features are
known to have a lower fatigue life than plain pipe. Cerberus takes into account this reduced life with
derating factors. Each weld is associated with a derating factor. Additional derating factors can be applied
using zones.
Derating factors change the rate at which future fatigue accumulates
A derating factor of 75% means that the fatigue life of that weld or zone is assumed to be at 75% of the base pipe. The
fatigue life of the segment containing that weld or coinciding with that zone is derated to 75% (not by 75%).
Segments containing multiple derating factors are evaluated in the following manner:
1. If the segment contains two or more welds (physically very unlikely), the worst-case derating factor is applied.
(Weld derating factors are not additive.)
2. If the segment coincides with two or more zones, both derating factors are applied in sequence. (Zone derating
factors are additive.)
3. If the segment contains a weld and coincides with a zone, the worst-case derating factor is applied.
A derating factor of 100% leaves the coiled tubing fatigue calculations unchanged. This should be used when
flagging a zone for any reason.
Required String Data
Some inputs in String Editor are required for calculations, and some are optional. Which inputs are required and
which are optional depend on what is in store for the string.
1. For tracking fatigue, the diameter, length, sections, and welds information must be configured. The user may
also want to configure zones.
2. For exporting a string to Hydra for calculating tubing forces, the diameter, length, sections, and cable (if
applicable) information must be configured.
3. For calculating hydraulics in Hydra, the diameter, length, sections, and cable (if applicable) information must
be configured.
4. A cable for string weight and volume calculations can be configured in String Editor.
5. Information regarding the string manufacturer and inspection records for welds can be entered. This
information is not used in any calculations.
To quickly mock up a string to calculate tubing forces or hydraulics, most of the default values can be used.
However, it’s recommend that all information for actual work strings be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Existing Fatigue on a Used String
When a used string is configured, existing fatigue on the string will need to be accounted for as well. The shorter used
life can be accounted for by simulating jobs, by creating zones, or by using a combination of the two methods.
If the jobs that have been run on the string are known, a typical or similar job can be created in Job Manager, then
run in Reel-Trak. The fatigue from the jobs is added to the string and future fatigue will accumulate at the normal
rate.
If the job information for the string is unknown, zones can be added to the string. This method creates no fatigue, but
increases the rate at which future fatigue accumulates.
Configuring Diameter
The diameter of a string is entered on the main String Editor screen. The diameter must be constant along the
entire length of a string.
 To enter diameter
1. Open String Editor.
2. Open the desired string.
The String Editor screen is repopulated to reflect the properties of the chosen string.
3. Select a string diameter.
All available diameters from the selected manufacturer are listed in the dropdown menu.
Configuring Length
The length of a string is entered on the main String Editor screen.
Do NOT change the length of a real string that contains fatigue data through the main screen of String Editor. To
cut a string, use the cut utility. To splice a string, use the splice utility.
When configuring a string, avoid changing the length (especially by shortening it) after sections, welds, and zones
are configured. Changing the length can lead to loss of data or other unpredictable and undesirable results.
 To enter length
The String Editor screen is repopulated to reflect the properties of the chosen string.
3. Enter the total string length in the Total Length field.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Date Commissioned
The date a string was commissioned is entered on the main String Editor display screen.
If a string is re-commissioned (the Date Commissioned field is changed), the new date is
used in corrosion level calculations, if they are enabled.
If an earlier date is entered, the next time a job is run in Reel-Trak, it calculates the additional
corrosion for the days between the original commission date and the new commission date.
If a later date is entered, the corrosion level is not reduced. Instead, Reel-Trak "waits" until
the string has been in service for as long as it was in service before it was re-commissioned.
For example, suppose a string was in service for 120 days when it’s re-commissioned. Reel-
Trak waits until 120 days after the new commission date before adding more corrosion based
on time in service. To immediately reduce the corrosion level, it can be manually reset.
 To enter the string commissioned date

The screen is repopulated with the string’s data.
3. Within the Summary screen, click the Info button
4. Input the date that the string was commissioned
Include all four digits of the year. To use the current date, click the ellipses button.
Configuring Sections
Sections are configured within the Sections area of String Editor. Entering each length of tubing as a different section
is unnecessary unless it will be used for tracking fatigue, at which point all sections must be configured for accurate
fatigue calculations.
There are two ways to configure sections.

1. Configuring Sections by Wall Size
2. Configuring Sections by Strip
What are Sections?
A section is a length of the string with a single set of physical properties, such as wall thickness and
material. Sections are configured within the Sections area of String Editor. There are two ways to configure
sections. Each wall thickness may be configured as a section, or each strip between bias welds may be
configured as a section. Although never recommended, it is technically possible to have sections with
different coiled tubing materials, too. (For this reason, Cerberus uses the general name "sections" instead of
"tapers".)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
For example, consider the following string made of six strips with three different wall thicknesses.
Free End
Weld
Weld
Weld
Weld
Weld
Core
Configuring each wall thickness as a section results in three sections.
Free End
Weld
Weld
Weld
Weld
Weld
Core
Section 1 Weld Section 2 Weld
Configuring each strip as a section results in six sections.
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6

Core End
Free End
Weld
Weld
Weld
Weld
Weld
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5

Weld Weld Weld Weld Weld
Notice that each section, except the last one, is associated with the weld at its downhole end, which
connects it to the next section. These welds are called section welds. By default, a section weld is a bias
weld, but it can be changed to an orbital butt weld (machine) or a manual butt weld. If each strip is
configured as a section, all the welds in a new string are section welds. If each wall thickness is configured
as a section, the result will be some section welds and some other welds. These other welds would be
entered on the Welds screen.
A section can have a single wall thickness, or it can have a continuous taper. For a section with a continuous
taper, both the uphole and downhole effective wall thicknesses must be entered. The section will be tapered
over the middle 80% of the section. The 10% at each end will be straight. (This matches how Quality Tubing,
Inc. manufactures continuously tapered sections.)
Cerberus does not place any restrictions on what can be welded together; however, there are
manufacturing limitations. Contact the manufacturer for string design limitations.
Entering only wall changes (tapers) as sections is the quickest and easiest way to configure a string.
Entering all strips as sections takes longer, but provides for more detailed record keeping
To set a string as “tapered,” open a string and select Options > Tapered OD from the menu bar
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Sections by Wall Size
Sections may be configured by wall size.

 To configure sections by wall size
a. Click the Sections icon on the toolbar.
b. Select Edit > Sections from the menu bar.
c. Select the Sections button in the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
2. Count the number of sections.
On the manufacturer’s specification sheet, pick out the bias welds which separate tubing with different
wall sizes. These welds are section welds and separate different sections.
3. Set the number of sections.
In the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen, find and click the Add Section icon as
needed to increase the number of sections to the appropriate number.
4. Input the properties for Section 1.
Section 1 starts at the reel core.
Items that apply only to strips can be left blank, or values from any strip can be entered in the section.
5. To edit/input Manufacturer Data, click the Manufacturer Data button at the bottom of the Section Properties
portion of the Sections screen.
6. Advance to the next section.
To advance to the next section, use the arrows in the upper right-hand portion of the display screen or
click within the appropriate section in the diagram located in the midsection of the Sections screen. Input
the Section Properties.
7. Repeat the input of properties for each section. It is not necessary to enter the end position, length, or weld type for the
last section.
8. To delete a section, click the Delete icon on the toolbar or on the left-hand portion of the screen (Sections
button).
9. To save the string, select File > Save (or Save As) from the menu bar.
10. Add the remaining welds on the manufacturer’s specification sheet
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Sections by Strip
Sections may also be configured by strip.

 To enter each strip as a section
a. Click the Sections icon on the toolbar.
b. Select Edit > Sections from the menu bar.

c. Select the Sections button in the left-hand portion of the String Editor displayscreen.
2. Set the number of sections by increasing the number of sections to reflect the number of strips.
In the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen, find and click the Add Section icon as
needed to increase the number of sections (strips) to the appropriate number.
3. Input the properties for the first section (strip)

The first section starts at the reel core.
4. To edit/input Manufacturer Data for this strip, click the Manufacturer Data button at the bottom of the
Section Properties portion of the Sections screen.
5. Advance to the next section.

To advance to the next section, use the arrows or click within the appropriate section in the diagram located
in the midsection of the Sections screen. Input the Section Properties.
6. Repeat the input of properties for each section. It is not necessary to enter the end position, length, or weld
type for the last section.
7. To delete a section (strip), click the Delete icon on the toolbar or on the left-hand portion of the
screen (Sections button).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Notes on Wall Reduction
The wall reduction factor is a string property used by Cerberus to compensate for the effects of acid and
other damaging environments during a job. When a job is configured in Job Manager, the wall reduction is
specified in the job type screen. The wall reduction is cumulative, so each job (that doesn't have zero wall
reduction) contributes to the total wall reduction. The wall reduction is then subtracted from the minimum
wall size to yield the effective wall size, which is used in calculations.
The wall reduction in String Editor can be viewed, but not changed.
Wall reduction is calculated using the same value along the entire length of the string. It is shown on the
Sections screen so that the effective wall size can be seen. Wall reduction is calculated from the job type
in Job Manager and the wall reduction option in Reel-Trak.
 To view wall reduction

1. Click Sections on thetoolbar
The Sections screen appears, with Section Properties displayed on the right-hand side of the display screen.
The wall reduction value appears within the Wall size properties.
Notes on Material
When the Achilles 5.0 model is selected (see Editing the Fatigue Model Parameters), the material selected
within the Sections button must be a supported material.
Click the button next to the Material field ( ) to see material information. This button is visible only
when a string is defined as Achilles 5 and a weld material file exists for the specific material.
Figure 244
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Welds
Add welds, edit welds, and delete welds within the Welds area of String Editor. The string must be unlocked in order
to add or remove welds. All non-section welds need to be entered in the string for fatigue calculations. Each weld
may be a bias weld, orbital butt weld (machine), or manual butt weld.
Because welds are weaker than base pipe, each weld has a derating factor. String Editor provides recommended
derating factors. These default derating factors depend on the type of weld (manual butt, orbital butt, or bias), as
well as whether or not the weld joins different wall thicknesses.
Adding a Weld
 To add a weld
a. Click the Welds icon on the toolbar.
b. Select Edit > Welds from the menu bar.

c. Select the Welds button in the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
If the sections are configured, the section welds already appear in the list in the right-hand portion of
the screen and on the string diagram in the mid-section of the screen.
The welds are color-coded: red for Manual butt weld, blue for Orbital (CM) butt weld, and green for
Bias.
Figure 245
2. Click the Add Weld icon.
3. Enter the Position of weld from the reel core end.

4. Select, from the dropdown, the Weld Type.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Weld types are bias weld, orbital butt weld, or manual butt weld.
See Notes on Material regarding the appearance of the icon adjacent to the
Weld Type field.
The new weld appears in the weld list and a color-coded line appears on the string diagram.
Editing a Weld
Welds in strings are editable.
To edit the position of a section weld, the sections must be reconfigured.
 To edit a weld

2. From the list in the right-hand portion of the display screen available from the Welds screen, select the weld
to edit.
3. Edit the Weld Properties as desired
The values for the Weld Position, the Weld Type, and the Derating factor can be changed
The Weld Type for a section weld cannot be changed.
When Achilles model 5 is selected and a Bias weld model is available for the selected material, the
derating factor cannot be edited, but is instead calculated based on the model.
Deleting a Weld
Welds can be deleted (removed) from the string, as well.

 To delete a weld

2. From the list in the right-hand portion of the display screen available from the Welds screen, select the weld
to delete. Section welds cannot be deleted.
3. Click the Delete icon on the toolbar or on the left-hand portion of the screen (Welds button).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring a Cable in String Editor
If a cable is installed in the string, it should be configured. The cable information is used in Hydra calculations of flow
rate and frictional pressure drop. It is also used for string weight and string volume as well as calculations in Hydra.
For information about the NOV CTES cable injector, which can install cable with the string on the reel,
please Contact Us
 To configure cable information

1. Select the Summary button in the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
2. Click (to check) Cable Installed .

3. Input the cable information.
This information includes the Cable type, Weight per length, Cable diameter, Date installed, and a checkbox
to indicate the cable is H2S rated.
Configuring Zones
Zones are configured within the Zones screen of the String Editor display screen. Typically, zones are added to a used
string; not a new string. Zones are created due to concerns for a part of a string that has suffered from excessive
corrosion, damage that needs to be flagged, or because the used life of that portion needs to be changed.
What are Zones?
Zones are used to flag parts of the string that need to be watched, such as areas of corrosion or damage.
Zones can also be derated if they have an uncertain fatigue history or if it is believed the life will be shorter for
some reason.
Entering a derating factor other than 100% will change the used life of the zone for all subsequent
calculations. Choosing a factor other than 100% is highly subjective and should be used with care.
The derating factor can be left at 100% to simply track the zone without affecting its used life. To change the
used life, change the derating factor. A derating factor of 75% means that the fatigue life of that zone is assumed
to be at 75% of the base pipe.
 To view existing zones in String Editor
1. Select the Fatigue icon in the toolbar
a. If zones exist and the plot option Display effective zones in the string diagram is selected, observe the
shading in the Derate Zones area at screen-bottom.
OR
b. Complete one of the following:
i. Click Zones on the toolbar.

ii. Select Edit > Zones from the menu bar.
iii. Select the Zones button in the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
2. If zones exist, observe their diagrams (in vertical orientation) just to the left of the string diagram. Select a
zone to see its related information in the Zones (right-hand) area of the display screen.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Adding a Zone
The following procedure describes how to add a zone to a string.

 To add a zone
1. Select a string.
If the string is locked, unlock it.
c. Click Zones on the toolbar.

d. Select Edit > Zones from the menu bar.
e. Select the Zones button in the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
3. Click the Add button in the top of the right-hand portion of the display screen.
If no zones existed previously, various fields become available in which to input parameters. If a zone or
zones existed previously, the Current zone number is incremented to accommodate the new zone.
4. Input the positions for the zone
The Start position (Core end) and End position (free end) of the zone are measured from the reel core
end.
The zone diagram (to the left of the string diagram) depicts the new zone.
5. Enter a derating factor.
Leave the Derate zone to field at 100% to flag the zone without affecting fatigue life.
6. Select from the dropdown, or input, a reason for derating.
Removing a Zone
 To remove a zone
1. Access the Zones area as described in Adding a Zone, above.
2. Select the zone by clicking it in the zone diagram, or by clicking the up-or-down arrows associated with the
Current zone field.
3. Click the Remove button in the top of the right-hand portion of the display screen.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Corrosion
Track corrosion levels for a string using a simple corrosion calculation. To track corrosion, the corrosion settings must
be specified for each string on the Corrosion screen. The corrosion level is then increased accordingly when a job is
run in Reel-Trak. The corrosion level can also be reset manually.
The suggested corrosion derating factors have not been validated experimentally
About the Suggested Corrosion Derating Factors
Although the suggested corrosion derating factors are not based on experimental data, they have been based
on some general assumptions. The suggested corrosion derating factors provide the following results:
1. If a string remains in the yard without performing any jobs, after its first year the corrosion level would be
27%, based on time alone. After the second year, it would be 63%.
2. If a string performed 50 (fifty) acid jobs (in wells without any H2S or CO2), its corrosion level would be
50%, not including how long the string has been in service.
3. If a string performed 50 (fifty) jobs in wells that contained either H2S or CO2, its corrosion level would be
100%, not including the presence of acid or how long the string has been in service.
Entering Corrosion Settings for a String
Corrosion settings for strings are entered in the Corrosion portion of the string. The following procedure
outlines how to enter these settings.
The corrosion calculations can be changed at any time in a string's life. Different strings can also have
different corrosion calculations. However, NOV CTES recommends using the same settings for all strings
to avoid confusion.
 To enter corrosion settings

1. Select a string
2. Select Edit > Corrosion from the menu bar.
OR
3. Click Corrosion on the toolbar.
Corrosion information appears in the right-hand portion of the String Editor.
4. Click (to check) the Use Wall Reduction Method and/or the Use String Life Reduction Method
checkbox.
If the Use String Life Reduction Method option is checked, various parameters become available.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Select the string life options checkboxes.
The options affect how the string life is calculated.
f. To adjust the string’s Time in Service, click (to check) the associated checkbox. Then, input a
percentage to Decrease string life by for every 30 days elapsed, starting from [click up/down arrows
to select] days after string is commissioned. Finally, input the Commission Date.
g. To decrease string life by a specified percentage according to job type:
i. Click (to check) Decrease string life by [input percentage] % for [click to toggle]
every acid job or every job. There is a new option to apply this corrosion to the entire string, or
just the portion of the string that enters the well.
ii. Click (to check) Decrease string life by [input percentage] % if well has H2S.
iii. Click (to check) Decrease string life by [input percentage] % if well has CO2.
iv. H2S and CO2 corrosion will always only be applied to the portion of the string that enters the
well.
6. Click Set as New Default to make the current settings the default settings for new strings.
7. Click Restore Cerberus Defaults to return to the original default corrosion settings.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
String Utilities
String Editor has several string utilities. The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in depth.
1. String Weight
2. String Volume
3. Estimating Remaining Trips
String Weight
Based on the geometry of the string, the string weight, excluding the reel, can be estimated. The estimate takes
into account the wall thickness of tapered sections. The weight of the string while empty and while water-filled can
be viewed. The weight of the cable, if there is a cable installed, can be taken in account as well.
 To estimate string weight
a. Click Weight on the toolbar.
b. Select Utilities > Weight from the menu bar.

c. In the left-hand portion of the String Editor, select the Utilities button; then click Weight
String Weight information appears in the right-hand portion of the display screen.
The screen displays the total string weight when Empty, and when Water-filled, excluding the reel.
2. Select a value for the amount of water in the cable.
The user may use the up-and-down arrows associated with the Weight with Fluid to adjust the percent full
amount, which, accordingly, adjusts the weight calculation.
3. Click the Select Fluid button to display the Select a Fluid dialog.
Figure 246 - Select a Fluid Dialog
___________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Use the Recent Selections dropdown to select from recent fluid selections.
b. Click the Show Orphans button to show all fluid selections, including orphans.
c. To search, select the Column to Search from the dropdown, and input search parameters in the field
below. Here, the asterisk after the field indicates a “wildcard” search, so limited input can achieve a
variety of results. Finally, click the Search button.
d. Select the desired fluid for use and click OK.
4. (Optional) Click the Include weight of cable checkbox.
The weight of the cable is included in the total weight calculations and the values in the screen are reconfigured
accordingly.
This checkbox is available only if the Cable installed box is clicked and Weight information is entered in
the Summary portion of the String Editor. See String Summary for more information
String Volume
The volume the string can hold is estimated based on the nominal wall size and for the minimum wall size. The volume
calculation can also take into account the cable volume (if one is installed) and wall reduction.
 To estimate string volume
a. Click Volume on the toolbar.
b. Select Utilities > Volume from the menu bar.

String Volume information appears in the right-hand portion of the display screen.
2. Select the Capacity options. The capacity options include:
a. Use nominal wall - Bases the calculations on the nominal wall thickness.
b. Use minimum wall - Bases the calculations on the minimum wall thickness.
c. Apply wall reduction - Includes a reduction for previous jobs run using this string.
d. Subtract cable volume - Includes the volume required by a cable, if present.
The Capacity and Displacement values are recalculated accordingly when the above options are selected/de-
selected.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Estimating Remaining Trips
The number of trips in and out of the hole remaining on the string can be estimated based on the current maximum
fatigue.
Use this estimate as a rough guide only. The estimate is based on a single set of conditions.
Actual field conditions will produce a different amount of fatigue
 To estimate the remaining trips on a string

1. Select Utilities > Estimate Remaining Trips... from the menu bar. The Estimate Remaining Trips dialog box
appears.
2. Enter the Reel Diameter, Arch Radius, and Pressure for the trips.
3. Click (to toggle) either Coiled Tubing Depth (and input Start and End information) or Working Depth.
Click the question-mark icons to learn more about Coiled Tubing Depth and Working Depth
4. (Optional) Click (to check) Apply Application Factor. See Default String Options for additional information.
5. Click Estimate Trips.
The estimated number of remaining trips for the string is displayed, based on 80% fatigue life safety limit.
6. Input the Number (No) of Trips and click Estimate Fatigue Limit to estimate the fatigue limit.
7. Click Close.
The Estimate Remaining Trips dialog is closed and the user is returned to the main String Editor display screen.
Figure 247 - Estimate Remaining Trips
___________________________________________________________________________________________
String Services
Cerberus organizes the reversing, cutting, or splicing of strings into “services.”
When a string is reversed, cut, or spliced, that information is noted in String Editor. The following links point to
paragraphs that cover each topic in more detail.
1. Reversing a String
2. Cutting a String
3. Splicing Strings
String services can be performed from the main Cerberus Project window when a project is selected, but
not open in Reel-Trak.
This option is available if it is turned on. Turn on the String Services option by selecting Options >
Cerberus Setup and click (to check) Display CT Services Control Panel on the General tab.
When a project is open in Reel-Trak, String Services are disabled in the main Cerberus Project window, but
are available in the Job Setup screen of Reel-Trak if the job is not locked or executed.
Reversing a String
It is important to reverse the string in String Editor whenever the string is transferred to a different reel. For example, if
the string arrives on a shipping spool and is transferred to a work reel, the string needs to be reversed. A string may also
need to be reversed before splicing it to another string.
To include the associated fatigue to the string, Cerberus calculates fatigue for two bending events: unwrapping from
the source reel and wrapping around the destination reel. Both bending events occur at zero pressure, and Cerberus
calculates the bending radius for each event from the wraps of the string around the reel.
The tubing manufacturers configure a string according to the way it is shipped out of the factory. If the
string arrives on a shipping spool and is transferred to a work reel, the string will need to be reversed.
Before transferring a string to a new spool, the reel's capacity can be estimated to see if the string will fit
on it.
 To reverse a string
1. Select a string.
a. From the Services screen, selected from the left-hand button on the String Editor display screen, select
Reverse String .
b. From the menu bar, select Edit > Reverse.
c. From the toolbar, click Reverse
The Reverse String information appears in the right-hand portion of String Editor.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Select a spooling option:
a. To reverse the string without recording the associated fatigue, click (to toggle) the Spooling Option
Reverse Only.
b. To reverse the string and calculate fatigue, click (to toggle) Reel-to-Reel Spooling Operation.
If Reel-to-Reel Spooling Operation is selected, enter the dimensions of the source reel and of the destination
reel. The user can also click the reel icons to select reels configured in Reel Editor.
4. Click Reverse
String Editor reverses the string and notes the event (including whether fatigue was calculated and the user’s
login name) in the string history log.
Cutting a String
The string can be cut using the Cut String service, as follows:
1. Cut off tubing from the free (downhole) end. This is done as part of routine maintenance.
2. Cut out tubing in the middle of the string. This is done to remove a damaged or highly fatigued portion of the
string.
3. Cut string into two separate strings. This is done when cutting off part of a string and splicing it onto a different
string, or to divide a long string shipped on a single spool from the manufacturer into two work strings.
Cutting Off the End of a String
Tubing is cut from the free (downhole) end of a string as part of routine maintenance.
 To cut tubing from the free end of the string
1. Select a string.
a. Click Cut on the toolbar.
b. Select Edit > Cut from the menu bar.

c. Select the Services button from the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen; then click the
Cut String icon.
3. Click (to toggle) Cut and discard off free end of string (downhole).
4. Input the amount to cut.
5. Click the Cut button
A warning dialog box appears to confirm cutting the string.
6. Click Yes to confirm cutting.
String Editor cuts the string and notes the event and the user’s login name in the history log for the string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cutting a String in the Middle
To remove a damaged or highly fatigued portion of the string, the string is cut somewhere in the middle
and the ends rejoined.
 To cut a string in the middle
1. Select a string.

Cut String icon.
3. Click (to toggle) Cut and discard from middle of string.
4. Input the beginning position of the cut From the reel-core end, in a multiple of the segment length.
5. Input the end position of the cut from the reel-core end (To), in a multiple of the segment length.
6. Click (to toggle) the type of weld used to rejoin the string. The options are Manual or Orbital.
7. Enter a Derating factor for the weld, or accept the default.
8. Click the Cut button.
A warning box appears to confirm cutting the string.
9. Click Yes to confirm the cut.
String Editor cuts the string and notes the event and the user’s login name in the historylog for the string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Cutting a String and Saving Both Parts as Separate Strings
To divide a long string shipped on a single spool from the manufacturer into two work strings, the string is cut
and both parts saved.
on it.
 To cut a string and save both parts as separate strings

1. Select a string.

Cut String icon.
3. Click (to toggle) Cut string and save as two separate strings.
4. Input the position of the cut (Cut at).
5. Click the String 1-associated Save As... button to save the new first string. The String Description dialog
appears.
6. (Optional) Enter a description for the new first string (or use the default existing-string name for the first
string).
(Optional) Click the Show Existing... button to view existing strings.
Names can be a maximum of 32 characters, including letters, numbers, and spaces.
7. Click OK.
8. Click the String 2-associated Save As... button to save the new second string.
The String Description dialog appears.
9. Enter a description for the new second string.
Names can be a maximum of 32 characters, including letters, numbers, and spaces.
10. Click the Cut button.
A warning box appears to confirm the cutting of the string.
11. Click Yes to confirm cutting.
String Editor cuts the string and notes the event and the login name in the history log.
If the new string is put on a different reel, reverse it. (The downhole end becomes the reel core end).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Splicing Strings
Within String Editor, the splicing service joins two strings to create one new string. After the two strings are spliced
together, three strings exist in String Editor: the two original strings and the third, spliced string. The two original
string files can be archived.
When String Editor splices strings, it joins the free end of the main string to the core end of the second string. The
second string may need to be reversed, depending on the ends being joined. The second string will not need to be
reversed if it is transferred to a new reel, spliced, then spooled onto the main reel.
There is no need to reverse the second string if it is spliced to the main string and spooled onto the main reel.
500 ft 0 ft 600 ft
Strings can be spliced in several ways. The following links point to paragraphs that cover these ways in more detail.
1. Adding New Pipe to the End of a String
2. Adding New Pipe to the Middle of a String
3. Splicing Strings End to End
4. Splicing a String into the Middle of Another String
Only strings that are compatible with each other can be spliced.
on it.
Compatibility Requirements for Splicing Strings
Only compatible strings can be spliced together. In order to be compatible, both strings must be active (not archived) and
must have the same values for the following items:
1. units system
2. fatigue model
3. diameter
4. segment length
Adding New Pipe to the End of a String
When new pipe is added to the end of a string, the string stays on its reel and the new pipe gets spooled over
it. One field weld is created where the new pipe is joined.
The new pipe will not have any fatigue damage. However, used pipe with fatigue can be spliced onto an
existing string
To ensure the spliced string will fit on the reel, the reel’s capacity can be estimated.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To add new pipe to the end of a string
1. Select a string.
2. If the string is locked, unlock it
a. Click Splice on the toolbar.

b. Select Edit > Splice from the menu bar.
c. Select the Services button from the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen; then click
the Splice String icon.
4. Click (to toggle) Add New Pipe on the right-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
The screen is repopulated to show the New Pipe Properties section.
5. Input the Splice Position in the current string.
6. Input the properties of the new pipe. The properties include:
a. Length of New Pipe (must be a multiple of the segment length)
b. CT Diameter
c. Material
d. Nominal wall thickness
7. Within the Uphole Weld section of the display screen, select, from the dropdown, the Weld type.
8. Weld types include Manual and Orbital.
9. Input the Derating Factor.
10. Click the Splice button.
A warning dialog box appears to confirm the splice.
11. Click Yes to confirm splicing.
String Editor splices the new pipe onto the string and notes the event and the user’s login name in the
history log for the string.
Adding New Pipe to the Middle of a String
When pipe is added to the middle of a string, the string is cut in two and the new pipe is welded in
between. Two field welds are created, one on each end of the new pipe.
The new pipe will not have any fatigue damage. Splice in an existing string when adding used pipe
with fatigue.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To add new pipe to the middle of a string
1. Select a string.
2. If the string is locked, unlock it.

c. Select the Services button from the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen;
then click the Splice String icon.
4. Click (to toggle) Add New Pipe on the right-hand portion of the String Editor display screen. The
screen is repopulated to show the New Pipe Properties section.
5. Input the Splice Position in the current string.

The splice position must be less than the length of the string.
6. Input the properties of the new pipe.
The properties include:
a. Length of New Pipe (must be a multiple of the segment length)

b. CT Diameter
c. Material
d. Nominal wall thickness
Weld types include Manual and Orbital.
8. Within the Downhole Weld section of the display screen, select, from the dropdown, the Weld type.
9. Input the Derating Factor for each weld type.
12. String Editor splices the new pipe onto the string and notes the event and the user’s login name in the
history log for the string.
Splicing Strings End to End
When strings are spliced end to end, the main string stays on its reel, and the second string is spooled over it. One field
weld is created where the two strings are joined.
ensure the spliced string will fit on the reel, the reel’s capacity can be estimated.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
To splice a string to the end of another string
1. If the core end of the SECONDARY string will become the free end of the spliced string, reverse
the SECONDARY string.
2. Open the MAIN string:
a. Select a string.

c. Select the Services button from the left-hand portion of the String Editor display
screen; then click the Splice String icon.
4. Click (to toggle) Add Existing String.
The screen is repopulated with the Existing String Properties section.
5. Click Select... to select the second string.
The Select String dialog appears, listing all available strings.
6. Select the desired string.
7. Click OK.
11. Click Yes to overwrite the existing MAIN string, or click No to create a new string via the New
dialog.
12. If No was clicked in the step above, input the New string name.
String Editor splices the strings together and notes the event and the user’s login name in the history
log of the new string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Splicing a String into the Middle of Another String
When a string is spliced into the middle of another string, the main string is cut in two and the second string
is welded between the ends. Two field welds are created, one at each end of the second string
 To Splice a String in the Middle

1. If the SECONDARY string is reversed during the splicing process, reverse the SECONDARY string.
2. Open the MAIN string.
a. Select a string.

c. Select the Services button from the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen; then
click the Splice String icon.
4. Input the Splice Position of the first-string insertion point for the second string.
5. Click Select... to select the second string.
The Select String dialog appears, listing all available strings.
6. Select the desired string.
7. Click OK.
9. Within the Downhole Weld section of the display screen, select, from the dropdown, the Weld type.
A warning dialog box appears to confirm splicing the two strings.
13. To overwrite the existing string (default), click Yes. To create a new string name, click No.
String Editor splices the strings together and notes the event and the user’s login name in the history
log of the string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
String History
String history shows a history of the most important events that has happened to a string, and what jobs the string has
performed. A user name is also associated with each event.
To open the String History display screen, click History on the toolbar or select View > History Log
from the menu bar.
The data that was stored in the comments column prior to Cerberus v11.0 are now stored in the columns String
Max Fatigue, Running Feet Added, Fatigue Depth, and Fatigue Added.
 To use the column-related functionalities available in String History
1. Modify the comment for an action in the String History grid without losing the information
recorded. The information stored in these columns is read-only.
Figure 248
2. Right-click the History grid to access the context-menu options:

a. Show/Hide Columns.
b. Show Fatigue Profile. Select this option to be redirected to the String History Timeline.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Undoing String Events
Events in a string’s history can be undone. When a job is run, a string cut, or other events performed, Cerberus
automatically makes a backup of the string before performing the action. When the user performs an ‘undo’ to the string,
Cerberus retrieves the backup and replaces the current string with the backup.
An “undo-able” row must be selected in order for the Undo option to be enabled.
A user cannot selectively undo an event in the middle of the string history. When the user performs
an undo to an event, events that occur afterward will also be undone. Once a series of events
has been undone, they cannot be redone. If the user is unsure whether to perform the task, the
string can be saved with a new name first
If the user wishes to selectively remove an event from the middle of the string history, use the
String Timeline on the Fatigue graph instead of the history grid.
 To undo string events

3. Click History on the toolbar.

The string History shows a history of the most important events that have happened to a string, and what
jobs the string has performed. A user is also associated with each event. There are rows for each event related
to the string (creating, locking, unlocking, jobs run, cutting, reversing, and so forth). Events in red can be
undone.
4. Select the desired event to undo.
Select any column in the row for the event to undo; the Undo button is enabled.
5. Click the Undo button.
String Fatigue
Fatigue is viewed in the String Editor similarly to the way it is viewed in Reel-Trak (see Tracking Fatigue), but with
the differences described below.
Editing the Fatigue Model Parameters
If fatigue modeling capabilities are included in the user license, certain fatigue-model parameters may be specified in
order to enhance modeling accuracy.
 To edit fatigue-model parameters
1. Select Edit > Fatigue Model from the String Editor menu bar.
Most values in the Fatigue Model area cannot be changed if the string has fatigue
2. Edit available parameters using manual input or available dropdowns.

a. Among other parameters, the user has the opportunity to select (from the dropdown) the
3. Fatigue Model: Achilles 3.0 (1999); Achilles 4.0 (2003); Achilles 5.0 (Linear).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
For more information about selecting a fatigue model, please see the appendix entitled Coiled Tubing
Fatigue Models
Viewing and Using the String Fatigue Display
 To view the string fatigue display

a. Click the Fatigue icon on the toolbar.
b. Select View > Fatigue Profile from the menu bar.
i. Select the Fatigue button in the left-hand portion of the String Editor display screen.
Figure 249
2. From the top right-hand View field, choose (from the dropdown) Used Life or Diameter.
a. When Used Life is chosen, the user sees:
i. Used Life (%) diagram. In the diagram, plot orientation may be shown measured from
the core end or from the free end of the string. To select either of these options, select
Options > Plot Orientation and click (to check) the desired orientation.
ii. String Diagram - This diagram shows the diameter, wall thickness, material, and welds
on the string. Click close to a weld and hold the mouse button down to see the weld’s
position, type, and derating factor.
The positions in the string diagram are measured from the core end of the string, as they
were entered. The depth in the depth diagram comes from the depth information in the job
log, and is unrelated to position.
The string diagram prints exactly as it appears on the screen.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3. String History Timeline - String Editor’s fatigue diagram. This is a graphical representation of the string’s
history (without the lock and unlock actions).
Do not confuse the String History Timeline with the String History display. See String History for additional
information
1. When Diameter is chosen, the user sees:

a. The Diameter diagram, which gives a graphical representation of the diametrical growth of the
pipe. In the diagram, plot orientation may be shown measured from
2. the core end or from the free end of the string. To select either of these options, select
3. Options > Plot Orientation and click (to check) the desired orientation.
a. The String Diagram and the String History Timeline are also shown, as described above.
Table 23
To … Do This …
Zoom in on an area Click and drag a rectangle around the area.
Adjust the fatigue scale. Right-click the diagram and select a scale
Zoom back out. Right-click the diagram and select Zoom Out
Select Options in the menu bar; then choose from among

Access additional graphic options.
the options available
 To use the string fatigue display

1. Annotations, or markups, may be added to either the Used Life fatigue diagram or the Diameter diagram. The
supported annotation types are as follows:
a. Text: Text annotations display text on the Fatigue diagram.
b. Highlighter: Highlighter annotations place a shape (rectangle or ellipse) on the Fatigue
diagram with an opacity default of 0.5 (or 50%).
c. Shape: Shape annotations are similar to the Highlighter but they are not filled by default. Their
line thickness is set to 2 for easier manipulation on the Fatigue diagram.
d. Pointer: A Pointer annotation places an arrow on the Fatigue diagram that can be manipulated by
the user. The arrowhead can be left open or closed (and filled).
e. Notes: A Note annotation places a small notepad image on the fatigue diagram for users to add extra
information to the annotation that is not displayed on the diagram. This additional information can
optionally be included in string printouts or reports.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To add annotations to the diagram
i. Click one of the buttons on the right-hand side of the fatigue diagram.
OR
ii. Right-click the fatigue diagram and click Add Annotation.
iii. Select the annotation type desired
The Fatigue Diagram: Annotations dialog appears
iv. The user may alter many of the characteristics of an annotation (including the
Annotation Type) from the annotations dialog.
Figure 250
v. To specify that the annotation appears in relation to a specific position on the String
History Timeline only, click (to toggle) Selected Job.
An annotation’s text may change based on the selected historic action type (Job, Cut, Splice, Reverse).
The text also changes to Current Job within Reel-Trak.
vi. To specify that the annotation always appears on the diagram, without regard to its
position in relation to the String History Timeline, click (to toggle) Always Shown.
Annotations are plot-type specific (Used Life, Diameter, and so forth).
 To interact with the annotations already input in the diagram
2. The information input in the Notes field is displayed as a tooltip when the mouse is hovered over the
annotation.
3. Left-click and hold the mouse button on an annotation to drag the annotation anywhere on the diagram.
4. Right-click an annotation to Bring to Front, Send to Back, Edit, or Delete the selected annotation.
 To print annotations
5. Select File > Print from the String Editor menu bar. Then, click (to check) Print Annotations on Graph(s) and/or
Print Annotation Notes.
6. As mentioned above, the String History Timeline is a graphical representation of the string’s history (without the
lock and unlock actions)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To use the String History Timeline
a. If the string’s backup file is available, hold the mouse over an event on the String History
Timeline to display that action’s incremental fatigue information in gray on the Used Life
fatigue plot.
The string’s backup file is unavailable when it is imported from Cerberus v10.5 or previous (after-the-fact),
or when it is created as a Save As file with the Save Criteria Save Without Historical Data selected.
The string’s backup file is available when data is obtained directly in real time or when a Save As file is
created with the Historical Data option selected. This backup file is created automatically in v11.0 or
greater.
b. Any of the following user actions allow string history events to be changed in the specified
manner to correct user errors without manually re-running the entire history. Fatigue is recalculated
when one of the following actions is taken:
i. Right-click an item on the String History Timeline and select Insert Existing Job,
Insert New Cut, Insert New Splice, Insert New Reverse, Remove, or Undo.
ii. Right-click an item on the String History Timeline and select Remove. This action
allows string history events to be deleted to correct user errors without manually re-
running the entire history.
iii. Drag and drop an item on the String History Timeline to a new location on the
timeline. This action allows string history events to be reordered to correct user errors
without manually re-running the entire history.
The String History Timeline checks the historic actions of the string to determine if items can be
automatically recalculated if a change is made. If the item can be automatically recalculated, the line
between items becomes blue. If items cannot be automatically recalculated, then the line becomes gray.
c. The following items prevent automatic recalculation:
i. String backup file missing
ii. Job database missing
iii. Reel database used on the job missing
iv. Splice with existing string
v. Cut string and save as two separate strings
vi. The Cut, String or Reverse action does not have enough information to recreate
During the recalculation process (either manual or automatic), a dialog is displayed listing the actions that
need to be recalculated. Manual recalculation requires the user to manually recreate each item in the list.
NOV CTES advises the user to save and/or print the list for reference.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 251
Making String Modifications after Calculating Fatigue
Circumstances may occasionally require fundamental changes to a string’s design – even after the fatigue on the
string has been calculated in Reel-Trak (see Tracking Fatigue) and the string has been locked.
In these circumstances, String Editor allows the string design to be modified and the fatigue to be automatically
recalculated – IF the string backups and all of the related jobs are available.
When using this Edit and Recalculate functionality, the string is first unlocked and is restored to its initial state. Then,
the user can alter any facet of a string’s design (such as sections, material, or fatigue model). After the changes are
complete, a complete recalculation (in Reel-Trak) of the string’s fatigue history may be initiated by the user.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To modify a string and recalculate fatigue
1. Open a locked string in String Editor.
2. Ensure that all the lines connecting jobs on the String History Timeline are blue. (See To use the String
History Timeline for more information about string backup availability and recalculation potential.)
Figure 252
3. From the String Editor menu bar, select Edit > Edit string for fatigue recalculation. This selection is only
available if the string is eligible for edit and recalculation.
A “warning” popup appears, indicating that this action cannot be undone, and requesting a
Yes/No response to the question “Do you want to continue?”.
Figure 253
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If the user continues the process (by clicking Yes), the String Editor dialog displays the string as
unlocked and ready to edit. A Recalculate Fatigue button appears in the left-hand portion of the String
Editor.
5. Make changes to any or all of the string-design elements.
6. Click the Recalculate Fatigue button.
The fatigue on the string recalculates. A String History Changes dialog appears, showing the automatic
recalculations.
a. Click Save to File to save a text document with all of the actions performed on the string
history (this is only needed if there is a failure of some kind).
7. Click the Fatigue button to see the String Editor’s recalculated string diagram and history timeline. Note
that the String History Timeline still contains all of the jobs in the order in which they were originally
executed.
Making Job Modifications after Calculating Fatigue
The user may change a job already in the string history and recalculate the fatigue.
 To modify a job and recalculate fatigue

1. Right-click the job (in the String History Timeline) to modify.
2. Select Edit Job and Recalculate.
A “warning” popup appears, indicating that this action cannot be undone, and requesting a
Yes/No response to the question “Do you want to continue?”.
Figure 254
3. If the user continues the process (by clicking Yes), Reel-Trak is displayed, and the user has the ability
to edit any portion of the job except the string.
4. Make changes to any or all of the string-design elements.
5. Save the changes and exit Reel-Trak.
The fatigue on the string recalculates from the selected job going forward. A String History Changes
dialog appears, showing the automatic recalculations.
a. Click Save to File to save a text document with all of the actions performed on the string history.
(This action is needed only if a failure of some kind occurs.)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Troubleshooting in String Editor

I cannot make any changes to a The string may be locked Try unlocking the string.
string
I can't change the segment length or The segment length or fatigue model for a Check to see if the string has any
fatigue model for a string. string with fatigue cannot be changed fatigue, or undo all history to remove the
fatigue and the segment length can be
changed
I can't splice two strings together String Editor only allows strings with the Check to the diameter, segment length,
same diameter, segment length, units, and units, and fatigue model for both strings
fatigue model to be spliced
I don't see a string in the list that I The string may be archived Try showing archived strings on the
know should be there String Open dialog
I get the error message "The string The string database file may have been This string cannot be recovered. Click
file doesn't exist." when I try to open incorrectly deleted from the hard drive Yes to remove the entry from String
a string Editor
using File Manager or Windows Explorer.
The fatigue on the string seems very If the string has performed many acid or Check the wall reduction for the string
high sand cleanout jobs, the wall reduction may
be unrealistically large.
Since the wall thickness is so thin, fatigue
accumulates on the string much more
quickly. Also, if the string has performed
high pressure jobs, the diameter may be
increasing significantly, which also will
accelerate the rate of fatigue accumulation
___________________________________________________________________________________________
11 | Using the Tool String Editor
Chapter 11
Using the Tool String Editor
As the tool string configuration utility for Cerberus, the Tool String Editor provides the ability to create, edit, and
manage tool strings. The Tool String Editor is used by Hydra, Orpheus, Solids Cleanout, and, optionally, CT Fatigue.
Starting the Tool String Editor

 To start the Tool String Editor
1. Select the Editors menu-bar item
2. Select Tool String Editor
OR
3. Launch the Tool String Editor from any other Cerberus application where tool strings are used.
A screen similar to the following appears, from which one may select an existing tool string from the available
list, or click New to create a new tool string.
Figure 255 - Select a Tool String
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Navigating the Tool String Editor
The Tool String Editor window is divided into two primary functional areas:
1. Toolbox
2. Toolstring
Toolbox Area
Toolstring Area
Figure 256
Toolbox Area
The Toolbox Area contains two tabs, the Toolbox tab and the Tool Search tab, that are useful for organizing or
searching for tools, creating and managing toolboxes, and selecting tools to insert into the tool string.
Figure 257 - Toolbox Tab
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Toolbox tab is the access point for creating tools, for organizing toolboxes, and for grouping tools with the
purpose of locating and inserting them into a tool string.
The following Help display is accessed by clicking the question mark associated with the Group Tools By
area.
Figure 258
Figure 259 - Tool Search Tab
Similar to the Toolbox tab, the Tool Search tab is used to search for, to locate, and to insert a particular tool into a tool
string.
Tool String Area
The Tool String Area, comprised of the display-screen area not previously described, is used to edit the tool string, to
display tool properties, to edit tools within the tool string, and to render a schematic and picture of the tool string.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 260 - Tool String Area
The Tool String tab shows a selection of properties related to the tools included in the current tool string.
Figure 261 - Tool String Tab
The Properties & Features tab shows the tool properties.
Figure 262 - Properties & Features Tab
Within the Cerberus Tool String Editor tool bar, the tool string’s total length, total weight, and maximum
O.D. are displayed.
Working with Toolboxes
Toolboxes contain individual tools that, once defined and saved, can be inserted into many different tool strings.
Toolboxes can be created, and tools can be copied to, and removed from, any toolbox.
By default, tools are grouped only by the toolbox in which they are located. In the figure below, the DEFTOOLS
toolbox is expanded to list the individual tools it contains, and the Ball valve tool is selected. A subset of the
properties pertaining to the selected tool, as well as a picture associated with the tool, are displayed in the bottom
left portion of the Toolbox tab.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 263 - DEFTOOLS Toolbox Expanded
Creating a New Toolbox
 To create a new toolbox

1. Select Toolbox > Create New Toolbox.
OR
2. From the Toolbox tab, right-click in the Tools area and select Create New Toolbox.
3. The New Toolbox dialog appears.
Figure 264 - New Toolbox Dialog
4. Enter a toolbox name (maximum 50 characters). The name must not be that of an existing toolbox and
must meet standard Windows file-naming criteria.
5. The new toolbox is added to the Tools area inside the toolbox in which it was created.
Creating a New Tool Inside a Toolbox
Because many different tool strings can use the same tool, it is good practice to store a much used tool in
an easily accessible toolbox for later string insertion.
 To create a new tool inside a toolbox

1. Select an existing toolbox within the Tools area, or create a new toolbox.
2. From the menu bar, select Toolbox > New Tool.
OR
From the Tools area, right-click the intended toolbox and select New Tool.
3. The New Tool dialog appears, within which is included the name of the toolbox where the tool is to be
created.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 265 - New Tool Dialog
1. Enter a tool name. The name must not match that of an existing tool.
2. The Tool Editor display screen appears, where general tool information, tool properties, and tool
connections pertaining to the new tool may be input.
3. Click Save (lower left-hand portion of the display screen) to save the tool with the name
specified at creation, or click Save As... to save the tool with another name.
4. The new tool is saved, added to the Tools area inside the first-specified toolbox, and is available
for selection.
Editing a Tool Within a Toolbox
Use the Tool Editor to edit tools residing in a toolbox.

 To launch the Tool Editor and edit an existing tool
1. Select the tool in the Tools area.
2. Select Toolbox > Edit Tool.
OR
3. Right-click the tool in the Tools area.
4. Select Edit Tool.
5. Edit general tool information, tool properties, and tool connections pertaining to the tool.
6. Click Save (lower left-hand portion of the display screen) to save the tool with the name
specified at creation, or click Save As... to save the tool with another name.
After saving the tool, the Tool Editor asks whether or not the edit(s) should be applied to any tool string
containing the tool
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Deleting a Tool from a Toolbox
 To delete a tool from a toolbox

1. Select the tool in the Tools area.
2. Select Toolbox > Delete Tool.
OR
3. Right-click the tool in the Tools area.
4. Select Delete Tool.
5. A confirmation dialog appears, in which it is noted that deleting a tool cannot be undone.
Figure 266 - Confirm Delete Dialog
Copying an Existing Tool Into a Tool Box
Copy tools from one toolbox to another by dragging them in a manner typical of Windows-based
applications.
 To drag/copy a tool into a toolbox
1. Click the tool name in the Tools area.
2. Drag the tool by holding the left mouse button down and moving the mouse.
3. Release the mouse when it hovers over the target toolbox. Similarly, drag/copy tools from a tool string into
a tool box:
4. Click the tool name in the Tool String tab, or click the tool in the Tool String schematic.
5. Drag the tool into a toolbox within the Tools area.
Importing/Exporting Toolboxes
 To import or export a toolbox

1. Select a toolbox (left-click the toolbox).
2. Complete one of the following: Right-click the toolbox name.
OR
3. Select Toolbox from the Tool String Editor menu bar.
4. Click Import Toolbox or Export Toolbox.
5. Clicking Import Toolbox results in the appearance of the Open dialog. Clicking
Export Toolbox results in the appearance of the Save As dialog.
6. Use these Windows® dialogs to complete the import/export process.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Finding Tools by Grouping
In the Tool String Editor, tool selections can be refined by grouping tools based on their properties.
Tools, by default, are grouped within the Tools area according to toolbox; they can be grouped
differently, as follows:
1. Check or un-check tool groups within the Group Tools By area. Items in the Tools area become
sorted according to the checked Group Tools By items.
2. Drag items in the Group Tools By area up or down to manually sort them.
Figure 267 - Tools Sorted According to Group Tools By Checkboxes
Tool-grouping order is “remembered” between application sessions
 To add items to the Group Tools By area

1. Right-click an item in the Tool String tab (within the Tool String area).
2. Click User Selected Columns.
3. Select a column that is not already checked. The column appears in the Group Tools By area.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Finding Tools using Tool Search
 To use the Tool Search tab to find specific tools
1. Select the Tool Search tab.
2. Using the Look In dropdown, select a search location.
3. Select a Search Property.
To add Tool String area items to the Search Property selection field, right-click anywhere in the Tool
String tab, click User Selected Columns, and select the desired column.
1. Enter the Search Criteria.
2. Click Search.
For example, to search in All Toolboxes for tools that have a 1.5 inch OD, the following values are entered, and the
following results produced:
Figure 268
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with Tool Strings
Create, modify, delete, import, and export tools/tool strings using the Tool String Editor.
 To create a new tool string
1. Use one of the following methods to access the New Tool String dialog:
a. From the Select a Tool String display, click New.
Figure 269
The Select a Tool String display screen appears immediately after launching the Tool String Editor from the
Managers menu-bar item in Cerberus.
b. From within the Tool String Editor, click the Create a new tool string button in the toolbar.
Figure 270
c. From within the Tool String Editor, select File > New Tool String from the menu bar
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 271
Figure 272 - The New Tool String dialog appears
a. Enter a name for the new toolstring and click OK. An empty tool string appears:
Figure 273
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Adding Tools to a Tool String
Insert an existing tool from a toolbox or create a new tool.
 To insert a tool from a toolbox

1. Locate the tool by grouping or by executing a tool search (see Finding Tools by Grouping or Finding
Tools using Tool Search for more information).
2. Click to select a Tool Name in the Tool String tab.
The Tool Name selected in the Tool String tab affects the to-be-inserted tool’s position in the hierarchy. See
Step 4 below for more information
3. Click to select the located tool in the Tools area.

4. Insert the tool using one of the following methods:
a. Select Edit (Tool String) in the menu bar; click Insert from Toolbox Below to position the
inserted tool below the currently selected tool in the Tool String, or click Insert from Toolbox
Above to position the inserted tool above the currently selected tool in the Tool String.
b. Click the toolbar item Insert selected tool below or click the toolbar item Insert selected tool
above.
Figure 274
c. Right-click the desired tool; click Insert from Toolbox Below or Insert from Toolbox
Above.
d. Drag the tool to the schematic area or to the Tool String tab.
When tools are added, the total length, weight, and Max O.D. for the tool string are updated in the tool bar. The newly
added tool is rendered in red in the schematic, and shaded red in the picture.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving Tools within a Tool String
Move tools up or down in a tool string relative to other tools in the string.
 To move tools within a tool string
1. Select the tool in the schematic or in the Tool String tab.
2. Move the tool using one of the following methods:
a. Select the Edit (Tool String) menu-bar item; click Move Tool Up or Move Tool Down.
b. Click the Move Tool Up or Move Tool Down toolbar-menu item.
Figure 275
c. Right-click the tool on the schematic or on the Tool String tab; click Move Tool Up or Move Tool Down.
d. Drag the tool up or down the string.
To drag a tool up or down the string, click to select it in the schematic or in the Tool String tab, and then drag it
by holding the left mouse button depressed. When the blue arrow in the schematic (or the shaded line in the
Tool String tab) reaches the desired location for the tool, release the mouse button to drop the tool in the
new location.
Removing Tools from a Tool String
 To remove a tool from a tool string

2. Remove the tool using one of the following methods:
a. Select the Edit (Tool String) menu-bar item; click Remove Tool.
3. Select Edit (Tool String) > Remove Tool from the menu bar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 276
a. Right-click the tool on the schematic or on the Tool String tab; click Remove Tool.
Removing a tool from a tool string does not delete it from any toolbox
Editing a Tool within a Tool String
Edit a tool, independently of any toolbox, inside the tool string using the Tool Editor.
 To edit a tool within a tool string
2. Launch the Tool Editor using one of the following methods:
a. Select the Edit (Tool String) menu-bar item; click Edit Tool.
b. Right-click the tool on the schematic or on the Tool String tab; click Edit Tool.
c. Double-click the tool in the Tool String tab or on the schematic.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 277 - The Tool Editor Appears
Editing a tool inside a tool string does not update it in any toolbox. Also, a tool is not saved inside
an edited tool string unless the tool string is saved
.Working with the Tool String Tab
The Tool String tab, like the Properties & Features tab, displays a tool string as a table of data, with a subset of
tool properties and features.
Data displayed in the Tool String tab is configurable so that only properties or features of particular interest are
displayed on the main tab.
 To configure the Tool String tab

1. Right-click anywhere on the Tool String table and move the mouse to the User Selected Columns
item. A submenu appears, listing all the available columns, with the selected columns checked.
2. Toggle (check or un-check) an item on this list to show or hide the column in the Tool String tab.
Items checked in this list are also available in the Group Tools By list on the Toolbox tab and the Search Property
list on the Tool Search tab.
The Tool Name and # fields are not available for selection; they are always visible
3. Resize the table columns by using the mouse to drag the border between two column headings.
The Tool String tab’s configuration is "remembered" between sessions
___________________________________________________________________________________________
can be exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media, a job can
be imported into Cerberus. The export files may also be emailed to another person for use on their computer.
Printing a Tool String

 To print a Tool String
1. From the Tool String Editor display screen, select File > Print. The Print Preview display screen appears
Figure 278
2. Review and customize the to-be-printed Tool String.

a. The Tool String tab shows a print preview of the entire tool string.
3. Max OD for both the entire toolstring and for each tool is displayed.
a. The Tools tab contains a collection of individual printouts for each tool in the string.
Check the Include Tool Reports togglebox to include individual tool reports in the printout.
After customization, save the settings in the Tool String Preferences panel for the next session by clicking
the same-named togglebox
___________________________________________________________________________________________
12 | Using the Tool Editor
Chapter 12
Using the Tool Editor
The Tool Editor, launch-able from the Tool String Editor, is used to edit tools inside a toolbox or within an individual
tool string.
About the Tool Editor
The Tool Editor display screen contains a set of tabs that detail the properties of the tool, a panel to display a
schematic rendering of the tool, a panel to display an image of the tool, a table listing tool sections (described
later), and toolbars for accessing and modifying the features of the tool and the individual tool sections.
Launching the Tool Editor
Launch the Tool Editor by double-clicking on a tool name in the Tool String Editor (see Using the Tool String Editor
for more information). A display screen similar to the following appears:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting Tool Properties
Define the general properties of the tool using the collection of tabs at the top of the screen.
The General tab contains standard tool properties, such as Tool Name, Category, and physical dimensions, all of
which are required, with the exception of Category.
Figure 279
Figure 280
1. The Tool Name cannot be modified. Use File > Save As to save the tool under a new name.
2. Edit the available Categories:
a. Click the button to the right of the Category field.
OR
b. Select Edit > Toolbox > Categories from the menu bar.
c. Estimate the Weight, based on tool dimensions, using the calculator button to the right of the Weight field.
The Properties tab contains additional tool properties that can be defined if desired, including a Manufacturer, Part
Number, Comment, Maximum Temperature or Pressure Rating, Yield Strength, and Young's Modulus.
Figure 281
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Use the Connections tab to specify the type of connector for the tool, as well as the allowable location for the tool
within a tool string.
Figure 282
Only the Allowed Location is validated by the Tool String Editor when adding tools to a tool string; the
connector types and sizes are not validated
Use the Toolstrings tab to view and delete any or all toolstrings that use the subject tool.
Figure 283
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting Tool Features
Tool features are more specific characteristics a tool has beyond its set of physical properties. Tool features can
include details such as whether or not the tool is a packer, a drilling motor, or a jar.
Configure tool features by opening each feature panel from the Tool Features or Section Features toolbar at the
bottom of the Tool Editor display screen.
Figure 284
When tool features have been defined, the specific feature appears in bold text in the toolbar.
Tool Features and Section Features are listed separately because the Tool Editor can be used to define multiple sections
on a single tool. This is covered later in this section, but this capability allows the location of features like nozzles,
rollers, knuckle joints, and centralizers to be more specifically located on the tool. By default, each tool has only one
tool section.
Each feature panel provides all the data entry fields needed to define the feature for use in Cerberus calculation
engines.
Setting Advanced Tool and Section Features
Tool Features and Section Features requiring additional discussion are described here.
Setting Jar Tool Features (WL)
Figure 285
 To set jar tool features

1. Within the Tool Editor, specify that the tool is a jar.
a. Select the Jar Tool Feature.
b. Click to check the togglebox associated with the Tool is a Jar field.
2. Set the Jar Firing Force Settings (JFFS).
Jar firing force is the force at the jarring point required to fire the jar. If the force at the jarring point is within a
firing-force range (between JFFS Low and JFFS High), the jar fires. The jar also fires due to force at
jarring of JFFS Tolerance lower than JFFS Low or higher than JFFS High.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Using a Jar Tool in Calculations
Surface weight and cablehead tension corresponding to low and high-setting (respectively) jar firing forces
may be calculated in Orpheus.
See Completing Jar Activation Calculations (WL) for more information concerning using a jar tool in
calculations.
Setting Normal Force Section Features (WL)
Figure 286
Use the Normal Force feature to specify an additional normal force for any tool section. This force could be used
to represent a vulnerability to differential sticking, a density arm, magnetic pull, or some other force the modeler
would like to see reflected in Orpheus calculations.
 To set Additional Normal Force

1. Within the Tool Editor, specify that additional normal force is a tool-section feature.
a. Select the Normal Force Section Feature.
b. Click to check the togglebox associated with the Additional Normal Force field.
2. Input the Additional Normal Force.
Using Additional Normal Force in Calculations
Specifying additional normal force in the Tool Editor doesn’t cause the force to be applied in Orpheus. The
force’s application can be included or not included in the Features and Effects section underneath the
Options tab in Orpheus. See Including Additional Normal Force in Calculations (WL) for additional
information.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting the Tool Image
Change the image associated with a specific tool using the Tool Editor. By default, the tool image is a very simple
image including a question mark. The tool image can be changed to any image available on disk or any existing
image in another toolbox. Additionally, the Tool Editor can attempt to render an image that represents the tool based
on the physical dimensions, features, and properties defined for the tool.
 To select a different image for the tool
Click the Change/Import icon in the middle of the screen.
Figure 287
After clicking the Change / Import button, the Select New Tool Image display screen loads. Select an image
from an existing toolbox or from any folder on a disk accessible by the computer.
In the example below, the DEFTOOLS toolbox has been selected as a source for images:
Figure 288
To change the image associated with the tool, select an image from the dialog and click OK.
Figure 289
In addition to choosing the image manually, the Tool Editor can attempt to render an image based on the tool
properties and features.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To render an image based on tool properties and features
Click (to check) the Auto box under the Tool Image heading in the middle of the dialog.
While this box is checked, changing certain tool properties and features results in a change to the tool image. In the
example below, the Nominal OD is increased and then a centralizer is added.
Figure 290 - Original
Figure 291 - Nominal OD Increased
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 292 - Centralizer Added
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Defining Tool Sections
The Tool Editor can be used to define multiple sections on a single tool. This capability allows the location of features
like nozzles, rollers, knuckle joints, and centralizers to be more specifically defined for the tool. By default, each tool
has only one tool section and only one is needed for Cerberus calculation engines.
 To add a section to a tool

1. Click the Insert Section Above or Insert Section Below button under the Tool Sections heading in the middle
of the screen.
Figure 293
Either button launches the Enter New Section Information dialog, in this case inserting a section above:
Figure 294
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select Increase Tool Length, Take length from the First tool Section of the tool, or Take length from
the currently Selected Section of the tool. In the example below, the Increase Tool Length option is
selected and the section OD is changed to 4.5 inches:
Figure 295
1. Click OK in the Enter New Section Information dialog.

The new section is inserted above the existing section with the OD, ID, and length provided. Additional sections may be
entered, if desired.
Figure 296
When more than one tool section exists on a tool, the currently selected section is highlighted in the Tool
Sections table and rendered in red in the schematic view on the right side of the screen.
Because the Auto Generate option is selected, the tool image is updated to reflect the additional tool section
The Length field is disabled on the General tab when multiple tool sections are defined because the length
of the tool is now calculated as the sum of the individual tool sections
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To delete a tool section
Click the Delete Section button under the Tool Sections heading in the middle of the dialog.
Figure 297
Defining Tool Section Features
By default, each tool has only one tool section. Additional tool sections are not required by Cerberus calculation
engines. Once defined, however, a set of section features exists for each tool section.
This provides the capability to define a tool with multiple centralizers, rollers, knuckle joints, nozzles, or specific
areas where a normal force is applied.
In the example below, a tool has been defined with three tool sections:
Figure 298
___________________________________________________________________________________________
After selecting the middle section, a Knuckle Joint feature is added with a maximum bend angle of 25 degrees:
Figure 299
The Knuckle Joint Section Feature is now bold, the schematic has been updated to reflect the knuckle
joint on the middle section, and the tool image has been updated to reflect the knuckle joint because Auto
Generate is selected.
In the following image, the last section of the tool is selected. Notice that the Knuckle Joint section feature is
not bold. This is because the knuckle joint is defined for the middle section of the tool:
Figure 300
This means an additional knuckle joint can be defined on the same tool, in the top or bottom section. In the case below,
an additional knuckle joint is defined on the bottom section with a maximum bend angle of 10 degrees:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 301
The Knuckle Joint Section Feature is now bold for both tool sections that have a knuckle joint defined; the
schematic has been updated to reflect that there is a knuckle joint defined for the middle and bottom
section of the tool; the tool image has been updated to reflect the knuckle joint because Auto Generate is
selected.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Printing a Tool
 To print a Tool
1. From the menu bar of the Tool Editor display screen, select File > Print.
This launches the Print Preview screen, which displays the printout and allows for customization and
review prior to printing.
2. From the Print Preview screen the tool can be printed by clicking the Print button.
Figure 302
Customizing a Tool Printout
There are several options that are selectable to customize the tool printout – including selecting a different logo for the
header of the printout, selecting a different font, altering the scale used to render the tool image on the printout,
altering the title, including a schematic in the report, selecting values for display in the tool summary, adjusting the
number of copies printed, and adjusting the size of images.
Click the Refresh button prior to printing to see any changes reflected in the Print Preview screen.
By default, the title for the report is the name of the tool; however this can be modified by entering an alternate title
in the Title box.
To adjust the scale of the image displayed on the printout, enter a value from .5 (half size) to 5 in the Image scale width
or Image scale height box.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 When selecting the Printer from the dropdown, please note:
If the user has:
a. A SharePoint URL with the related Cerberus configuration set up as described in Cerberus
Setup > SharePoint tab, and
b. The CTES PDF Printer 50 printer selected in the application.
Then the Save PDF file to SharePoint checkbox becomes available in the application. Click the associated
information button to display the following information.
Figure 303
___________________________________________________________________________________________
13 | Using the Well Editor
Chapter 13
Using the Well Editor
Well Editor allows the configuration of a well, including casing, tubing, and liner geometry. Well Editor stores the
wells in a single database and is accessible across the software suite, providing a consistent interface between
applications.
When configured, wells are used for many calculations. Note that a well is not required for basic fatigue calculations.
The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in greater detail.
1. Starting Well Editor
2. The Well Editor Display Screen
3. Working with Wells
4. Configuring Wells
5. Troubleshooting in Well Editor
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Starting Well Editor
The following procedure outlines how to start Well Editor.
 To start Well Editor

1. Find the Cerberus Main Menu
2. Select, from the menu bar, Managers > Well Editor.
3. The Select a Well dialog appears, from which the user chooses a well.
Figure 304 - Select a Well
OR
4. Launch Well Editor from within other applications in the Cerberus suite by clicking the Well Editor button.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Well Editor Display Screen
The Well Editor display screen contains the following areas:
1. Menu - Quick access to common tasks and setting preferences.

2. Well Diagram - A diagram of the well. Click on a tubular in the diagram to view or edit
parameters.
3. Information/Input Panels - Information/input options vary dependent on the left-hand tab
selected.
Figure 305 - Well Editor Main Display Screen
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Well Editor Tools
The Well Editor has a complete set of tools to simplify the modeling of a well. The following sections cover
these tools in greater detail.
The Main Well Editor Toolbar
Below is a description of the different tools available on the main Well Editor display screen.
Table 24 - Well Editor Tools
Tab Button Function
Enter total depth, well location, reference point, and height. Comments can
be entered as well. Also used to view TVD
Add and configure casing and associated nipples
Add and configure tubing and associated nipples and packers.
Add and configure liners and associated nipples
Add and configure open hole
Add and configure drill pipe sections
Add and configure a bridge plug
Add and configure a reservoir.
Delete the current selection
Clear all breaks in the well.
Add a break - exclude a section of the well view
Opens the survey data for the current well
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Tab Button Function
Opens the friction-factor data grid
Opens the temperature profile for the current well
Opens the well information display screen
Saves the current well to disk.
Exits Well Editor
Rest the cursor over a tool button for a few seconds for the tool name to appear
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Viewing a Well
Well Editor displays information about the well on the Well Diagram in the center of themain screen. The diagram
shows all tubing sections, liners, casing, open hole, and reservoir, as well as the effective well, which is used for
calculations. The well always appears vertically in this diagram, even if it is a deviated well.
To … Do This …
Click specific area (such as a liner) or

See inputs for an area of the well. simply click the appropriate tab on the left. The inputs
appear on the right side of the screen
Zoom in and out of the well geometry diagram Click and drag a rectangle around the area to zoom in on.
Right-click the well to zoom out.
View "smart" labeling on the well plot. Click the red arrow to the right of the diagram
View the effective well Choose Show Effective Well from the Options menu.
Click the Geometry tab, then the Advanced... button

Set friction independent of geometry
on the input screen.
Set friction defaults Choose Friction Defaults... from the Options menu
Change units. Choose Units... from the Options menu
Click the Total depth field at the bottom of the well

Change total well depth
diagram, input the depth, and click Set.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 306 - Well Diagram
Viewing Survey Data Graphs
The Survey Graph is a three-dimensional representation of the survey path and is viewable from the Survey tab.
The graph automatically updates to show the most recent survey data. The graph can show the following items:
1. Well path
2. Axes (North, South, East, West, and depth)
3. Shadows (well path projected onto plane)
4. Grid lines (of plane)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 25
To … Do This …
Turn auto-rotating on and off. Click on “Advanced Views” and select. The “Auto Rotate”
checkbox.
Adjust the elevation and rotation angle. Click on “Advanced Views” and use the
View the graph from a standard elevation and rotation angle Right-click the diagram to select Isometric from the list
OR select Isometric from the “Advanced Views” Panel
Right-click the diagram to select Plan View from the list

View the graph from the Plan view
OR select Plan from the “Advanced Views” Panel
Right-click the diagram to select View Looking North

View the graph looking North from the list OR select North from the “Advanced Views”
Panel.
Right-click the diagram to select View Looking West from

View the graph looking West the list OR select West from the buttons at the “Advanced
Views” Panel
Zoom in on the graph Draw a rectangle around the area to zoom in on.
Right-click the diagram to select Zoom Out from the list

Zoom back out of the graph
OR select Zoom Out from the “Advanced Views” Panel.
View the survey plot only. Click the red arrow to the right of the graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 307 - Survey Graph
Working with Wells
Creating a New Well
Each well must have a unique name. Well Editor stores all of the wells in one database.
Create a new well manually or use Quick Well to quickly preselect certain components in the well.
 To create a new well manually

1. Start Well Editor.
2. Select File > New.
3. Enter the well name.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the Skip button.
6. Configure the well
Opening an Existing Well
 To open an existing well

2. Click the name of the well.
3. Click OK.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Saving a Well
Saving a well to the hard drive records changes to the well in the Wells database. There are two ways to save a
well:
1. Select File > Save from the menu bar to save a well with the current name.
OR
2. Select File > Save as... from the menu bar to save a well with a new name.
Deleting a Well
Unnecessary wells can be deleted. However, when deleted, the information cannot be recovered.
If the deleted well is currently open, Cerberus prompts the user to select a new well to open.
 To delete a well
1. Select File > Delete... from the menu bar.
2. Select one or more wells from the list.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Yes to confirm.
Files can be shared between computers by importing and exporting them. Components and even entire projects can be
exported to removable media for transferring to another computer. Once on removable media, a job can be imported
into Cerberus. The export files may also be emailed to another person for use on their computer.
Printing Well Data
Print detailed reports, including the well configuration, from Well Editor. Print data to a printer or to a PDF file for
emailing or viewing by others.
The free Adobe Reader must be installed to view PDF files. Download the reader from Adobe’s website at
www.adobe.com
NOV CTES does not recommend using any PDF printer other than the NOV CTES PDF generator. Doing so
may result in unpredictable and undesirable results.
Usually the survey graph prints in isometric view. To print the plan view or side view, print a custom view.
 To print well data

1. Select File > Print from the menu bar.
2. Click (to check) Include Cover Page to include a cover page in the report.
a. Click the Configure button to specify the cover-page elements. Click Done when the
desired information is entered into the related fields.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Select the data to include in the report.
In the Print Data section, click (to check) any or all of several options for data:
a. Well Diagram - Includes a diagram of the well.
b. Well Data - Includes data on the well.
c. Survey Data - Includes the survey data for the well.
d. Survey Graph (Isometric View) - Includes an isometric graphic of the well. Additionally, current
elevation and rotation can also be included in the graph.
4. Select the printer options.
i. A SharePoint URL with the related Cerberus configuration set up as described in Cerberus
b. Click the associated information button to display the following information.
Figure 308
c. Click the Select Logo button to select a logo.

NOV CTES does NOT recommend the use of any other PDF generator other than the CTES PDF
Printer. Use of any other PDF generator can produce unpredictable and undesirable results.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Printing a Custom View of the Survey Path
The survey graph is depicted in a standard view when the Survey tab is selected in Well Editor. Change
this view and print, as desired, using the keys at the bottom of the screen.
 To print a custom view of the survey graph
1. Click the Survey tab.

2. The Well Editor screen is repopulated to depict a diagram of the open well.
3. Click Rotate to turn off Auto Rotate.
4. Adjust the position of the well graph.
5. Select File > Print... from the menu bar.
6. The Print Well dialog appears.
7. Click the Survey Graph checkbox.
8. Select Use current elevation and rotation or Isometric view.
9. See Select the printer options to complete the process.
Emailing Well Data Files
Export and email well data files to other Cerberus users after the files are exported or printed as a PDF (.pdf) file.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Wells
Configure Wells manually in Well Editor or use Quick Well to pre-select items.
Regardless of how the well is configured, NOV CTES recommends the following configuration sequence:
1. Configuring Depth
2. Configuring Casing
3. Configuring Liners
4. Configuring Tubing
5. Configuring a Drill Pipe
6. Configuring the Open Hole
7. Configuring Bridge Plugs
8. Configuring the Reservoir
9. Configuring Survey Data
10. Configuring Friction
NOV CTES also recommends entering the following well data for record keeping and reporting purposes, although it is
not used in calculations:
1. Configure Location and Miscellaneous Information
Using Quick Well
Quick Well can be used to create and configuring a new well by preselecting components of the well. Quick Well
automatically opens when a new well is created. Common configurations can be saved as the default.
 To configure a new well using Quick Well

1. Start Well Editor.
2. Select File > New... from the menu bar.
3. Enter the name of the new well.
4. Click OK. The Quick Well dialog appears.
5. Enter the well configurations.
6. To save the input as the default well, click the Save as Default button; then click OK.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 309 - Quick Well
Configuring Depth
The well depth is set within the Well Editor General Tab of the main Well Editor display screen. Setting the
location, reference point, and height are also important. To decrease the effective depth of the well, specify a bridge
plug.
Enter the total well depth before entering other properties. Well Editor uses the well depth as part of its
error-checking process when other properties are entered. Avoid changing the well depth after
other properties are entered.
 To configure total well depth

1. In Well Editor, select the General tab.
2. Enter the Total depth (MD) of the well.
3. Click Set.
4. Enter the other well data.
This data includes location, depth reference point information for the well, the height, and any
Comments.
Height refers to the distance between the reference point and the zero (0) depth of the well.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 310 - Well Editor General Tab
Configuring Subsea Information
Subsea wells present specific configuration requirements. Wireline subsea wells may be riserless.
 To configure subsea wells
1. In Well Editor, select the General tab.
If the well is new, launch the Quick Well utility (see Using Quick Well); select Subsea as the Location
2. For the Location field, select Subsea from the dropdown.

a. If the project is a Wireline project, the well may be riserless. If this is the case, click (to check)
Riserless (this field is located adjacent to the Location field).
The Riserless option should be available for selection for a Wireline project in Quick Well
3. Input or edit the Riser geometry.

a. If the well is Riserless, use the default values for new wells (already present), or input the
Ocean density, Ocean viscosity, and Ocean current data.
4. Save the Well information.

5. Complete the Run at Depth calculation (see Run at Depth for additional information).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Casing
Casing sections of the well, as well as associated nipples, are defined within the Geometry tab of the Well Editor.
A new well starts out with one casing string. Well Editor displays this information on the well diagram.
Table 26
To … Do This …
Find the internal diameter Select the Outer Diameter and Weight. Well Editor looks
up the internal diameter.
Enter nipples for the current casing section Click Nipples....
 To configure casing
1. Select the Geometry tab in Well Editor.
2. To add casing, click Add Casing .
Casings is automatically selected from the dropdown in the right-hand panel of the dialog.
3. Enter the casing properties.
To add additional casing, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Configuring Liners
Liners in the well, as well as associated nipples, are defined within the Geometry tab of the Well Editor. Well
Editor displays this information on the well diagram.
Table 27
To … Do This …
Find the internal diameter. Select the Outer Diameter and Weight. Well Editor looks
Enter nipples for the current liner section Click Nipples....
 To configure liners
2. To add a liner, click Add Liner .
Liners is automatically selected from the dropdown in the right-hand panel of the dialog.
3. Enter the liner properties.
To enter additional liners, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Tubing
Production tubing of the well, as well as associated nipples and packers, is defined within the Geometry tab of
Well Editor. Well Editor displays this information on the well diagram.
Table 28
To … Do This …
Find the internal diameter Select the Outer Diameter and Weight. Well Editor looks
Enter packers for the current tubing section Click Packers.
Enter nipples for the current casing section Click Nipples....
 To configure tubing
2. To add tubing, click the Add Tubing button .
Tubings is automatically selected from the dropdown in the right-hand panel of the dialog.
3. Enter the tubing properties.
Add additional sections as appropriate, if the physical geometry varies.
Configuring a Drill Pipe
Though drill pipe is not normally considered part of a well, Cerberus provides the ability to add drill pipe to the well
to allow modeling of a job performed inside drill pipe.
 To configure a drill pipe

2. Click Add Drill Pipe .
Drill Pipe is automatically selected from the dropdown in the right-hand panel of the dialog.
3. Enter the drill pipe properties.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring the Open Hole
If the depth of the deepest tubular (tubing, casing, or liner) is less than the total well depth, the remaining area must be
defined in the Geometry tab of Well Editor. The first open hole section should start at the bottom of the
deepest tubular. The last open hole section should extend to the total well depth. Well Editor displays this information
on the well diagram.
If multiple open hole regions are entered, their diameters must decrease with depth.
 To configure the open hole

2. To add an open hole section, click Add Open Hole .
Open Hole is automatically selected from the dropdown in the right-hand panel of the dialog.
3. Enter the open hole properties.
Configuring Bridge Plugs
The user can enter one or many bridge plugs using the Well Editor. The ability to enter multiple bridge plugs is
especially useful when designing wells that target milling operations.
Well Editor displays the location of the bridge plug(s) on the well diagram. Adding a bridge plug decreases the
effective depth of the well.
 To configure a single bridge plug

2. Click Add Bridge Plug .
Bridge Plug is automatically selected from the dropdown in the right-hand panel of the dialog.
3. Enter the Depth of the bridge plug.
The well graph reconfigures to show the location and presence of the bridge plug.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To configure multiple bridge plugs
From the Geometry tab in Well Editor, select the Add Multiple Plugs button. From the
Well Editor menu bar, select Edit > Add Bridge Plugs.
From the Forces tab of the Orpheus Force Monitor,
2. The Quick Plug Entry dialog appears.
Figure 311
This utility adds all plugs to the well section based on the minimum internal diameter at the specified depth,
rendered in green in the diagram.
1. Input a depth in the available, asterisked line in the Plug Depth grid. A new,
asterisked line becomes available for input.
2. Repeat the input of depths as desired.
It is not necessary to input the depths in ascending order. When the user clicks OK, the plugs are sorted
 To insert a plug depth above another plug depth

1. Select a plug-depth line.
2. Select the Insert icon.
A new input line is inserted above the selected line.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To delete a plug-depth line
1. Select a plug-depth line.
2. Select the Delete Icon.

OR
3. Right-click the plug-depth line and click Delete.
Configuring the Reservoir
The reservoir location, pressure, and reservoir model inputs are defined on the Geometry tab of the Well Editor.
Well Editor displays the location of the reservoir on the well diagram.
The user may experiment with different reservoir inputs directly in Hydra. However, only the inputs entered
here are saved with the well
Table 29
To … Do This …
Use a fluid that does not appear in the list Click the Fluid Editor button. Configure and save the
fluid in Fluid Editor
Using the Darcy Oil reservoir
model, leave the bubble point
Have Hydra calculate bubble point pressure. pressure zero.
 To configure the reservoir

2. Select Add Reservoir icon.
Reservoir is automatically selected from the dropdown in the right-hand panel of the dialog.
3. Enter the various reservoir parameters.
4. Click the Advanced button to select the well’s reservoir model from the dropdown menu.
5. Enter the properties for the selected reservoir model.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 312 - Geometry Tab – Reservoir Input
Configuring Survey Data
The survey path is defined by entering survey points (depth, inclination, and azimuth) on the Survey Data Display
Screen. Well Editor joins the points with a curve (not a straight line) and displays this information in a three-
dimensional graph. Well Editor also calculates the dogleg severity and true vertical depth.
There are two ways to open the survey data:
1. Click the Survey tab in Well Editor.

OR
2. Select Survey from the Edit menu.
Input survey data manually, paste the data from a spreadsheet, or import data from a text file. Graphs are viewable
after entering or importing the survey data.
Table 30
To … Do This …
Add a row above the current row Click Insert
dd a row after the last row. Click Add.
Select the row or rows to be deleted. Click

Delete a row.
Delete
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 313 - Survey Data Display Screen
Entering Survey Points
To enter data in a row, simply type within the table.
Using the Survey Wizard
Use the Survey Wizard to quickly and easily generate common well-path configurations.
 To use the Survey Wizard
1. Select the Survey tab on the Well Editor panel.
2. Click the Import button on the data screen; then click the Survey Wizard button.
3. Input the Well TD.
4. (Optional) Click (to check) Add Kick-off and build-drop sections.
An Add Build / Drop Section popup appears. Define (by inputting) the start and end of the build section,
and specify the inclination and azimuth achieved.
5. If the results are satisfactory, click OK
A warning dialog appears indicating the existing survey data will be overwritten. Click Yes to proceed or No to
cancel.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Adjusting Survey Tortuosity
Tortuosity is the “spiraling” or “corkscrew” effect that occurs as wells are drilled. Both “macro” and “micro”
tortuosity occur. Macro tortuosity represents the difference in dogleg severity/tortuosity between the
planned well survey and the final well survey. Micro tortuosity (or spiral tortuosity) occurs on a much
smaller scale than macro tortuosity. Cerberus provides the means to adjust both types of tortuosity, and
allows their appearance in the survey data.
 To adjust tortuosity
1. Within the Well Editor, select Options > Survey Tortuosity... from the menu bar. The
Tortuosity Options dialog appears.
Figure 314
2. Click (to check) the Show Tortuosity Points gridtoggle box.

The Tortuosity Data grid appears within the Survey tab, underneath the Survey Data grid.
Figure 315
3. Click (to toggle) Micro tortuosity (spiral) or Macro tortuosity. Click the question-mark icon to
obtain an informational pop-up:
Wells for which tortuosity has not been defined by the user use the following default tortuosity values:
a. Micro tortuosity:
i. Depth range: last 10% of the well TD
ii. Period: 10 ft
iii. Amplitude: 0.5 in
b. Macro tortuosity:
i. Depth range: last 10% of the well TD
ii. Period: 100 ft
iii. Inclination magnitude: 1 deg
iv. Azimuth magnitude: 1 deg
4. Input the depth interval (From – To), and the Period and Amplitude parameters corresponding to each
numbered row.
5. Adjust the Period and Amplitude to match each dogleg of interest.
a. Add, Insert, Delete, or Import points/rows using the available buttons:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 316
When Import is clicked, the New Survey dialog appears, from which the user may choose from among the available
methods of entering new survey data.
Figure 317
6. Click the Save tab.
The micro tortuosity data is only saved in relation to the current project session and is not saved with the well.
If modeling with tortuosity is desired, the user must re-enter information into the Well Editor each time the
project is opened.
7. At this juncture, the user must “tell” Orpheus to utilize the additional survey points when performing
calculations:
a. Start Orpheus.
b. From within a project, select the Options tab > Project Options > Features and Effects.
c. Click to toggle Include Additional Micro Tortuosity; then click the associated ellipses button.
d. Ensure that the Include effect of tortuosity box is checked, and complete the remaining options. See
Include Additional Tortuosity (CT, JP, WL) for additional information.
8. Click OK.
Exporting Survey Data
Share survey data with other people by exporting the data to a text file format. The survey data can be printed
separately from the Well data or included as part of the Well data report.
Survey data is normally included with any well export function from all tabs within Well Editor. To export ONLY
survey data, the Survey tab MUST be selected and the user MUST select Export Survey.... Selecting Export...
will include all other well data
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To export survey data only
1. Select the Survey tab.
2. Select File > Export Survey... from the menu bar.
3. Enter the file name and path to which to export the data.
4. Click Save to export the data.
 To export survey data with well data
1. Select File > Export... from the menu bar.

2. Select the desired well to export.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the path and file name for the well data. If
necessary, navigate to the desired location.
If desired, enter a new file name for the file.

Ensure the file type is Cerberus File (*.zcy). Otherwise, Cerberus will not be able to read the file and
import it.
5. Click Save.
6. Click OK.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Importing Survey Data
Share survey data with other people by importing the data to a text file format.
 To import survey data
1. Select the Survey tab on the panel.
2. Click the New Survey... button on the data screen. The New
Survey dialog appears.
3. Click Import from File .

The New Survey dialog box is repopulated to show the format accepted by Cerberus.
4. Click Import from File .
A warning dialog box appears stating the depths will be imported according to the Units setting. In other
words, if units are set to Metric, then the depth is imported as Metric.
5. Click Yes.
A warning dialog box appears, stating the current survey data will be cleared.
6. Click Yes.
The Import Survey Data dialog appears.
7. Select the file name and path from which to import the data.
8. Click Open.
The Import Survey Data Import is complete dialog appears.
9. Click OK.
The data is imported, with the depth imported in the selected Units setting and the previous survey data
cleared. The user is returned to the Well Editor main screen.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Friction
There are two ways to set friction factors, one of which is to set friction based on effective well geometry; the other is
to set friction independently of geometry.
 To configure friction
1. In Well Editor, select the Friction tab.
2. Click (to check or to uncheck) Friction based on effective well geometry.
3. If friction is not based on effective well geometry, the user may Add, Insert, or Delete friction-factor
information. If friction is based on effective well geometry, friction-factor information cannot be added
because start-depth and end-depth information is predetermined:
a. Click Add to add a new row to the end of the data.
b. Click Insert to insert a new row before the selected row.
c. Click Delete to delete the selected row.
d. Left-click within an RIH or POOH cell; then right-click to set the friction factor to a single value
in all the rows below the selected cell.
Figure 318 - Well Editor Friction Tab
Within Orpheus, friction-factor information is found in the Downhole Conditions portion of the Calculate tab.
Configuring Temperature
The surface temperature and temperature gradient are defined within the Temperature tab. Well Editor calculates the
downhole temperature.
The user may also experiment with different temperature profiles directly in Hydra. However, only the inputs entered
under the Temperature tab in Well Editor are saved with the well.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
To … Do This …
Click Options and select Units... from the menu.

Enter the temperature in different units (such as Fahrenheit to
Celsius). The units conversion utility can be used to calculate the
value in another unit system.
Enter a measured depth. Well Editor con verts the

Check the downhole temperature measured depth to true vertical depth (based on the
current survey data), then applies the temperature
gradient.
 To configure temperature properties

1. Select the Temperature tab in Well Editor.
2. Select the Temperature Profile from the drop-down menu.
3. Enter the Surface Temperature and Temperature Gradient.
Figure 319 - Temperature tab
Configure Location and Miscellaneous Information
The location of the well, as well as its owner, elevation, latitude, and longitude, are configurable on the Info tab. This
information is used on reports and kept with the records. The properties do not affect calculations. However, the
H2S and CO2 inputs are used in corrosion calculations. If corrosion is being tracked, configure these inputs.
When a well is selected in Job Manager, this information is copied into the well physical data for the job.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To configure location
1. Select the Info tab in Well Editor.
2. Enter the information.
Figure 320 - Info tab
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Troubleshooting in Well Editor

I don't see the reservoir fluid I want in The reservoir fluid was deleted from or not Configure the fluid in Fluid Editor, then
the list included in the list of fluids configured in pick the fluid for the well
Fluid Editor. .
Fluids defined as a foam are not included Redefine the fluid type in Fluid Editor
in the list
___________________________________________________________________________________________
14 | Using the Reel Editor
Chapter 14
Using the Reel Editor
Reel Editor is used to configure the information about the reel used to hold the coiled tubing. Reel Editor stores all its
reels in a single database. Because a reel will hold many different strings during its working life, it is treated
separately from the CT string. The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in more detail.
1. “Starting Reel Editor”

2. “The Reel Editor Screen”
3. “Working with Reels”
4. “Configuring Reels
5. “Troubleshooting in Reel Editor”
Starting Reel Editor

 To start Reel Editor
1. Find the Cerberus Main Menu.
a. Select Editors > Reel Editor… menu-bar item
OR
b. From Hydra, Reel-Trak, Orpheus, or Solids Cleanout select the Reel
Editor toolbar button .
Reel Editor can be launched from other applications in the Cerberus suite by clicking the Reel Editor button .
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Reel Editor Screen
Figure 321 - Reel Editor Main Screen -- Geometry Tab
The Reel Editor Main Screen -- Geometry Tab contains the following areas:
1. Toolbar - Click these buttons for quick access to common tasks. See “The Reel Editor Toolbars”.
2. Geometry Tab - Contains two panels: one showing reel dimensions and lock status, and one showing
reel geometry. In the Geometry panel, enter the reel geometry (core diameter, width, and flange diameter)
and the capacity of the reel.
3. Info Tab - Similarly to the Geometry tab, the Info tab contains two panels. Enter Service Data and the
configuration of the reel (work reel or shipping spool).
To … Do This …
From the Select a Reel dialog, click (to check or

Show or hide archived reels. (See “Archiving a Reel”
uncheck) Show Archived Reels.
Show or hide work reels. (See “Configuring Reel Type” From the Select a Reel dialog, click (to check or
uncheck) Show Work Reels.
From the Select a Reel dialog, click (to check

Show or hide shipping spools. (See “Configuring Reel Type”)
or uncheck) Show Shipping Reels.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Reel Editor Toolbars
Below is a description of the buttons on the main Reel Editor toolbar, and each button’s function.
Rest the cursor over a tool button for a few seconds for the tool name to appear.
Table 31 - Reel Editor Main Toolbar
Exit Exits Reel Editor
Opens the New Reel dialog box to create a new reel.

New
See “Creating a New Reel”.
Opens the Select Reel dialog box to open an existing

Open
reel
Save Saves the current reel to disk
Opens the Report Editor dialog box to print the current

Print
reel. See “Printing Reel Data”
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with Reels

The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in greater detail.
1. “Creating a New Reel”

2. “Opening an Existing Reel”
3. “Saving a Reel”
4. “Deleting a Reel”
5. “Locking a Reel”
6. “Unlocking a Reel”
7. “Archiving a Reel”
8. “Printing Reel Data”
Creating a New Reel
Each reel must have a unique name. Because Reel Editor stores all of the reels in one database, there is no need to enter
a database name.
 To create a new reel

1. Start Reel Editor.
2. Click Create New Reel on the toolbar. The New Reel dialog appears.
3. Enter the new-reel name. The user may also click the Show Existing button to determine the reels already
in use.
4. Click OK.
Reel Editor starts the new reel with default values.
5. Configure the reel.
See “Configuring Reels” .
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Opening an Existing Reel
After a reel is created, it can be opened and used.

 To open an existing reel
1. Click Open Existing Reel on the toolbar.
OR
2. Select File > Open Reel from the menu bar. The Select
a Reel dialog appears.
3. Select the reel to open, and click OK.
If a reel isn’t listed, try showing archived reels, work reels, and shipping spools.
4. The Select a Reel dialog box closes and the user is returned to the main Reel Editor screen
(Geometry tab), which is populated with the new-reel information.
Saving a Reel
Reels are saved in order to record changes to the reel on the hard drive. A reel can be saved without renaming
(Save) or saved with a new name (Save As).
 To save a reel
OR
a. Select File > Save Reel As... from the menu bar
The Save as... dialog appears.
b. Enter a name for the reel.
Names can be up to 32 characters long, with letters, numbers, and spaces.
c. Click OK.
The Save as... dialog is closed, the reel is saved under the new name, and the user is returned to the main
Reel Editor screen.
Deleting a Reel
Unnecessary reels can be deleted.
When a reel is deleted, the information cannot be recovered. The reel can be archived instead.
See “Archiving a Reel”.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To delete a reel
1. Select File > Delete Reel from the menu bar.
The Delete Reels dialog appears.
2. Select the desired reel.
If the reel is locked, unlock it. See “Unlocking a Reel”.
3. Click OK.
A Delete Reel warning box appears, stating the operation cannot be undone to confirm deleting the reel.
4. Click Yes to confirm deleting the reel.
The reel is deleted and the user is returned to the main Reel Editor screen.
Locking a Reel
Reels can be locked to prevent inadvertently modifying or deleting them.
To quickly see if a reel is locked, look for the Lock in the lower left corner of the screen
 To lock a reel
1. Click the Lock icon in the lower left-hand portion of the Geometry or Info tab. Clicking the icon acts as
a toggle to lock or unlock the reel, depending on the state of the reel when clicked upon.
OR
2. Select Options > Locked from the menu bar (if the menu-bar item is unshaded and unchecked).
 Unlocking a Reel
A reel must be unlocked before any changes can be made or before it can be deleted.
 To unlock a reel
1. Click the Lock icon in the lower left-hand portion of the Geometry or Info tab. Clicking the icon acts as a
toggle to lock or unlock the reel, depending on the state of the reel when clicked upon.
OR
2. Select Options > Locked from the menu bar (if the menu-bar item is shaded and checked).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Archiving a Reel
Reels that are no longer in use can be archived. Hidden archived reels are not visible by default when opening a
reel, but the information is still available should it ever be needed again.
 To archive a reel
1. Select Options > Archived (so that a check appears beside Archived) from the menu bar (from either the
Geometry or Info tab).
The Archived icon appears in the lower right-hand portion of the diagram panel.
2. Save the reel to retain archival information.
3. Click OK.
 To view archived reels
1. From the Select a Reel dialog, click (to check) Show Archived Reels.
Printing Reel Data
The reel’s configuration and approximate capacities can be printed. This data can be printed to a printer or to a PDF
file for emailing or viewing by others, or for sending to SharePoint (if available to the user).
The free Adobe Reader must be installed to view PDF files. It can be downloaded from Adobe’s Web site at
www.adobe.com
CTES does not recommend using any PDF printer other than the CTES PDF Printer 50. Doing so may
result in unpredictable and undesirable results
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To print reel data to a printer
1. Select Print from the toolbar. The Reel Print dialog appears.
2. (Optional) Enter a Title for the report.

b. Then the Save PDF file to SharePoint checkbox becomes available in the application.
c. Click the associated information button to display the following information.
Figure 322
d. Click the Select Logo button to select a logo.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Reels
There are several steps to configuring a reel. The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics
in more detail.
1. “Configuring Reel Geometry”

2. “Configuring Reel Type”
3. “Configuring Service Data”
4. “Estimating Reel Capacity”
Configuring Reel Geometry
The reel geometry must be entered for calculations. Reel-Trak uses the core diameter and width to estimate how many
wraps of tubing are on the reel, and the effective bending radius, for a given length of tubing on the reel. Flange
diameter is only used in the capacity estimating utility.
Reel-Trak assumes there is enough flange to accommodate the specified string length. Unless the
Watch Dog feature is on, no warnings are given if the reel capacity is insufficient to hold the
specified string.
 To enter reel geometry

1. Click the Geometry tab.
2. Enter the reel geometry criteria within the Geometry panel. The reel
criteria for the geometry include:
a. Core Diameter - The diameter of the core of the reel.

b. Width - The distance between the flanges, measured from the inside surface.
c. Flange Diameter - The diameter of the reel from the top to the bottom.
Figure 323 - Geometry Panel in the Reel Editor Display Screen
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Reel Type
The reel type is for record keeping purposes and is not used in any calculations. However, the reel type can be
used to view or hide reels on the Open Reel dialog.
 To configure the reel type
1. Click the Info tab. The Information panel appears on the right-hand side of the Reel Editor display screen.
2. Select the type of reel.
a. For a work reel, click the Work Reel radio button.
b. For a shipping spool, click the Shipping Spool radio button.
3. For a work reel, select the following options.
a. Select if the reel is a Land Unit or Offshore Skid.
b. If the reel is e-line capable, select the E-line Capable checkbox.
4. Select the Save button on the tab panel or the Save toolbar icon.
Configuring Service Data
Service data can be entered for the reel for record keeping purposes. This data is not used in any calculations.
 To enter service data
1. Click the Info tab. The Information panel appears on the right-hand side of the Reel Editor display screen; the
Service Data subheading appears within the Information panel.
2. Enter reel information for records.
3. Record information includes the Manufacturer of the reel, the Model of the reel, the Date Commissioned, the
Empty Reel Weight, and any Comments for the reel.
4. Select the Save button on the tab panel or the Save toolbar icon.
5. Select the Exit button on the tab panel or the Exit toolbar icon.
6. The Service Data screen is closed and the user is returned to the main Reel Editor screen.
Estimating Reel Capacity
The reel capacity can be estimated for different diameters of CT. This utility is useful when a string is reversed onto a
new reel or strings are spliced together.
This estimate assumes perfect spooling and no "nestling" of one wrap into the one below it. In practice, up
to 10% more tubing may fit on the reel than the estimate shown
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To estimate reel capacity
1. From the Reel Editor display screen, select the Geometry tab.
2. Within the Reel Capacity section, select the CT Size from the dropdown menu. All available CT sizes are listed.
3. Select the amount of Freeboard.
Freeboard is the distance, typically 2–4 inches, from the top wrap to the edge of the flange.
4. Select the Wrap Efficiency.
The greater the wrap efficiency, the more CT can fit on the reel.
The Reel Capacity calculates the estimated amount of CT that can fit on the selected reel, according to the
information supplied.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Troubleshooting in Reel Editor
The following table lists some troubleshooting tips for Reel Editor.

I cannot make any changes to a reel The reel may be locked.
Try unlocking the reel. See “Locking a
Reel”.
I don’t see a reel in the list that I know The reel may be archived Try showing archived reels, work reels,
should be there. and shipping spools on the Reel Editor
screen. See “The Reel Editor Screen”
___________________________________________________________________________________________
15 | Using the Fluid Editor
Chapter 15
Using the Fluid Editor
Fluid Editor is used to define the properties of fluids. Edit the standard fluids provided and create new fluids with Fluid
Editor. Fluid Editor is accessible across the software suite, providing a consistent interface between applications.
After configuration, use fluids for calculations in Hydra and Hydra. The reservoir fluid in Well Editor can be chosen from
the fluids configured in Fluid Editor. The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in greater detail.
1. “Starting Fluid Editor”
2. “Types of Fluids”
3. “The Fluid Editor Display Screen”.
4. “Working with Fluids”
5. “Calculating Properties for Liquids”
6. “Fluid Correction Factors”
7. “Troubleshooting in Fluid Editor”
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Starting Fluid Editor
 To start Fluid Editor
1. Find the Cerberus main menu.
2. Select Editors > Fluid Editor... from the menu bar.
.
3. Launch Fluid Editor from other applications in the Cerberus suite by clicking Fluid Editor
The Fluid Editor Display Screen
Figure 324 - Fluid Editor Main Screen
The Fluid Editor main screen contains the following areas:

1. Toolbar - Allows for quick access to common tasks. For a full description of each button, see Using
the Fluid Editor Toolbar.
2. Fluid Identification - Includes the Fluid Name; allows the user to select the Fluid Type and the Rheology
Model.
3. Surface Properties - Enter the properties of the fluid here. The properties depend on the type of fluid
being configured.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Using the Fluid Editor Toolbar
Below is a description of the buttons on the main Fluid Editor toolbar, and each button's function.
Table 32 - Fluid Editor Main Toolbar
Exit Exits Fluid Editor
New Creates a new fluid. See “Creating a New Fluid
Opens an existing fluid. See “Opening an Existing

Open
Fluid”.
Save Saves the current fluid to disk
Opens the Cerberus User Guide, which provides help

Help
with all aspects of the Cerberus software
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Types of Fluids
There are four different types of fluids. Each type of fluid requires different inputs. The following links point to paragraphs
that cover these topics in detail.
1. “Liquid”
2. “Gas”
3. “Foam”
4. “Multiphase”
Liquid
Liquids are divided into five different rheology models. Each of these are explained here.
Newtonian Fluid
Newtonian fluid is the model for a fluid that flows in a linear manner. A Newtonian fluid is represented by the following
equation:
Few oil field fluids, other than water and water-like fluids, are truly Newtonian, but the Newtonian model is the best
known and easiest to understand. The Newtonian model provides the basis of several important methods used to calculate
friction factors and pressure drops.
Fresh water can be modeled as a Newtonian fluid.
The density and viscosity for a Newtonian fluid will need to be known. The viscosity can be calculated from the
fluid's viscometer readings. See “Calculating Properties for Liquids”
Bingham Plastic Fluid
A Bingham Plastic fluid does not flow until a specific yield point is reached. A Bingham Plastic fluid is represented by the
following equation:
Cement slurry and some drilling muds are often modeled as Bingham Plastics.
For a Bingham Plastic fluid, its density, plastic viscosity (PV), and yield point (YP) need to be known. The PV and YP
can be calculated from the fluid's viscometer readings. See “Calculating Properties for Liquids”.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Power Law Fluid
A Power Law fluid does not behave in a linear manner. However, unlike a Bingham Plastic fluid, a Power Law fluid does not
require a minimum yield stress to start flowing. A Power Law fluid is represented by the following equation:
Many oil field fluids, such as water-based muds, gels, and hydrocarbons, are modeled using the Power Law model.
For a Power Law fluid, its density, consistency factor (K'), and behavior index (n') should be known. K' and n' can be
calculated from the fluid's viscometer readings. See “Calculating Properties for Liquids”.
Herschel-Bulkley Fluid
The Herschel-Bulkley model, a three-parameter rheological model, combines the features of both the Power Law and
Bingham Plastic models. It allows a yield stress with Power Law behavior at higher stress levels. It is represented by
the following equation:
The Herschel-Bulkley model is often preferred to Power Law or Bingham Plastic relationships because it results in more
accurate models of rheological behaviors when adequate data are available.
For a Herschel-Bulkley model, its density, consistency factor (K'), yield point (YP), and behavior index (n') need
to be known. The n', K', and YP can be calculated from the fluid's viscometer readings. See “Calculating Properties
for Liquids”.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Empirical Model Fluid
The parameters of A and B for the Empirical Model fluids were obtained based on fluid flow tests that were performed for
CTES by a third-party institution a few years ago. The fluids tested include: DuovisTM (MI- SWACO), Diutan Gum
(Kelco), DrilplexTM (MI-SWACO), and slick water (FX-2304, Nalco), each at certain concentration. The flow loop
includes sections of straight and coiled tubing.
The flow test data (friction pressure drops at various flow rates) were analyzed and plotted as plots of Fanning friction
factor versus generalized Reynolds number. It was found that on the log- log plots, the data of these fluids can be
approximately described by straight lines within the range of flow rates tested (and the Reynolds number). Therefore, a
general form of empirical equation was proposed to curve fit the fluid flow data:
Equation 1
. . . where f is Fanning friction factor and NReg is generalized Reynolds number. Therefore, the parameters A and B are
fluid-specific (both fluid type and additive concentrations). In Hydra, if a fluid is specified as an Empirical Model fluid,
then, the program will calculate the friction pressure losses of that fluid based on the given empirical parameters A and B.
In Fluid Editor, these fluids are listed under the category of Empirical Model Fluids and corresponding values for
parameters A and B are given. If a user has flow test data for a specific fluid and the flow test data (friction factor vs.
generalized Reynolds number) can be represented using Eq. 1 (above). Then, the user can define that fluid as an Empirical
Model Fluid.
The values of A and B cannot be determined by utilizing viscometer readings. Viscometer readings can be used to
determine the rheological parameters, for example, n and K values of a power-law model. If a user only has rheological
data from viscometer but has no flow test data, he or she should choose the fluid rheological model that best describes the
viscometer data.
The option of defining a fluid as Empirical Model Fluid provides the user opportunity to specify his or her own friction
factor model and not have to rely on the more general friction factor models that are already implemented in the program.
Gas
Fluid editor can currently define three types of gases: nitrogen, air, and natural gas.
The specific gravity of a gas is its molecular weight divided by the molecular weight of air (28.97 g/mol). The specific
gravity must be input at standard conditions of 60º F and 14.7 psi. Since a gas is compressible, the density of the gas at
downhole conditions of temperature and pressure will be calculated at run time.
Foam
A foam is a combination of a gas and base fluid. Despite being a multiphase mixture of a gas (usually nitrogen)
and a liquid, a foam can often be modeled as a homogeneous (single) fluid with properties based on a combination of
Power Law and Bingham Plastic models.
Hydra currently supports only nitrogen-based foams. The base liquid (the most common being water or a gel) must be
configured as a separate fluid before configuring the foam. See “Configuring a Foam”. The foam quality is calculated at
run time.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Multiphase
A multiphase fluid is a combination of oil, gas, and water. The gas can be nitrogen, air, or natural gas. The term "nodal"
refers to the mathematical methods used to calculate the pressure drop of such a mixture. Nodal fluids are most
commonly encountered in the following cases:
1. As the reservoir fluid, specified in Well Editor.
2. When the reservoir is producing fluid and a different fluid is being pumped down the CT. Hydra treats the
mingled fluids in the annulus as nodal.
3. As a commingled mixture of nitrogen and liquid used for stimulation or well cleanout. In this case, the water
fraction should be set to 1 (one), indicating no oil is present in the liquid phase.
The components of the nodal fluid must be specified at standard conditions of 60º F and 14.7 psi.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with Fluids
This section deals with working with fluids.
Creating a New Fluid
Fluid Editor comes with some common fluids already defined. New fluids can be created.
To model nitrified water, create a nodal (multi-phase) fluid and set the water fraction to 1 (one) and the gas
type to nitrogen
 To create a new fluid

1. Click New on the Fluid Editor toolbar.
2. Enter a New Name for the new fluid.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the Fluid Type from the dropdown menu on the Fluid Editor.
5. For liquids or foams, select the Rheology Model from the dropdown menu.
a. Click the Enter Fluid Rheology Data button to enter data. Rheology data inputs depend
on the model type:
i. Newtonian: Temperature and Viscosity
ii. Bingham Plastic: Temperature, Plastic Viscosity, and Yield Point
iii. Power Law: Temperature, Flow Behavior index and Consistency index
iv. Herschel Bukley: Temperature, Flow Behavior index, consistency index, and
Yield Stress
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 325
Fann35 data values are saved with the fluid for each temperature, if they are entered. The
theoretical model is displayed as a red line on theplot.
The Viscometer data is shown as blue points on the plot. The Deviation Coefficient is displayed
adjacent to the plot.
6. Enter the Surface Properties for the fluid, according to the fluid type. See
“Types of Fluids”.
7. Click Save on the toolbar to save the new fluid.
Opening an Existing Fluid
When a fluid has been configured, it is available for use in other applications in Cerberus. There are two ways to open an
existing fluid:
1. Click Open on the toolbar.
OR
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Saving a Fluid
Saving a fluid records changes to the fluid on the hard drive. There are three ways to save a fluid:
OR
2. Select File > Save from the menu bar.
OR
3. Select File > Save as... from the menu bar.
Deleting a Fluid
Unnecessary fluids can be deleted. However, use caution when deleting fluids used in projects. When a fluid is
deleted, the information is not recoverable and must be recreated if the fluid is needed at a later time.
A fluid used in a project, or used as a reservoir fluid in Well Editor, should not be deleted. If a project referencing a
deleted fluid is opened, an error is generated
 To delete a fluid
1. Open the fluid in Fluid Editor.
2. Select File > Delete from the menu bar.
3. Click Yes to confirm deleting the fluid.
Configuring a Foam
A foam is a base liquid combined with a gas. Before configuring a foam, configure the base liquid.
 To create a foam
1. Create and configure the base liquid (the most common being water or a gel) as a separate fluid in Fluid
Editor.
2. Create a new fluid.
3. Select Foam as the Fluid Type.
4. Choose the Rheology Model to use.
5. Select the newly configured base liquid as the Base Fluid.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Calculating Properties for Liquids
The user may calculate fluid properties for Newtonian fluids, Power Law fluids, Bingham Plastics, and Herschel-Bulkley
fluids from their Fann35 viscometer readings. In addition, the effect of temperature on the liquid viscosity can be
estimated.
 To calculate liquid properties at ambient / surface conditions

1. Open the fluid.
2. Choose which rheology model to use from the dropdown menu.
3. Click the Enter Fann Readings button.
4. Enter the viscometer readings in the appropriate fields.
5. Click the Calculate button to:
a. Calculate Viscosity for Newtonian fluids.
b. Calculate n and k for Power Law fluids.
c. Calculate PV and YP for Bingham Plastics.
d. Calculate n, k & YP for Herschel-Bulkley fluids.
6. To use the calculated values, click Use. Otherwise, click Cancel.
The standard R1-B1 rotor-bob combination and F1 torsion spring are assumed for all calculations.
If temperature effects on liquid viscosity are to be considered in Hydra calculations, complete the following procedure.
Otherwise, save and exit Fluid Editor.
 To calculate temperature effects on liquid viscosity

1. Open the fluid.
2. Choose the rheology model to use from the dropdown menu.
3. Estimate the temperature effects on liquid viscosity by clicking on the Temperature Effects button.
4. Enter the rheology data at different temperatures.
5. Click OK to exit.
6. Save the fluid and exit Fluid Editor. If this fluid is loaded into Hydra and the Temperature Effects... option is
enabled, the values of the constants are used in the Hydra calculations .
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Fluid Correction Factors
If model predictions for a particular fluid differ from observed readings by a consistent amount, a correction factor can be
applied to the fluid to compensate. This fluid correction factor applies to Newtonian, Power Law, Bingham Plastic,
Herschel-Bulkley, and Foam fluids. See the following paragraphs for more information:
Entering Fluid Correction Factors
The following procedure outlines how to enter a Fluid Correction Factor.
 To enter a correction factor

1. Open the fluid.
2. Select Options > Correction Factor from the menu bar.
3. Enter the correction factor and click OK.
4. Save the fluid by clicking Save on the toolbar.
Using Fluid Correction Factors
The following procedure outlines how to use a Fluid Correction Factor.
 To use correction factors in Hydra
1. Open the project in Hydra.

2. Click the Project Options button.
3. Click the General tab.
4. Select the Include fluid correction factors checkbox.
5. Click OK to close the Options window.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Troubleshooting in Fluid Editor
Table 33

I don't see the base fluid I want to use Fluid Editor expects the base fluid to be Configure the base fluid as a separate
for my foam. configured before the foam. fluid, then configure the foam.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
16 | Using Equipment Manager
Chapter 16
Using Equipment Manager
Equipment Manager is used to configure the information about different pieces of surface equipment involved in CT jobs.
Equipment Manager stores all its equipment in a single database. Individual pieces of equipment can be grouped into
equipment packages for an individual job.
1. “Starting Equipment Manager”

2. “The Equipment Manager Screen”.
3. “Working with Pieces of Equipment”
4. “Creating an Equipment Package”
Starting Equipment Manager

 To Start Equipment Manager
1. From the Cerberus main menu or home page, select Equipment Manager from the Editors menu.
2. OR
3. From the Reel-Trak Job Setup tab, select the Surface Equipment link located under the Wellsite
Geometry.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Equipment Manager Screen
The Equipment Manager Main Screen has the following areas:
1. Toolbar. Click these buttons for quick access to common tasks. See “The Equipment Manager
Toolbars”.
2. Cabin Tab. Configure cabins here.
3. Injector Tab. Configure injectors here.
4. Guide Arch Tab. Configure guide arches here.
5. BOP Tab. Configure BOPs here.
6. Stripper Tab. Configure strippers here.
7. Power Pack Tab. Configure power packs here.
Figure 326 - Equipment Manager Main Screen
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The Equipment Manager Toolbars
Rest the cursor over a tool button for a few seconds for the tool name to appear.
Below is a description of the buttons on the main Equipment Manager toolbar, and each button’s function.
Exit Exits Equipment Manager
Opens the dialog box to create new equipment (See

New “Creating New Equipment”
Opens the dialog box to open an existing piece of

Open equipment or equipment package. See “Opening
Existing Equipment”
Saves the current piece of equipment or equipment
Save package to disk. See Saving Equipment
Deletes the current piece of equipment or equipment

Delete
package. See “Deleting Equipment”
Print This option is currently disabled
Equipment Opens the Equipment Manager
Auxiliary Opens the Vehicle tab for configuration.
Personnel Manager Opens the Personnel Manager
Help Opens Help for Equipment Manager
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with Pieces of Equipment
This section deals with working with individual pieces of equipment. The following types of equipment can be configured:
1. Cabins
2. Injectors
3. Guide Arches
4. BOPs
5. Strippers
6. Power Packs
7. Vehicles
This section includes the following topics:
1. “Creating New Equipment”

2. “Opening Existing Equipment”
3. “Saving Equipment”
4. “Deleting Equipment”
Creating New Equipment
All of the pieces of equipment in Equipment Manager are created in the same way. The only difference is the inputs for
each type.
 To Create a Piece of Equipment
1. Start Equipment Manager.

2. Click the appropriate tab for the type of equipment to be created.
3. Click the New button on the toolbar.
4. Enter a name for the piece of equipment and click OK.
5. Enter the inputs relevant to that piece of equipment.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Existing Equipment
An existing piece of equipment can be opened in order to review or edit its inputs.
 To Open a Piece of Equipment
2. Click the appropriate tab for the type of equipment to open.
3. Click the Open button on the toolbar.

4. Select the name of the piece of equipment and click OK.
5. The inputs for that piece of equipment can now be viewed and edited.
Changes to a piece of equipment should be saved before moving on to the next piece of equipment.
Saving Equipment
Pieces of equipment are saved to record changes to the hard drive.
 Ways To Save a Equipment
1. Click the Save button on the toolbar.

OR -
2. Select File > Save from the menu bar.
Changes to a piece of equipment should be saved before moving on to the next piece of equipment
Deleting Equipment
Unnecessary equipment no longer in use can be deleted.
 To Delete a Piece of Equipment

1. Open the piece of equipment in Equipment Manager.
2. Click the Delete button on the toolbar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating an Equipment Package
An equipment package is assembled in Equipment Manager. Then that equipment package can be selected for a job in Job
Manager.
 To Create an Equipment Package
2. Select Resources > Equipment Package from the menu bar.
3. Click the New button on the toolbar.
4. Enter a name for the equipment package and click OK.
5. Select each of the individual components in the package.
Individual pieces of equipment should be saved before moving on to the next piece of equipment.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Chapter 17
Using Achilles
Achilles is the CTES fatigue model. Achilles is used in two different ways in Cerberus:
1. Reel-Trak uses Achilles to calculate fatigue for each segment of a string. The use of Achilles in this case is
invisible to the user.
2. Achilles is used as a modeling tool for CT string design.
Using Achilles as a modeling tool for CT string design provides a means of determining the relative effect of the various
factors influencing tubing fatigue life. For example, Achilles helps answer questions such as, "How does increasing the
tubing size from 1.5" to 1.75" affect the expected life?" or "How much does using a 94" gooseneck instead of a 72"
gooseneck improve tubing life?"
Achilles assumes that the CT is cycled for its entire life using consistent bending radius and pressure. While this is not
physically realistic, it provides a means to compare and contrast the effect of key parameters and hence optimize the best
configuration for an upcoming job or string purchase.
Starting Achilles
 To start Achilles
1. From the Cerberus home page, select, from the menu bar, Calculations > Achilles.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Fatigue Model Theory
Fatigue results from plastic deformation when the steel CT is bent off the reel and around the gooseneck. The
amount of fatigue that a bending event causes depends primarily on the CT material, the CT geometry, the pressure, the
bending radius, and the current fatigue. Achilles uses these factors to calculate the amount of fatigue created by a trip into
and out of the hole. Because Achilles takes these factors into account, it provides a more accurate estimate of CT life
than other methods of estimating fatigue, such as running feet.
When CT accumulates too much fatigue, it fails. First, a microscopic crack begins to form in the wall of the CT.
Eventually the crack propagates through the wall, and the CT cannot hold pressure. At high pressure, these two stages may
seem simultaneous. Achilles can calculate the number of trips to the first stage – crack initiation, or the second stage –
fracture. CTES recommends using CT to no more than 80 percent of its used life.
Achilles, along with the rest of Cerberus, assumes that the yield strength of CT is not affected by fatigue. However,
there is some evidence that the yield strength of used CT is reduced by up to 15%.
Bending Events for CT
Achilles uses the six bending events listed below to calculate fatigue for each trip into and out of the hole.
1. Off the reel - bent to straight.

2. Onto the gooseneck (guide arch) 2.5
- straight to bent.
3.4
3. Off the gooseneck to the injector
- bent to straight.
1, 6
4. From the injector onto the
gooseneck - straight to bent.
5. Off the gooseneck toward the
reel - bent to straight.
6. Onto the reel straight to bent.
CT does not fatigue downhole because the radius of curvature of the wellbore trajectory is not small enough to cause plastic
yielding of the CT (except in extraordinarily rare circumstances
– rare enough to be considered negligible).
CT also does not fatigue when the CT doesn't move, even if the pressure changes, such as during a pressure test.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Fatigue Model Inputs
Achilles uses the following inputs to calculate fatigue for each bending event:
1. CT Diameter
2. CT Wall Thickness
3. CT Material Type
4. Current Fatigue (invisible to user)
5. Bending Radius (at reel core or at guide arch)
6. Pressure
How to Minimize Fatigue
When a string accumulates fatigue, the amount of fatigue on the string cannot be reduced. However, a new string can
be designed to minimize fatigue, and to control the amount of new fatigue a string accumulates in the future.
 To minimize fatigue (new string)

1. Use a thicker CT wall.
2. Use a smaller outside diameter.
3. Use a material appropriate for anticipated pressures.
 To minimize fatigue (used string)
1. Use a larger guide arch.
2. Perform fewer cycles.
3. Cycle with lower pump pressure.
4. Place the string on reel with a larger core, or use a reel core expander.
5. Cut the string to shift new fatigue away from areas with current high fatigue, welds, and other areas of concern
(zones).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Using Achilles
The Achilles Interface
Viewable within the main display screen are the different factors affecting fatigue life and diameter growth.
Achilles models fatigue in terms of trips. Each trip is calculated according to the current configuration displayed on
the screen. Thus, if the calculations are paused, a parameter is changed, and the calculations are resumed, the model
uses the revised configuration. Changing the diameter or wall size is physically meaningless. However, the pressure
or bending geometry can be changed to reflect possible field conditions.
Three tabs are initially available from the Achilles interface: Calculator, Analyzer, and Options. A fourth tab,
Analyzer Data, becomes available only when the Calculate button is selected on the Analyzer tab.
Before the user begins to run fatigue analyses, the parameters in the Options tab should be evaluated/set.
See Using the Options Tab for more information
The Achilles Toolbar
Table 34 - The Achilles Main Toolbar
Exit Exits Achilles
Accesses the Achilles Print dialog to print data.

Print
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Using the Calculator Tab
The Calculator tab allows the user to vary each of the potential fatigue-affecting parameters and to run the
fatigue calculation in a DVD-like environment; in other words, to run, step, etc., through the fatigue
calculation.
 To run the coiled tubing fatigue calculation

1. Input the following information (using dropdowns where available): CT Material, CT Nominal Diameter, CT
Nominal Wall, Pressure, Reel Diameter, and Arch Radius.
Click the Edit button to add/delete values that pertain to the Gooseneck Arch Radius. Values below 25 inches
are not allowed.
2. Select (from the dropdown) the Fatigue Model: Achilles 3.0 (1999); Achilles 4.0 (2003); or Achilles 5.0
(Linear)
The Fatigue Model should default to the fatigue model selected in String Edit
For more information about selecting a fatigue model, please see the appendix entitled Coiled Tubing
Fatigue Models.
3. Select Calculation Speed (Min/Max) to determine how fast the calculation runs.
4. Click Play , Step (to view one trip at a time) , Stop , or Reset to
observe the fatigue calculation process.
a. To adjust the Calculation Speed, click and drag the mouse anywhere along the Min/Max line.
5. The resulting data is displayed graphically in the right-hand portion of the Inputs tab.
a. The graph shown in the upper right-hand quadrant appears similarly to the following:
Two views of the graph are available: Fatigue Prediction or Diameter Prediction.
 To switch between type of graph viewed
i. Click (to toggle) either Fatigue Prediction or Diameter Prediction underneath the graph
area of the Achilles Calculator-tab display screen.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
b. The calculation results fields include:
i. Number of Trips
ii. CT Life Used (%)
iii. CT Life after next trip: Though the user may expect the program to stop when exactly
100% of the CT life is used, the last trip in/out of the well may cause CT Life Used to
exceed 100%. If this is the case (and if the calculation cannot exceed 100% fatigue per the
Option selected), the program stops before 100% and shows the user
CT Life after next trip) what the life will/would be after the next trip.
c. The Diameter Growth Results fields include:
i. Current Diameter
ii. Maximum Diameter
iii. Trips to Maximum Diameter
iv. Percent Trips Used at Maximum Diameter
Figure 327 - Achilles Calculator Tab
Using the Analyzer Tab
The Achilles Analyzer is used to model the comparison of different input values over a pressure range. The Analyzer
compares the input parameters and their values. Then, the Analyzer produces a line- graph of trips to failure vs. pressure
with lines for the different values.
The number of calculations depends on the pressure range and the number of values to compare. The greater the pressure
range, the smaller the steps.
The larger the number of values, the more calculations the Analyzer must perform. The number of calculations and the
current calculation are shown on the bottom right-hand portion of the screen.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
 To use the Achilles Analyzer
1. Change the Pressure by entering the new range (From/To) and Step size.
2. Enter/select values for the Fixed Variables within the left-hand portion of the display screen.
3. Select the Floating Variables:
a. Select the Parameter from the dropdown.
The Parameter dropdown selection Fatigue Model, used as a floating variable, helps make quick comparisons
between models.
Figure 328
b. Select Value(s) from the dropdown.

OR
c. Input Value(s) separately, clicking the Add button (which appears when the user starts typing
into the Value field) after each input, to include values in the list.
4. Click (to check) graph-display options in the area immediately below the graph area (right- hand side of
the dialog). Select any or all of the following: Show trips to fatigue failure (default); Show trips to
MRR; Show trips limited by diametrical growth.
5. Click the Calculate button.
6. Achilles performs the calculations for the different cases. When Achilles is done calculating, graph
line(s) appear.
a. A line is available for each value chosen for the floating variable.
b. The user may select display options for the line graph after the calculation has run (see Step 4,
above, for more information). Click (to check) these options for them to become visible on the
line graph.
c. Various CT and calculation information is found in the lower right-hand corner of the interface.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Figure 329 - Achilles Analyzer Tab
Using the Analyzer Data Tab
After the fatigue calculation is run from the Analyzer tab, the Analyzer Data tab becomes available. This tab
provides data for each Pressure Step chosen by the user.
Figure 330 - Achilles Analyzer Data Tab
Click a heading to sort the table by that field
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Using the Options Tab
Before the user begins to run fatigue analyses, the parameters in the Options tab should be evaluated/set. Option
selection causes different values to be applied to the fatigue calculations.
Select the options that closely match the desired model.
Figure 331 - Achilles Options Tab
___________________________________________________________________________________________
17 | Using Achilles
Printing Achilles Data
Achilles data can be printed to a printer or to a PDF file for emailing or viewing by others, or for sending to SharePoint (if
available to the user).
www.adobe.com
NOV CTES does not recommend using any PDF printer other than the CTES PDF Printer 50. Doing so may
result in unpredictable and undesirable results.
 To print Achilles data to a printer

1. Select Print from the toolbar. The Achilles Print dialog appears.
2. (Optional) Enter a Title for the report.
3. Click (to check) whether to print the Fatigue Prediction Graph or the Diameter Prediction Graph.
i. A SharePoint URL with the related Cerberus configuration set up as described in Cerberus
5. Then the Save PDF file to SharePoint checkbox becomes available in the application.
a. Click the Select Logo button to select a logo.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Chapter 18
Using Hercules
Hercules is the coiled tubing limits model, used to calculate the burst and collapse pressures, and maximum tensile
and compressive axial loads on tubing. All limits are graphed to determine the pressures and axial loads to use. The
following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in greater detail.
1. “Starting Hercules”
2. “Tubing Limits Theory”
3. “The Hercules Display Screen”
4. “Working with Hercules Projects”
5. “Calculating Results in Hercules”
6. “Troubleshooting in Hercules”
Starting Hercules
 To start Hercules
From the Cerberus main menu, select Calculations > Hercules from the menu bar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Tubing Limits Theory
There are two components to the tubing limits theory: the stresses that create the limits, and the curves that represent the
limits. The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in greater detail.
1. “Coiled Tubing Stresses”

2. “Limit Curves”
Coiled Tubing Stresses
Coiled tubing (CT) stresses are caused by:
1. internal pressure
2. external pressure
3. axial force (tension or compression)
4. torque
Combining internal / external pressure, and axial force with the geometry of the CT and the well, creates the following
three principle stresses:
1. Axial Stress Radial

Stress
2. Radial Stress
3. Hoop Stress Hoop Stress
Axial Stress
Torque creates an associated shear stress.
The three principle stresses and the shear stress are combined using the von Mises Yield Condition to determine what
pressure and axial force combinations will cause the CT to yield.
Axial Stress
Axial stress is caused by the axial force (tension or compression) applied to CT. If the compressive force
exceeds the helical buckling load, the CT forms a helix in the hole. This helix causes an additional axial
bending stress in the CT. (See “Helical Buckling” )
When the CT is not helically buckled, the axial stress is the axial force divided by the cross- sectional area.
When the CT is in compression and helically buckled, the additional bending stress should be added to the axial
stress. It is conservative to assume that the CT is buckled if the effective force is compressive (less than zero).
Thus, the Pipe Limit Modeling Calculator assumes that the CT is buckled if there is any compressive effective
force. Including helical buckling truncates the left side of the elliptical shape of the limits curve.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Radial Stress
The radial stress at a given location in the CT wall is the stress through the CT wall due to inner and outer
pressures. The maximum stress always occurs at the inner or the outer surface. Since yielding occurs first at the
inner surface, Hercules uses the radial stress at the inner surface in its calculations. The radial stress,
simplified for the inner surface, is the negative of the internal pressure.
Hoop Stress
The hoop stress (also known as tangential stress) at a given location in the CT wall is the stress around the
circumference of the CT due to inner and outer pressures. The maximum stress always occurs at the inner or the
outer surface. Since yielding occurs first at the inner surface, Hercules uses the hoop stress at the inner surface in
its calculations.
The Lame thick wall equation is used to calculate the hoop stress which involves a combination of the inner and
outer pressures, and the squares of the inner and outer radii of the CT.
Torque
Torque is the moment of any force applied to the CT which causes or prevents rotation about the center axis. The
result is torsion of the CT and an associated shear stress. The shear stress is greatest at the outer surface, and so
this value is used as a worst case.
von Mises Yield Condition
The initial yield limit is based on the combination of the three principle stresses (Axial Stress, Radial Stress,
and Hoop Stress) and Torque. The von Mises yield condition is commonly used to describe the yielding of steel
under combined states of stress. In its general form, it includes the influence of all three principle stresses and
shear stress, and involves the square of the differences between each of the principle stresses.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Limit Curves
The calculated graph takes into account maximum diameter considerations (Maximum Diameter Considerations) as well as
safety factors (Applying Safety Factors ).
Also, see How the Differential Pressures Curve is Calculated
Maximum Diameter Considerations
CT has a tendency to increase in diameter during its life. This change in geometry changes the stresses, and
thus the limits. Hercules takes into account the diameter growth by calculating limits curves for both nominal
and maximum diameters and selecting the most conservative portions.
How the Differential Pressures Curve is Calculated
The limits curve is determined by the stresses in the CT caused by inner pressure, outer pressure, and axial
force. To simplify the presentation of the limits, the difference between the inner and outer pressure is defined
as inner pressure minus outer pressure. However, the yield condition still remains a three variable equation.
To represent the limits as a two dimensional curve, one of the variables must be held constant.
By holding the outer pressure constant and varying the axial force, inner pressure can be calculated, and the
pressure difference can be plotted versus axial force. The resulting plot is an ellipse. Holding inner pressure
constant instead of outer pressure produces a similar ellipse.
The differential pressure limits curve seen in Hercules is a conservative combination of four limits curves.
Hercules calculates the limits curve for the four cases listed below. Hercules then selects the portions of these
curves that are the most conservative (closest to the origin), producing the final limits curve.
Table 35
Case Diameter Pressure
1 nominal 0
2 maximum 0
3 nominal maximum
4 maximum maximum
*For the upper arch of the curve, Hercules uses a constant outer pressure. For the lower arch of the curve,
Hercules uses a constant inner pressure.
How Constant Pressures Curves are Calculated
When Hercules calculates constant pressures limits curves, two half-ellipses are seen: one for the constant inner
pressure, and one for the constant outer pressure. They are independent of each other and are calculated
separately.
Each constant pressure limits curve seen in Hercules is a conservative combination of two limits curves.
Hercules calculates the limit curve for the constant inner pressure at nominal diameter and maximum diameter.
Hercules then selects the portions of these two curves that are the most conservative (closest to the origin),
producing the final limits curve. Hercules uses the same process for the constant outer pressure. The user
specifies maximum diameter and the constant inner pressure and constant outer pressure.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Applying Safety Factors
The limits curve calculated by the Von Mises yield condition represents where the CT would begin to yield.
Although combining multiple limits curves is conservative, a larger buffer area is desirable.
Hercules introduces more safety by multiplying the limits curve by safety factors to obtain a working limits
curve.
Hercules provides for using different safety factors for burst and for collapse. The safety factor for collapse
should be more conservative to account for ovality if one of the two collapse algorithms provided is not used.
Both the API 5C7 and Plastic collapse models use ovality as an input.
During its life the CT becomes somewhat oval due to bending on the reel and over the gooseneck. (Some ovality
is removed by the gripper blocks on the chains.) Increased ovality increases the likelihood of collapse.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
The Hercules Display Screen
Figure 332 - Hercules Display Screen
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
The Hercules Toolbar
Table 36 - Hercules Main Toolbar
Exit Exits Hercules
Starts a new Hercules project. See “Creating a New

New
Hercules Project”
Opens the dialog box to open an existing Hercules

Open
project. See “Opening an Existing Hercules Project
Save Saves the current Hercules project
Delete Deletes the current Hercules project
Opens the Hercules Report Manager to print the current

Help
graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
The Hercules Menu Bar
File
The File menu-bar selections are like the Toolbar selections:
Figure 333 - Hercules File Menu
Besides the available toolbar options, the user can:
1. Save Graph As... – saves the graph as an image file.

2. Copy Graph to Clipboard – copies the graph to the Windows clipboard for pasting in other applications.
3. Exit – exit the application.
Printing a Graph
Hercules data can be printed to a printer or to a PDF file for emailing or viewing by others, or for sending to
SharePoint (if available to the user).
www.adobe.com
NOV CTES does not recommend using any PDF printer other than the CTES PDF Printer 50. Doing so
may result in unpredictable and undesirable results.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
 To print Hercules data to a printer
1. Select File > Print from the menu bar.
OR
2. Select Print from the toolbar.

a. The Hercules Report Manager appears.
b. Then the Save PDF file to SharePoint checkbox becomes available in the application.
c. Click the Select Logo button to select a logo.
Options
Figure 334 - Hercules Options Menu
1. Units – opens the units form

2. Hercules Defaults – allows user to set default project that is loaded when Hercules is opened or new project is
clicked.
a. Save as Defaults – saves the current field values as default values.
b. Use Defaults – resets the current field values to the default values.
c. Use Cerberus Defaults – resets the current field values to the Cerberus default values.
3. Hercules Mode – allows users with both Coiled Tubing licenses and Jointed Pipe licenses to switch back and
forth.
a. Coiled Tubing – changes the Calculation Inputs to the CT Mode inputs.
b. Jointed Pipe – changes the Calculation Inputs to the JP Mode inputs.
4. Plot Scale – displays the Plot Scale dialog that allows the user to set the plot scale of the graph for manual
zooming.
5. Show Working Limit – displays the working limit on the graph.
6. Snap to Working Limit – snaps the mouse cursor to the working limit on the graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Help
Figure 335 - Hercules Help Menu
1. Help on Hercules – displays the Cerberus User Guide.

2. About Hercules – displays the Hercules About dialog, which provides information related to CTES technical
support and sales.
The Hercules Graph Context Menu
Right-click on the graph to access the Hercules graph context menu.
Figure 336 - Hercules Graph Context Menu
1. Zoom out – returns the graph to the default view.

2. Plot Scale – displays the Plot Scale dialog, from which the user sets the plot scale of the graph for manual
zooming.
3. Show Working Limit – displays the working limit on the graph.
4. Snap to Working Limit – snaps the mouse cursor to the working limit on the graph.
 To zoom in on the plot
1. Set the Plot Scale (through menu options).
OR
2. Left-click and drag the mouse cursor over a rectangular area to zoom.
 To zoom out on the plot
1. Right-click the Hercules plot and click Zoom out.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Working with Hercules Projects
Hercules is organized by projects. A configuration in a project is stored so that it is accessible without entering all of the
inputs again. All data is stored in a single database. The following links point to paragraphs that cover these topics in
greater detail.
1. “Creating a New Hercules Project”

2. “Opening an Existing Hercules Project”
3. “Saving a Hercules Project”
4. “Deleting a Hercules Project”
Creating a New Hercules Project
The following procedure outlines how to create a new Hercules project.
The user need not access or create a project to start using Hercules. The user is prompted to save upon exit if
changes have been made
 To create a new project
1. Click New on the toolbar.

OR
2. Select File > New from the menu bar.
3. Enter a project name.
4. Click OK.
Limits can now be calculated. See “Calculating Results in Hercules” .
Opening an Existing Hercules Project
The following procedure outlines how to open an existing Hercules project.
1. Click Open on the toolbar.

OR
3. Click the name of the project.
4. Click OK.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Saving a Hercules Project
When a project is saved in the Hercules, the configuration information is saved as well. When the project is reopened, the
data is recalculated. There are two ways to save a project:

2. OR
3. Click File and select Save from the menu.
Deleting a Hercules Project
Unnecessary projects can be deleted. Deleted information cannot be recovered.
1. Open the project to delete.
2. Select File > Delete from the menu bar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Calculating Results in Hercules
Calculating the limits produces the limits curve for the given inputs. The following links point to paragraphs that cover
these topics in greater detail.
1. “Calculating Limits”
2. “The Differential Pressures Curve”
3. “Reading the Differential Pressures Graph”
Calculating Limits
Before working with limits, they must be calculated. This procedure outlines how to calculate the limits.
 To calculate limits
1. Open the project in Hercules.
2. Enter parameters under the Calculation Inputs tab: The following types of parameters are needed:
a. CT geometry
b. Hole ID of the well
c. Torque
d. Maximum operating pressures
3. Select calculation options.
The following calculation options are available under the Calculation Options tab:
a. Include Helical Buckling.
b. Include API 5C7 collapse model.
c. Include Plastic collapse model.
d. Mode for Axial load: Effective Force (Weight) or Real Force.
e. Stress envelope safety factors: Von Mises or Collapse.
f. Working limits.
4. Click Calculate.
Hercules calculates the limits and displays the graph.
Certain options trigger an automatic calculation. Other fields’ input enables the Calculate button. When theCalculate
button is enabled, clicking it completes a manual calculation
The Differential Pressures Curve
The Differential Pressures Curve is a conventional graph. It displays limits based on the difference between inner and
outer pressures. (See “How the Differential Pressures Curve is Calculated”.)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Reading the Differential Pressures Graph
The Differential Pressures Graph combines the internal and external pressure as a pressure difference. The x-axis is
the axial load (how much tension or compression). The y-axis is the difference in pressure (inside minus outside
pressure).
The ellipses on the graph represent the limits. Inside the red ellipse is the working area. The risk for tubing failure
increases if a pressure and axial load combination outside the ellipse is used.
Table 37
To … Do This …
Find the exact coordinates of the cross- hairs Look at the bottom of the graph.
Zoom in on an area of the graph. Click and drag a rectangle around the area to zoom in on
Zoom out to see the entire graph Right-click the graph
Snap to Working Limi Select Snap to Working Limit under the Options tab
Print the graph Click File and select Print. Differential Pressures Graph
Figure 337 - Differential Pressures Graph
___________________________________________________________________________________________
18 | Using Hercules
Troubleshooting in Hercules

The left side of the graph is truncated Helical buckling has been included in the To turn off helical buckling, clear the
graph. The truncated shape is the result of check box on the main screen under the
the extra bending stress caused by helical Options tab, and recalculate the graph
buckling when the CT is in compression
___________________________________________________________________________________________
A | Setting Display Graph Options in Orpheus
Appendix A
Setting Display Graph Options in Orpheus
This section deals with the various options available for configuring the display of Surface Weight vs. Depth graphs. The
user should note that the graph display-options described here generally pertain to all graphs generated as a result of
Orpheus standard calculations.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring Standard Calculation Graphs
As described in the Using Orpheus chapter of the Cerberus User Guide, a Surface Weight vs. Depth graph appears when
the user selects, from the Calculate tab within an Orpheus project display screen, the Trip In and Out button. The initiated
calculation plots a graph showing weight vs. depth as the CT/WL/JP is tripped/run into the well (shown in blue) and out of
the well (shown in green). The calculation is performed from the surface to the measured depth.
Figure 338
From the graph, the user may calculate Yield Limit, Disconnect Limit, and/or Lockup Limit by clicking (to toggle) the
associated checkbox in the lower portion of the Legend panel found on the right-hand side of the display screen.
Calculating Yield Limit and Lockup Limit
The Yield Limit and Lockup Limit calculation procedures described here may be used as “templates” for other
Orpheus standard calculations. See Standard Calculations for additional information.
 To calculate yield limit

1. Click the Yield Limit checkbox.
The Max Wt (% yield) is displayed on the graph and within the legend.
 To calculate lockup limit

1. Click the Lockup Limit checkbox.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 339 - The Min Wt (lockup) is displayed on the graph and within the legend
Changing Default Curve-style Settings

 To change default curve-style settings (Orpheus Calculated Curves Only)
1. Click (to select) a line in the graph or legend. The line begins to blink.
a. Right-click the line (graph or legend).
A menu list becomes visible.
Figure 340
1. Select Set Default Curve Styles.

OR
2. Select, from the menu bar of a graph, View > Set Default Curve Styles. The Default Curve Styles dialog appears.
Some curves have a protected “??%” where the percentage is set in project options. This “??%” is
replaced each time the Orpheus calculation is executed with the proper percentage allowing the user to
change the rest of the description only.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 341
3. After making desired changes, click OK to save the altered curve style as the curve’s new default style. These
settings will be used any time this graph is recalculated.
4. To restore a curve’s original Cerberus setting, click the Use Cerberus Default button related to the altered curve.
Freezing a Line on a Graph
After calculating Trip in and Out, freeze a line on the graph so that it displays as configured when the software is
closed and re-accessed.
To retain line configurations, ensure that the project is saved prior to closing the software
 To freeze a graph line

2. Right-click the line (graph or legend). A menu list becomes visible.
3. Select Freeze from the menu list
4. The Curve Properties
Figure 342 - Frozen Curve dialog appears
In this example, the color, symbol, and symbol increment have been changed.
Note the automatic change of the curve-properties description
5. Click OK
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To observe the frozen line in an altered project
1. Close the graph in which the line was frozen.
2. Alter the Surface Conditions and/or Downhole Conditions within the Calculate tab of the original Orpheus
project.
3. Select the Trip In and Out button to re-run the calculation.
4. Observe the frozen line created in To freeze a graph line within the newly calculated graph.
Figure 343
Hiding a Line on a Graph
 To hide a graph line

2. Right-click the line (graph or legend). A menu list becomes visible.
3. Select Hide from the menu list.
The line no longer appears on the graph or within the legend.
Figure 344
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Showing Hidden Lines on a Graph
 To show all hidden lines on a graph

1. Right-click on the graph.
The applicable menu list appears.
2. Select Show Hidden Items from the menu list.
Figure 345
All previously hidden lines are displayed on the graph and within the legend displayed in a ghosted format.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting a Graph
 To select a graph for display
1. Click the box beneath the main graph. The text on this box is the currently displayed graph.
2. A menu list becomes available.
Figure 346
3. Select the desired graph from the list. The graph updates with the selected graph. The text on the box updates to
the selected graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Saving or Copying a Graph Image
Rather than the user clicking print screen, Orpheus provides a high-quality image output that matches what is currently
displayed on the screen. The size of the image also matches the size of the graph on the screen.
Figure 347
 To save an image of the graph to a file

1. Select, from the menu bar of a graph, File > Save graph as…
A save file dialog is displayed. The user has the option to change save location and filename. The user can also
select to save the image in three formats: jpg, bmp, and gif.
OR
2. Use the keyboard to type Ctrl + s.
3. A save file dialog is displayed. The user has the option to change save location and filename. The user can also
select to save the image in three formats: jpg, bmp, and gif.
 To place a copy of the graph image on the clipboard
1. Select, from the menu bar of a graph, File > Copy graph to clipboard
An audible tone is played to indicate successful copying of the graph image to the clipboard. The user can now
paste this image in other programs.
OR
2. Use the keyboard to type Ctrl + c.
An audible tone is played to indicate successful copying of the graph image to the clipboard. The user can now
paste this image in other programs.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Changing the Graph Scale
 To use the mouse to zoom into an area of interest
1. Use a Left-click – drag – release combination on the main graph area to draw a rectangle around the area of
interest.
Figure 348
The Graph changes scale to show just the area of interest. The vertical scales of any graphical side panel (Well Diagram,
Well Survey, or String(Cable)/Tool Diagram) are changed to match the graph’s vertical scale. Scrollbars become visible
to allow the user to shift the view vertically or horizontally.
Figure 349
OR
2. This action will also work from one of the graphical displays.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Use a Left-click – drag – release combination on the side panel (Well Diagram, Well Survey,
String(Cable)/Tool Diagram) to draw a rectangle around the area of interest.
Figure 350
The vertical scales of the graph and graphical side panel are changed to match the vertical range requested. A vertical
scrollbar becomes visible to allow the user to shift the view vertically.
Figure 351
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To zoom out and show all graphed data
1. Right-click in the graph area or on a graphical side panel (Well Diagram, Well Survey, String(Cable)/Tool
Diagram).
2. A menu list becomes visible.
Figure 352
3. Select Zoom Out

4. Orpheus will set the horizontal and vertical scale to allow all graphed data (including frozen curves) and graph
markups (text, line, or pointer) to be visible.
OR
5. If available, click the middle mouse button when the mouse is positioned over the graph or graphical side panel
(Well Diagram, Well Survey, or String(Cable)/Tool Diagram).
OR
7. Select, from the menu bar of a graph, View>Zoom Out.
OR
9. Use the keyboard to type Shift + F2.
markups (text, line, or pointer) to be visible
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To manually enter vertical and horizontal scale values
1. Right Click on the graph
2. A menu list appears.
Figure 353
3. Select a scale. The Plot scale dialog appears

4. Change any values and click OK
5. The graph scales to the user selection. The vertical scale of any graphical side panel (Well Diagram, Well
Survey, or String(Cable)/Tool Diagram will match the user’s vertical scale.
OR
6. Select from the menu bar of a graph, View > Scale
7. The Plot Scale dialog appears.
8. Change any or all values and click OK. The graph scales to the user selection. The verti vertical scale of any
graphical side panel (Well Diagram, Well Survey, or String(Cable)/Tool Diagram will match the user’s vertical
scale
Figure 354
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To shift a zoomed graph
1. Left-click and drag the graph’s vertical or horizontal scroll bars. The graph shifts in the desired direction.
OR
2. In the graph area, press and hold the right mouse button and drag toward whatever direction the user desires to
see. In other words, if the user has zoomed into a data curve near the surface and wishes to pan to see the same
curve at a lower depth, the user will right-press and drag down to show the curve further down in the well.
3. While panning, the cursor will change to a directional arrow and the graph will shift in the desired direction.
Figure 355
4. When the selected view is in position, release the right mouse button. The graph view stops at the current
location.
This panning feature allows the user to shift the graphed image in any direction beyond just
horizontal or vertical using the scroll bars. Panning also is available for the graphical side
panels (Well Diagram, Well Survey, String(Cable)/Tool Diagram), but only pans in the vertical
direction
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Graph Side Panels
The graph window has four sets of information or graphical displays that can be viewed alongside the main graph.
1. Legend – The Legend Panel lists all data curves (calculated or frozen) and provides a thumbnail of the curve
style so the user can visually match the curve from the legend to the curve on the main graph. The Legend also
lists Field Data symbols and other project specific shading areas as necessary.
2. The Legend provides values of each data curve at a given depth. See Legend Coordinates.
3. Well Diagram – The Well Diagram is a visual representation of the Well with some key features. The
String/Cable and Tool are drawn in the well at the calculated depth (See also String/Cable and Tool while
Tripping In and Out).
4. Well Survey – The Well Survey provides two data curves to graphically illustrate the well inclination and Dog-
Leg Severity (DLS). Note that the DLS data is scaled up by a factor of 10 so the graphical scale is similar to the
inclination.
5. String(Cable)/Tool Diagram – This diagram graphically illustrates the string or cable and any attached tool at
the calculated depth (See also String/Cable and Tool while Tripping In and Out). By default, minor differences
in width are exaggerated for clarity.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
 To select a side panel
1. Click the box beneath the side panel. The text on this box is the currently displayed side panel.
2. A menu list becomes available.
Figure 356
3. Select the desired side panel. The desired side panel is now displayed and the text in the box beneath the side
panel is updated to match the selected side panel
OR
4. Right-click in the side panel area
5. A menu list becomes available. The currently displayed side panel is selected in this list.
Figure 357
6. Select the desired side panel. The desired side panel is now displayed and the text in the box beneath the side
panel is updated to match the selected side panel
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Tracking Lines
Tracking lines are provided on the graph and the graphical side panels (Well Diagram, Well Survey, and
String(Cable)/Tool Diagram). These span from the main graph to the graphical side panels to allow the user to relate Well
or String/Wireline, or Tool features to the data curves.
Figure 358
Tracking Information
Tracking information is provided in a box at the mouse location when on the graph or the graphical side panels (Well
Diagram, Well Survey, and String(Cable)/Tool Diagram).
1. On the Graph, the information in the box is the current X and Y Coordinate in the format, “X, Y.” The Y
Coordinate is always depth, but the X Coordinate is dependent on the graph type selected.
2. On the Well Diagram, the information in the box is simply the Y Coordinate (depth).
3. On the Well Survey, the information in the box is the current X and Y Coordinate in the format, “X, Y.” The Y
Coordinate is depth and the X Coordinate indicates both Inclination degrees and Dog-Leg Severity x 10.
4. On the String(Cable)/Tool Diagram, the information in the box is the depth and other useful information as
illustrated below.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
String/Cable and Tool while Tripping In and Out
For some calculations (Run at Depth, Forces on String, etc.), the String/Cable and Tool are at a fixed position in the well,
but for the Tripping In and Out calculations, the value at any depth on a data curve is calculated when the bottom of the
String/Cable and Tool is at that depth. To help the user visualize this, the Well Diagram and String(Cable)/Tool Diagram
shift the depth of the String/Cable and Tool to match the mouse depth.
Figure 359 - Legend Coordinates
 To determine the value of any data curve at the mouse depth

1. Select the Legend (See Selecting a Side Panel below)
2. Move the mouse over the graph to the desired depth of interest.
Figure 360 - The Legend is updated with the values of each curve at the current mouse depth
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Graph Markups
At times it is convenient to visually add markers to the graph to point out areas of interest or concern. To accommodate
this, the user can add text and lines/pointers.
 To add Graph Markup Text to the graph
1. Select the from the icon menu bar.
2. A text properties dialog displays.
Figure 361
3. Select the text color, font, and alignment. (Select Save as Default if the user desires to have all new Markup
Text load with this color, font, and alignment.)
4. Type the desired text in the Text field.
5. Click OK.
The Markup Text is added to the graph area. The user can click and drag to move the text or click on one of the blue
handles around the text perimeter to resize the text field size.
Figure 362
___________________________________________________________________________________________
To retain markup text, ensure that the project is saved prior to closing the software
 To add Graph Markup Line or Pointer to the graph

1. Select the from the icon menu bar.
2. A Line/Pointer properties dialog displays.
Figure 363
3. Select the Line/Pointer color, type, width, and style. (Select Save as Default if the user desires to have all new
Markup Lines/Pointers load with this color, type, width, and style.)
4. Click OK.
5. The Markup Line/Pointer is added to the graph area. The user can click and drag to move the line/pointer or
click on one of the blue handles to resize or rotate.
Figure 364
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Deleting Graph Markups and Frozen Curves
After freezing a curve or adding Markup Text or Markup Lines/Pointers, the user may wish to delete them from the graph.
Note: Curves calculated by Orpheus (not frozen by the user) cannot be deleted, they can only be hidden.
 To delete a frozen curve or Markup from the graph.
For clarity in the steps below “item” refers to a frozen curve, Markup Text, or Markup Line/Pointer.
1. Click (to select) the item.
The item has blue handles displayed and may blink to indicate selection.
2. Right-click the item.
A menu list becomes visible.
Figure 365
3. Select Delete.
The item is deleted from the graph.
OR
5. Select the from the icon menu bar. The item is deleted from the graph.
OR
7. Use the keyboard and press the Delete key. The item is deleted from the graph.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
B | Coiled Tubing Forces Theory
Appendix B
Coiled Tubing Forces Theory
This section deals with tubing forces theory. The links point to paragraphs that cover each of the following topics in greater
detail.
1. “Sinusoidal Buckling”
2. “Helical Buckling”
3. “Lockup Theory”
4. “Effect of Curvature on Helical Buckling Load”
5. “Residual Bend and Friction Coefficients”
6. “Real Force vs. Effective Force”
7. “Force vs. Weight”
8. “Factors Affecting Weight”
9. “Capstan or Belt Effect”
10. “Free Fall”
11. “How to Get More Set Down Force”
12. “Torque”
13. “Finite Element Analysis”
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Sinusoidal Buckling
Imagine a straight CT string being pushed into a straight horizontal casing. For the initial distance, the CT remains straight,
lying nicely in the "trough" formed by the bottom of the casing. As the length of CT pushed into the casing increases, the
force required to push it increases. This force is equal to the total weight of the CT string in the casing multiplied by the
friction coefficient. As the length increases, the frictional drag increases, and thus the force required to push it increases.
When the force required to push the CT reaches a certain amount (load), the CT begins to "snake" in a sinusoidal fashion
back and forth across the bottom of the casing. This load is referred to as the "sinusoidal buckling load" or sometimes the
"snake buckling load." In drill pipe Tubing Forces Models (TFMs), this is often referred to as the "critical buckling load."
However, there is nothing "critical" about this mode of buckling. The period of the sine wave is very large (usually 30 to
100 ft), and, of course, its amplitude is no greater than the internal diameter of the casing. Thus, the bending that is
occurring is trivial. Sinusoidal buckling has no impact on the tubing forces calculation.
Helical Buckling
Imagine a straight CT string being pushed into a straight horizontal casing. The CT may form three portions. The first
portion of the CT will still be lying straight in the casing. The second portion, which has an axial load greater than the
sinusoidal bucking load, will lie in a sine wave in the bottom of the casing. In the third portion, the CT forms a helix inside
the casing. The CT begins to form this helix at the "helical buckling load (HBL)."
The period of the helix at the onset of helical buckling is large, and no significant bending stresses occur in the CT
material. However, at this point, the tubing forces calculation changes. As the helix is pushed into the casing, there are
additional wall contact forces due to the helix. These wall contact forces increase the friction with the wall of the casing,
causing less and less force to be transmitted downhole.
In a vertical well, the sinusoidal and helical buckling loads are small. Thus, buckling occurs with a small
amount of compression.
The helical and sinusoidal buckling loads may be calculated based on either theoretical “loading” or “unloading” values.
The loading values occur when the compressive load is increasing, and the pipe is going from straight to sinusoidal to
helical. The unloading values occur when the pipe begins already helically buckled, and the compressive load is decreased
until the pipe becomes sinusoidally buckled and then straight. The unloading values for the SSBL and HBL are smaller
than the loading values.
NOV CTES recommends using the unloading values because the smaller buckling loads are more
conservative (additional wall contact forces occur at smaller compressive loads)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Lockup Theory
Imagine a straight CT string being pushed into a straight horizontal casing. The CT may form three portions. First, there is
a straight portion up to the point where the sinusoidal buckling load is reached. This is followed by a portion which is
buckled into a sine wave, until the helical buckling load is reached. Finally, there is a portion of the CT which is buckled
into a helix. It is only in this third, helical portion for which additional wall contact forces are being generated.
If more force is applied at the surface to helically buckled CT, the wall contact forces increase faster than the transmitted
force, and lockup eventually occurs. Lockup is a "vicious circle": pushing on the CT increases the helical buckling, which
increases the wall contact forces, making it harder to push the CT.
No matter how hard the CT is pushed, no more than a certain amount of downhole force is achievable. Any additional CT
pushed into the casing only increases the helical bucking.
The following graph shows the general relationship between the downhole force and the set down weight at a specific
depth. The CT stays at a particular depth while more and more weight is applied at the surface, but less and less force
reaches the end of the tool string.
Downhole Force
Figure 366
The curve approaches a horizontal asymptote. Since the downhole force never reaches the asymptote, it is difficult to
determine exactly when the CT is locked up. Orpheus has two different lockup definitions it can use to determine when
the CT is locked up.
Effect of Curvature on Helical Buckling Load
Consider CT lying in a curved casing. The axial load applied to the CT causes it to "seat" itself in the "trough" formed by the
casing. As the axial load increases, the radial load pushing the CT into the seat increases. Thus, the axial load required to
cause the CT to pop out of the seat and form a helix is much greater than the helical buckling load for a straight hole.
Increasing the helical buckling load delays the onset of helical buckling, and thus delays the onset of lockup. Thus it could
be argued that curvature in the well is beneficial. However, curvature in the well also causes the belt effect, which increases
friction.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Residual Bend and Friction Coefficients
Bending that occurs to the CT at the reel and at the guide arch causes residual stresses in the CT material.
It was previously thought that the difference in the two friction coefficients (0.3 RIH, 0.25 POOH) in the well was due to
residual bend. However, some testing with straight pipe and pipe with residual bend performed by CTES for Mobil showed
that the two had the same friction. Other companies have done testing and claimed to have different results. The effect of
residual bend is not fully understood.
Even though the reason for the difference in the friction coefficients is not understood, using a friction coefficient of 0.3 for
RIH and 0.25 POOH has still proven to be accurate in many wells.
Real Force vs. Effective Force
Real force is the actual force on the pipe. It can be measured with a force measuring device, such as a strain gauge. The
true stress and stretch of the pipe results from the real force.
Effective force is the force on the pipe accounting for buoyant weight and drag, but ignoring changes in internal and
external pressure. Buckling and lockup are determined only by buoyant weight and are not affected by changes in internal
or external pressure. Because real force changes with internal and external pressure, it cannot be used for modeling
buckling and lockup. Instead, effective force must be used.
The relationship between real force and effective force is shown in the following equation.
Equation 2
Orpheus uses effective force, instead of real force, in its downhole calculations. The effective force is then converted into
real force only for stress and stretch calculations and for output purposes.
Force vs. Weight
The real force above the stripper is related to, but not equal to, the output of the weight sensor on the injector.
Real force above the stripper includes the effects of pressure, but omits reel back tension (RBT). However, the output of the
weight sensor omits the effects of pressure, but includes reel back tension.
Since effective force, by definition, does not include the effects of pressure (see Real Force vs. Effective Force ), weight can
be expressed simply as a combination of effective force
above the stripper and reel back tension. Orpheus uses this calculation to predict the weight.
Note that the force (real or effective) below the stripper does not include stripper friction.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Factors Affecting Weight
The diagram below shows how increasing each of the following factors affects the surface weight reading.
The diagram below shows how increasing each of the following factors affects the surface weight reading.
The effects of the friction coefficients and the stripper friction depend on the direction the pipe is moving
Figure 367
Capstan or Belt Effect
Assume that a section of CT is in tension when it passes around a curve in a well. The tension causes the CT to be pulled
against the inside of the curve. The greater the tension, the greater the radial load pushing the CT against the casing. This
radial load causes the friction with the casing to increase. This increased friction is known as the "capstan effect" or "belt
effect."
The same argument can be made if the CT is in compression. Now, the CT is pushed against the outside of the curve in the
well. Again, additional friction forces are generated which must be considered in a tubing forces calculation.
Thus, any curvature in a well, either in the inclination or the azimuth directions, causes additional friction which adversely
affects the movement of the CT into and out of a well.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Free Fall
An object (such as CT or a cable with a tool on the end) can fall freely to the end of a vertical well without being pushed. As
the deviation of a well increases, the falling object experiences more and more friction. If the deviation of the well is great
enough, friction prevents the object from falling into the well. The point at which an object no longer falls freely into a
well is a function of the friction coefficient of a well ( ) and its deviation angle (in radians – )
Equation 3
This equation yields the following plot. For points below the line, CT falls into the well. For points above the line, CT
must be pushed or pulled to reach further.
Figure 368
For a typical friction coefficient of 0.3 running in hole, CT will fall freely into a well with a deviation angle less than 73
degrees.
How to Get More Set Down Force
The job type determines the amount of set down force needed. Some additional force should be available as an extra safety
margin.
Some of the ways to get more set down force on the same string include:
1. Increase the buoyancy of the string by pumping it full of nitrogen.
2. Reduce friction by using lubricants or rollers on the tool string.
3. Use a downhole tractor.
4. Decrease the radial clearance by hanging a temporary liner or tubing string.
Some of the ways to get more set down force on a different string include:
1. Use a CT string with a thicker wall.
2. Use a CT string with a larger outside diameter.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Torque
Torque is a rotational force applied to the CT. It is typically created by a downhole motor. As torque travels up the length
of the CT, it decreases in magnitude due to friction from contact with the wellbore wall. If the downhole torque is small
enough and the wall contact force is great enough, the torque will not reach the surface.
In a vertical well, there is no wall contact force (unless the CT is buckled) and the full amount of torque is
transmitted up the CT.
To calculate the torque along the length of a string in Orpheus, enter the torque on end created by the drilling motor,
perform the run at measured depth calculation, and look at the torque graph.
Finite Element Analysis
For the most part, Orpheus uses what is known as a “soft-string” model. This type of model omits the bending stiffness of
the pipe. When a pipe is bent around a significant curve or dog leg, there are additional wall contact forces and, thus, there
is additional friction due to the bending stiffness of the pipe. In most wellbore applications, the additional friction due to
this bending is small and can be ignored. Cases in which this bending stiffness becomes significant include very severe
bends (such as elbows in a pipeline) and cases in which the pipe OD is close to the hole ID (such as running casing).
Orpheus uses a “stiff-string” Finite Element Analysis (FEA) model for the tool section of the string when using Tool
Model 2.0. This model does take the bending stiffness into consideration. Often the tools, such as perforating guns, are
significantly stiffer than the pipe which conveys them. They may also contain centralizers which could increase the wall
contact forces.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
C | Advanced Fluids-Model Options in Orpheus
Appendix C
Advanced Fluids-Model Options in Orpheus
The modeling/calculating of hypothetical fluid-hydraulics situations in Orpheus may be accomplished using the techniques
described here.
Fluids Model: Advanced Hydraulics Options
Hypothetical fluid-hydraulics situations may be modeled/calculated in Orpheus to determine the effects of differing
variables.
As stated in the Entering Project Options, the options set in the Advanced Project Options are reflected in the calculation-
parameter settings.
The options discussed in this appendix are available only with a Hydraulics-enabled access key. Contact
Us for additional information.
After clicking the Advanced Options button and progressing to the Project Preferences display screen (see Setting
advanced options for additional information), select Fluids Model tab. A display screen similar to the following
appears:
Figure 369
Within the red-box-highlighted portion of the above display screen, only the field Equivalent annual diameter is
consistently available regardless of the type of fluid used. Potentially available fields (dependent on fluid type) include:
1. Equivalent annular diameter

2. Temperature effects on viscosity (available for liquid fluid types only)
3. Drag reduction for Power Law fluids (available for the fluid rheology of Power Law only)
4. Multiphase flow model
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Modeling Examples
If the user simulates RIH and POOH calculations while freezing the resulting graph lines (see Freezing a Line on a Graph),
the following types of information may be obtained:
Figure 370 - Effect of Equivalent Annular Diameter
Effect of Correction Factor
See Fluid Correction Factors for additional information.
Figure 371
Effect of Temperature
To see the effect of temperature on viscosity, which is available for liquids only, change the fluid in the annulus to one for
which temperature effects are defined.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 372
Effect of Drag Reduction for Power Law Fluid
To see the effect of drag reduction for Power Law fluid, change the fluid in the annulus to a Power Law fluid type.
Figure 373
To model a multi-phase flow, select a multi-phase fluid type. The multiphase model controls which algorithm is used to
predict the flow of multiphase fluids. It affects the flow regime, liquid holdup, velocities, density, and pressure drop of
these fluids.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
D | Features and Effects Options in Orpheus
Appendix D
Features and Effects Options in Orpheus
As of publication date, this appendix describes the Orpheus Features and Effects settings related to:
1. Modeling the Effects of the NOV Downhole Agitator Tool (CT/JP)
2. Completing Jar Activation Calculations (WL)
3. Including Additional Normal Force in Calculations (WL)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Modeling the Effects of the NOV Downhole Agitator Tool (CT/JP)
The Orpheus tubing forces model provides an analysis of the potential mitigation of string/wellbore friction made available
by the Agitator tool.
The Agitator tool can mitigate a given amount of downhole friction (related to specific tool size, setup, and fluid pump
rates). This friction mitigation effect provided by the tool gradually attenuates along the length of the CT string, and in
normal situations a point is reached where there is no significant friction mitigation effect. From that point to surface, the
friction is calculated and applied as it would be without the presence of an Agitator tool.
Including the Effect of the Agitator Tool in Calculations
 To include the effect of the Agitator Tool in calculations
1. Select Options > Project Options from the menu bar on the Orpheus project display screen; then select Features and Effects
from the left-hand panel.
2. Click to toggle the Include Downhole Agitator option.
Figure 374
Enable the Agitator (to include its effect in downhole calculations) a few hundred feet
above lockup depth for fastest calculation times. See Calculating Lockup Depth and
Calculating Trip In and Trip Out for additional information concerning lockup depth
3. To set the Agitator tool specifications, select the ellipses ( ) associated with the
Include Downhole Agitator option.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The [Project Options > Features and Effects] Downhole Agitator display screen appears.
Figure 375
1. Input the Agitator settings (a friction-drag-reduction to flow-rate ratio of 13 lbf/(gal/min) is recommended for 2-
7/8" tools run in North America.1 Agitator tools may be set up for more or less aggressive friction reduction in
other regions of the world, and tools sizes other than 2-7/8" may have differing flow-rate ratios.
A flow rate of 120 gal/min is recommended for running the Agitator. The ratio of friction reduction multiplied by
the flow rate (13 lbf/(gal/min) times 120 gal/min) results in the friction reduction of 1,560 lbs.1
1. Click OK. The software exits the Project Options display screen and returns the user to the main Orpheus
project display screen.
Calculating Lockup Depth

 To calculate lockup depth
1. From the Orpheus project display screen, select the Calculate tab.
2. Underneath Downhole Conditions, input the Liquid Flow Rate as 120.0 gal/min.1
When calculating lockup depth or running Trip In and Out calculations, the flow rate should be set to the
1
value used to run the Agitator (120 gal/min recommended) , even if the job does not require a high flow
rate
 Kenneth Newman and Timm Burnett, Modeling the Affect of a Downhole Vibrator, SPE 121752, 2009 SPE/ ICoTA Coiled
Tubing and Well Intervention Conference and Exhibition, Woodlands, Texas, USA, 31 March–1 April 2009.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
a. The user may select the associated with Liquid Flow Rate to reveal the Fluid Flow dialog.
Figure 376
3. Click Calculate Maximum Depth.
Figure 377
The Maximum Depth dialog appears. In the case below, the Agitator effect is not enabled. Lockup occurs at 15,320 feet
during RIH.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 378
In the case below, the same downhole modeling scenario is used as above, but the Agitator effect is enabled. Lockup
occurs at 16,679 feet during RIH. Thus, the use of the Agitator tool under this set of downhole conditions delays the onset
of lockup by 1,359 feet.
Figure 379
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Calculating Trip In and Trip Out
 To calculate trip in and trip out
1. From the Orpheus project display screen, select the Calculate tab.
2. Underneath Downhole Conditions, input the Liquid Flow Rate as 120.0 gal/min.1
3. Click Trip In and Out.
In the case below, the Agitator effect is not enabled.
a. A Warning dialog appears
Figure 380
The coiled tubing encounters lockup conditions at 15,320 feet when the Agitator is not enabled.
a. Click OK to continue.
b. The adjusted Surface Weight vs. Depth dialog appears.
Figure 381
___________________________________________________________________________________________
In the case below, Lockup without agitator is 15320 ft. The Agitator effect is enabled for the depth range of 14,000 feet to
17,300 feet, so the calculation can proceed without further adjustment, and the coiled tubing can reach target depth.
Figure 382
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Completing Jar Activation Calculations (WL)
For Orpheus to perform a jar activation calculation, the tool string must contain a jar, and the option Include Jar
Activation Calculation in the Orpheus Features and Effects section of the Options tab must be checked.
 To complete jar activation calculations in Orpheus

1. Access the Tool Editor’s Tool Features functionality.
2. Set the tool to be involved in the jar activation calculation as a jar tool.
a. Set the associated Jar Firing Force Settings (see Setting Jar Tool Features (WL)).
Figure 383
3. In Orpheus, from the Project Options, select the Features and Effects right-pointing arrow, and click to check
Include Jar Activation Calculation.
Figure 384
4. Click the associated ellipses button to access the Jar Activation Settings dialog.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 385
a. In the Jar firing force in use field, set the jar firing force to a value between the Minimum and
Maximum Firing Force Setting shown in the dialog, and click OK.
5. Select the Calculate tab.
Figure 386
___________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Select Run In and Out.
Surface Weight vs. Depth is calculated.
Figure 387
7. Click (to check) Jar Activation Limit, and click OK.
Figure 388
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Including Additional Normal Force in Calculations (WL)
Application of additional normal force is specified in the Tool Editor (see Using Additional Normal Force in
Calculations) and is applied in Orpheus.
Figure 389
Upon application of additional normal force, effective force increases as

Additional Normal Force * Well Friction.
 To include additional normal force in calculations
1. If the same additional-normal-force data is desired for the RIH operation and the POOH operation, complete the
following:
a. Select the Calculate tab from the Orpheus project display screen.
b. Click (to check) the box Use same data for RIH & POOH.
The display screen changes from showing separate parameters for RIH and POOH to showing one set of
parameters.
c. Enter/update available parameters, as needed.
2. Select Options > Project Options from the menu bar on the Orpheus project display screen; then select Features
and Effects from the left-hand panel. Click to check Include Additional Normal Force.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 390
3. Click the associated ellipses button to specify Depth Range.

a. If the user chose to use the same data for RIH and POOH as described in Step 1, above, the Project
Options display screen appears as shown below. Note that only one Direction/Depth Range is available
for edit.
Figure 391
b. If the user chose to use different data for RIH and POOH as described in Step 1, above, the Project
Options display screen appears as shown below. Note that separate Direction/Depth Range information is
available for edit.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 392
When using additional normal force, the resulting effective force becomes more positive when pulling out of
the hole, and more negative when running into the hole.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
E | Coiled Tubing Fatigue Models
Appendix E
Coiled Tubing Fatigue Models
This appendix describes the coiled tubing fatigue models available, their relative calculation methodologies, and their
comparative potential for use in the field.
Coiled Tubing Fatigue and the Achilles Fatigue Models
Historically, Cerberus’ Achilles 4 fatigue models used a non-linear method of calculation to determine the number of
cycles to coiled tubing (CT) failure.
Non-linear calculations were (and still are) used because the CT fatigue does not occur in a straight-line
– or linear – progression. Rather, fatigue on the CT occurs as a non-linear progression due to the CT’s diametrical growth
as the tubing is subjected to repeated bending and straightening events, or “bend cycling.”
By way of explanation, when the CT is bent and straightened with high internal pressure, its diameter increases (thereby
increasing strain and stress) and its wall thins (thereby increasing stress). Bending strain occurs on the radius [in relation to
a cross-section] of the CT, as well as on the radius of bending related to the CT’s course over the CT reel and the
gooseneck (guide arch). The resulting diametrical growth of the CT has the effect of exacerbating its fatigue life.
The Achilles 5 models available in Cerberus v11.5 (and greater) use a linear approach to fatigue life calculations. Though
using a linear approach may seem counter-intuitive, since the actual fatigue on the CT occurs in a non-linear fashion,
comparisons have shown that final fatigue results for the two approaches are similar. These comparisons have also shown
that it is beneficial to model this non-linear fatigue in a linear manner from a pipe-management perspective.
Beginning with Cerberus v11.5 and going forward, both the non-linear Achilles 4 models and the linear Achilles
5 models are available so that users can choose the method of greatest usefulness for their situation.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Comparing the Linear and the Non-linear Models
Methodology behind the Non-linear Models
The Achilles 4 models are based on fatigue and plasticity theory combined with empirical data from two types of tests:
1) CT-sample fatigue tests on a fatigue test machine, and 2) Strain-controlled tests on axial test coupons cut out of the CT.
These Achilles 4 models typically calculate the cycles (or trips) to “crack initiation,” though the option to calculate to
“fracture” is also available. Crack initiation is the point at which cracking should first begin in the CT wall. Fracture is the
point at which a crack propagates through the CT wall, allowing fluid within the CT to escape.
Methodology behind the Linear Models
The linear fatigue calculation in Achilles 5 does not take into account any increased diameter or decreased wall
thickness. This is in large part due to the fact that typically, when a fatigue test is conducted, all of the bending
cycles are performed at the same internal pressure using the same bending radius.
The Achilles 5 models calculate the cycles (or trips) to fracture, with no option available to calculate to crack initiation.
The Achilles 5 models available in Cerberus v11.5 (and greater) are based less on fatigue theory and more on mathematical
statistical techniques combined with empirical data obtained from fatigue test machines.
Advantages of the Linear Model
The linear model has the following advantages:

1. The linear calculation of percent life used may be more useful to field operations, because it provides the
answer to the question: What is the number of remaining trips?
2. Both the non-linear and linear fatigue calculations reach the end of fatigue life (end point/fracture) at
approximately the same time. However, when the non-linear fatigue life is determined to be 80 percent (the
typical limit), the linear useful life can be significantly greater than 80 percent.
Also, when one-half (50 percent) of the linear-model trips are determined as being complete, a significantly
lower percentage of the non-linear fatigue trips is determined as being complete.
3. A single safety factor is applied in the linear calculation, based on statistical principles. Here, a statistical
technique known as tolerance interval, based on the scatter in the fatigue test data, is used to calculate a
“conservative fatigue limit” for the Model Recommended Replacement (MRR).
The user may calculate a conservative limit different from the MRR by changing the percent
confidence/population. A more cautious limit would be calculated if the user increased the percent
confidence/population – say from 95 percent to 98 percent.
As mentioned, in the non-linear model a calculation of 80 percent of crack initiation is used as the limit to which the CT can
be safely used. Though additional safety factors are in place for the non-linear model (the minimum wall thickness, the
maximum diameter, and an additional “application factor” set by the user), these multiple safety factors can render the data
less interpretable due to the factors’ varied effects on the model. The single safety factor used in the linear model provides
results that are more easily understood when compared to the multiple safety factors used in the non-linear model.
4. The linear model is more transparent:
a. Manufacturers’ fatigue test data is used to create the models.
b. Statistical information in the model is provided to service companies.
5. Weld-fatigue testing currently underway by manufacturers will be utilized in the future in special linear models
focusing solely on weld fatigue.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Challenges of the Non-linear Model
1. In projects run using the non-linear model, fatigue accumulation is inconsistent when data returned for early
jobs (low fatigue) is compared to data returned for later jobs (high fatigue).
2. The safety factor in non-linear fatigue models is non-conservative. As previously described, 80 percent of non-
linear life would be more than 80 percent of the number of cycles to failure.
3. When comparing the two model types, the linear percentage of useful life is more helpful in field operations.
The linear model answers operators’ questions, such as:
a. How many jobs can this string perform?
b. How many jobs remain for this string before retiring the string? The non-linear model does not provide
this answer. However, the linear model provides information similar to: If fatigue life is 35 percent and the
retirement limit is 70 percent, the string has done half the number of jobs it will be able to perform.
Examples of Non-linear Fatigue Compared to Linear Fatigue
Figure 393 - Non-linear vs. Linear Fatigue Points
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Example from the Field – Last Job
Non-linear string fatigue life in the last job of a group shows significantly increased fatigue accumulation on this job.
Figure 394
Linear string fatigue life on the last job of a group shows a more gradual increase in fatigue accumulation.
Figure 395
___________________________________________________________________________________________
F | Entering Project Options
Appendix F
Entering Project Options
Entering Project Options
Project-option settings provide input for, and affect the outcomes of calculations, so it’s important to enter these accurately.
 To enter project options
Access project options one of two ways:
1. Select Options > Project Calculation Options from the Orpheus menu bar when a project is open.
OR
2. Select the Calculate tab from the Orpheus project display screen; then, click the Project Calculation Options
button in the upper far-right-hand panel.
3. The Project Options display screen appears. This screen is divided into three separate areas: left panel, right
panel, and bottom panel.
Figure 396
The Project Options display screen defaults to the Basic Project Options view (see the extreme top portion of the
left panel in the above figure). Here, within the left-hand panel, the user sees three tab- like, selectable choices:
Basic Options (default), Features and Effects, and Calculation Resolution.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4. From the default Basic Options tab, input the following:
a. Yield safety factor (CT, JP)
Coiled tubing or jointed pipe is considered to be at its working limit when the stress (axial stress or von-
Mises stress) at any point in the string reaches this percentage of the material yield strength. Yield strength
is a property of the steel and is usually expressed in kpsi. The yield safety factor is 80% by default.
Modifying this value causes all calculations in Orpheus that are limited by yield strength of the string to
be changed. An example is the “Yield limit” curve on the Surface Weight graph of the Trip in and Out
calculation.
b. Safe Operating Load (% of breaking strength) (WL)
Wireline is considered to be at its operating limit when the tension at any point in the cable reaches this
percentage of the cable breaking strength. The safe operating load is 50% by default. Modifying this value
causes all calculations in Orpheus that are limited by breaking strength of the cable to be changed. An
example is the “Safe Operating Load” curve on the Surface Weight graph of the Run In and Out
calculation.
c. Safety margin for tractor pull (WL)
This is used in calculating the minimum required tractor pull to help the toolstring run in-hole.
Theoretically, required tractor pull is the minimum pull that ensures the entire length of the wireline is in
tension. However, sometimes it is preferable to keep the tension above a minimum positive value. Safety
margin for tractor pull is this threshold and should not be less than zero.
Note the difference between the required pull and the required pull with safety margin usually is not just
the value of the safety margin. Instead, the program uses the safety margin value as the threshold for
wireline compression. In other words, the program searches for the required minimum pull force so that
the tension along the wireline is not less than the safety margin value.
d. Real Axial Force Monitoring (JP)
i. Enable real axial force monitoring (JP)
ii. Distance from end of string (JP)
These two options, working together, allow the user to monitor real axial force at a specific position from
the bottom of the string. Note the word “real” does not mean “field-measured” forces (i.e., weight
indicator readings), but rather the axial force including the effect of any fluid pressure. When the option is
selected and the distance from end is specified (say, xxx ft), the graph window displaying the Trip In and
Out results will contain a graph called “Real Axial Force at xxx ft from End of String.”
___________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Select Features and Effects; click (to check) any of the following to activate:
a. Include Disconnect Limit (CT)
Though intended primarily for wireline mode, users can utilize this feature to model the CT connector
and/or shear/pin type disconnects. When enabled, surface weight and the connector tension
corresponding to disconnect limits can be calculated from the graph- window display for Trip In and Out.
b. Include Weak Point (WL)
Though intended primarily for wireline mode, users can utilize this feature to model the CT connector
and/or shear/pin type disconnects. When enabled, surface weight and cablehead tension corresponding to
weak point limits can be calculated from the graph-window display for Trip In and Out.
c. Include ‘Buckled Production Tubing’ Effect (CT, JP, WL)
By selecting this option, the user is able to simulate intervention in buckled production tubing. In order to
include the effect of buckled production tubing in Orpheus calculations, the user must first run the Packer
and Completion Analysis and then use the Tool Passage analysis (inside the Packer and Completion
Analysis) to update the Orpheus well with the buckled production tubing configuration.
d. Include Additional Tortuosity (CT, JP, WL)
Select this option to apply macro-tortuosity and/or micro-tortuosity to openhole or wherever tortuosity is
present.
Macro-tortuosity can occur due to directional drilling system steering, deviation principle, or any
additional unwanted vibrations. An example is the slide-rotary pattern seen when using steerable mud
motors in horizontal sections. The macro-tortuosity model in the current Orpheus applies sinusoidal
variation of well inclination and azimuth over a period length.
The typical value of a macro-tortuosity period is between 100 and 500 feet.
Micro-tortuosity is defined as the tortuosity that occurs on a much smaller scale as compared to the
macro-tortuosity that represents the difference in dogleg severity between the planned well survey and
the final well survey. Therefore, micro tortuosity will not normally be observed in conventional survey
data. The primary source of micro tortuosity is borehole spiraling, where the borehole axis resembles a
helix instead of a straight line.
The typical value of micro-tortuosity period is between 5 and 15 feet.
If both (macro- and micro-tortuosity) are selected, and if overlap occurs, then only micro-tortuosity is
applied
e. Include Jar Activation Calculation (WL)

Select this option to enable the calculation of surface weight and cablehead tension corresponding to low-
setting and high-setting jar firing forces, respectively. The option is available only if the toolstring
contains a jar.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
f. Include Downhole AgitatorTM (CT, JP)
Select this option to include friction mitigation due to the gentle pulsation of the pipe provided by the
presence of a downhole pulsation device (like the NOV Downhole Agitator™ tool). The friction
mitigation effect gradually attenuates along the length of the CT/JP string and a point is reached where
there is no significant friction mitigation effect. The model used for this analysis finds that point, and
from that point upward the friction is calculated and applied as it would be without the presence of an
Agitator tool.
The user provides the value of the ratio of friction drag reduction to flow rate, which (together with the
current flow rate in the CT/JP string) is used to determine the total amount of friction force that the
Agitator tool should remove. At a flow rate of 120 gal/min, a ratio of 13 lbf/(gal/min) yields 1,560 lbf of
friction removed, which agrees with experience documented in the technical paper of SPE 121752.
g. Include Additional Normal Force (WL)
h. Include Tubing Collapse (CT, JP) - ellipses button launches collapse settings form.
Select this option to instruct Orpheus to check for standard tubing collapse criteria when modeling in
conditions of excess annular pressure and axial tension. Output is the collapse factor in the graph window
(graph and modeled data) display for running Trip In and Out.
Click the ellipses ( ) associated with any item to see/input additional options for that item’s effect on
calculations.
6. Select Calculation Resolution; input/select settings to adjust the calculation resolution when modeling complex
cases, such as passage of a long toolstring through a small downhole restriction.
a. Maximum RIH-POOH depth increment (CT, JP, WL)
This depth increment is used as the maximum increment in forming the depth array for tripping
calculation.
b. Vary depth increment with well geometry (CT, JP, WL)
Choose this option to insure that the tripping simulation depths coincide with all constrictions and
expansions in the wellbore. This can be a crucial factor in the presence of significant annular flow or high
dogleg severity.
c. Allow secondary depth increment (CT, JP, WL)
i. Secondary depth increment
ii. Start depth
iii. End depth
A secondary depth increment may be specified for a region of the well. This can provide a greater density
of simulation values where needed without significantly increasing total calculation run-time.
d. Maximum calculation length (CT, JP, WL)
Orpheus divides the pipe/cable and the toolstring/BHA into segments to perform forces calculations while
the toolstring/BHA is at a specific depth. The length of the segments will not exceed this maximum
calculation length.
Advanced Options set the calculation parameters
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting Advanced Options/Calculation Parameters
As mentioned above, Advanced Options set the calculation parameters.

 To set advanced options
1. Click the Advanced button within the lower left-hand panel of the Basic Project Options view. The Advanced
Project Options view of the Project Options display screen appears.
Figure 397
The Basic button points back to the Basic Project Options
2. From the default Advanced Options tab, input the following:

a. Stress (CT, JP, WL)
b. Axial stress
c. Von-Mises stress
i. Include bending stress (von-Mises)
Axial stress is caused by the real axial force applied to the pipe or the cable. Von-Mises stress is
based on the combination of the three principle stresses (axial stress, radial stress, and hoop
stress) and the shear stress (if torque is present). Usually, if wellhead pressure and/or
pressure loss (in the pipe or annulus) is high, then von-Mises stress should be selected since
in these situations radial stress and hoop stress arehigh.
The bending stress mentioned in the option is the additional bending stress caused by the curved
section of the wellbore.
ii. Tool yield safety factor (WL)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
d. Enable torque calculations (CT, JP)
When this option is selected, users can specify torque on end from the Calculate tab.
i. Allow rotation from surface
When this option is selected, users can specify surface rotation speed from the Calculate tab.
e. CT Options (CT)
i. Use effective wall thickness (CT)
Effective wall thickness is defined as minimum wall thickness less wall reduction. When
enabled, tubing internal diameter is calculated as nominal ID less double of effective wall
thickness.
ii. Catastrophic buckling safety factor (CT)
This safety factor is used in calculating the catastrophic buckling load, which equals the
theoretical buckling load multiplied by the safety factor.
Enter a lower percentage number here for a higher safety factor.
f. BHA/Toolstring
i. Allow snubbing calculation
Click to check this option to use BHA/toolstring dimensions and properties for tool entry and exit
calculations near surface.
3. Select the Fluids Model tab; input [or alter] information, or click (to check) toggle boxes as needed:
a. Pressure calculations (CT, JP)
The user can select “static pressure” or “circulating pressure.” When “static pressure” is selected, the
fluid is not flowing and no hydraulics calculation is made. When “circulating pressure” is selected, all
pressure loss and fluid forces (shear drag, lift force, and form drag) are calculated and are used as input to
the tubing forces model calculation.
b. Pipe surface (CT, JP, WL)
i. Cable roughness (WL)
ii. Inside pipe roughness (CT, JP)
Users can select “ignore roughness” or “enter roughness.” When “enter roughness” is selected, the user
must input the roughness values for inside the pipe and annulus, respectively. Roughness has no effect on
laminar flow but is involved in pressure loss calculation for turbulent flow conditions.
In this version of the software, pipe roughness is ignored for power law fluids and foam models.
c. Annulus (CT, JP, WL)
d. Eccentricity (CT, JP, WL)
Eccentricity equals zero for a pipe centered in the well and equals one when it is fully eccentered. This
setting only affects the fluid drag calculation. A tool (or cable or pipe) in the center of the well
experiences greater fluid drag than when it is lying against the wall. Hence, for worst-case planning
purpose, an eccentricity of zero is recommended.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
e. Equivalent annular diameter (CT, JP, WL)
This option is used to select the calculation method used for determining the equivalent pipe diameter.
Annular fluid flow calculations are performed by calculating a pipe diameter that would give equivalent
pressure-drop values. Equivalent annular diameter is defined so that friction calculation equations for
pipe flows can be extended for annular geometry. In general, the equivalent diameter for annular flows can
be represented as De
= f (D2, D1), where D2 and D1 are external and internal diameters of the annulus.
The common approach is to use the hydraulic diameter, where De = D2 – D1. However, other
definitions of the equivalent diameter exist and several have also been provided in Orpheus.
f. Use correction factor in pressure drop (CT, JP, WL)
i. Fluid (uneditable) (CT, JP, WL)
ii. Correction factor (uneditable) (CT, JP, WL)
This option allows the user to enable or disable the correction factor that is defined for each fluid in
Fluid Editor. For ease of use, the correction factor of the currently selected fluid is displayed on- screen.
A correction factor of 1 means that the calculated friction pressure will not be modified. A correction
factor of 0.6 means that only 60% of the calculated friction pressure drop will be used in the pressure
profile.
g. Temperature effects on viscosity (CT, JP, WL)
This option allows the user to enable or disable the effect of temperature on the viscosity of the fluid. For
this option to function properly, the fluid must have its temperature properties defined in Fluid Editor.
When enabled, the user-entered viscosity profile, instead of constant viscosity, is used in hydraulics
calculation.
The option is only for fluids of liquid type.
h. Drag reduction for power law fluid (CT)
Many polymer fluids, such as guar, xanthan, PHPA, and HEC and surfactant-based fluids exhibit
significant drag reduction under turbulent flow conditions. As a result, the traditional Dodge- Metzner
correlation overestimates pressure loss of turbulent flow. For these fluids, the effect of drag reduction
should be included. This option allows the user to model this effect.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Select the Force Calculation Model tab; then click (to toggle or check) toggle boxes as needed:
a. Tool / BHA Model
i. Tool model v1.0 – v1.0 represents the tool as a simple beam element and applies standard
equations for beam deflection. For complex tool strings with variable geometry, v1.0 must apply
some approximations to average the contact forces due to bending. (CT, JP, WL)
b. Tool model v2.0 – v2.0 is more sophisticated and analytically exact because it applies an FEA-based
approach, which accounts for the specific geometry and stiffness of each tool segment and the radial
clearances in the wellbore. It is the recommended model for complex tool strings, although it requires
more computation time. (CT, JP, WL)
c. Lockup Model (CT, JP)
i. Lockup model v1.0 – Lockup assumed to occur when string yields in compression.
ii. Lockup model v2.0 – Lockup assumed to occur when weight transfer from surface to end of
string is less than specified amount (recommended).
iii. Helical Buckling Load
iv. Post-buckled unloading
v. Pre-buckled loading
There are two ways to define helical buckling load. Chen and Cheatheam (SPE 19176) derived a
transition force limit between helical and sinusoidal buckling in an inclined well. However,
subsequent research (see SPE 29462) has established that a greater compressive force limit is
actually required for sinusoidally buckled tubing to snap into a full helix configuration. Thus, the
lower Chen & Cheatham limit can be understood as a post-buckled unloading limit, whereas the
higher buckling load is a pre-buckled loading limit.
Both are realistic in certain circumstances. However, the post-buckled unloading limit tends to be
a conservative assumption.
d. Stiff String Model – Orpheus includes a stiff string model, which approximates the bending stiffness
effects for pipe/tubing in curved well segments. When enabled, Orpheus automatically switches to the
stiff string model based on the minimum dogleg severity parameter specified here. (A related bending
model is applied to the BHA separately.) (CT, JP)
i. Include stiff string model in forces calculations
 Minimum dogleg severity for stiff string calcs
5. Select the Wireline tab; input [or alter] information, or click (to check) toggle boxes as needed (WL):
a. Define ‘compression’ at
Compression, by conventional definition, begins at zero cable tension. However, to minimize the risk
of compression occurring, the user may prefer to include an additional safety factor by modeling the
job using a higher compression threshold.
b. Weak point safety factor
The purpose of the weak point safety factor is to avoid premature release of the wireline. It prevents
utilization of the full weak point low load limit rating on the wireline when trying to free stuck tools from
the wellbore.
c. Maximum allowed speed RIH
This user-input number provides a realistic limit on the reported speed to avoid non-sensical modeling
results.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
The model can calculate the speed at which the fluid drag acting on the tool exceeds the downward pull,
causing the tool to move slower than the speed at which cable is being spooled into the well. The result
may be bird caging of the cable above the tool. This is more likely to occur in situations where there are
tight clearances between the tool and tubing or casing (for example, when running a packer or junk
basket). In other situations with greater clearance, there may be no such practical limit to the cable speed,
and the calculated speed reported by the model would be unrealistically high.
d. Use effective axial force to calculate stretch
When this option is enabled, wireline stretch is calculated based on effective axial force instead of real
axial force. Theoretically, strain (and therefore stretch) should be calculated using real axial force. Note
the word “real” does not mean “field-measured” forces (i.e. weight indicator readings); rather, it means
the axial force including the effect of any fluid pressure. This option is provided based on reports from
the field, indicating that in some cases stretch data is actually a closer match to that calculated using
effective axial force, with fluid pressure effects excluded.
e. Calculate buoyant weight based on weight in water
i. Weight in air (un-editable)
ii. Weight in water (un-editable)
The weight in water value can be used to improve the calculation of wireline buoyant weight. When the
option is selected, Orpheus uses the values of weight in air and weight in water to back-calculate an
equivalent hydraulic diameter of the wireline. Then the equivalent hydraulic diameter (instead of the
nominal diameter) is used to calculate the buoyant weight and axial force.
f. Drum Crush
i. Drum crush threshold
ii. Drum crush caution
iii. Drum crush warning
Specific wirelines are crush-resistant and should have higher drum crush values than standard wireline.
Drum crush may occur if cable being POOH at high tension is spooled onto the drum on top of cable that
was spooled at a much lower tension. Orpheus predicts RIH and POOH tensions and can warn the user
when one value is much larger than the other.
Threshold: minimum tension percentage of cable breaking strength at which cable damage due to
crushing may occur.
Caution: occurs when threshold is exceeded and POOH tension is this multiple greater than RIH tension.
Warning: occurs when threshold is exceeded and POOH tension is this multiple greater than RIH tension.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting Project-option Defaults
1. Select the Save as Defaults button in any preference-group dialog to retain user-defined properties as defaults
(properties that are used for all new projects in Orpheus).
2. Upon re-accessing the preference-group dialog for future projects, select Use Defaults to populate related fields
with previously saved default properties.
3. OR
4. Select Use Cerberus Defaults to populate all the fields within any dialog with Cerberus default- property
information.
The buttons described above pertain to all advanced options; not just the options visible to the user.
Hypothetical fluid-hydraulics situations may be modeled/calculated in Orpheus to determine the effects of

differing variables. Please see the appendix Advanced Fluids-model Options in Orpheus for additional
information
___________________________________________________________________________________________
G | Suggested Readings
Appendix G
Suggested Readings
1. “Suggested Readings on Fatigue”

2. “Suggested Readings on Forces”
3. “Suggested Readings on Limits”
4. “Suggested Readings on Hydraulics”
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Suggested Readings on Fatigue
1. Newman, Kenneth R, P.E., SPE, KNewman Engineering, “Development of a New CT Life Tracking Process,”
SPE paper, SPE 163884, SPE/ICoTA Coiled Tubing & Well Intervention Conference & Exhibition, The
Woodlands, Texas, USA, 26-27 March 2013.
2. Brown, P., and Dickerson, J. L., “Development and Use of an Analytical Model to Predict Coiled Tubing
Diameter Growth,” SPE 38409, 2nd SPE/ICoTA North American Coiled Tubing Roundtable, Montgomery, TX,
April 1997.
3. Brown, P.A.: “Coiled Tubing Fatigue Modelling and Software Development”, PNEC Coiled Tubing Technology
and Applications, February 6-8, 1995.
4. Brown, P.A.: “CT Life Modelling and Tracking”, World Oil 3rd International Conference and Exhibition on CT
Technology, Houston TX, March 13-16, 1995.
5. Brown, P.A.: “Use of Fatigue Test Machine to Investigate Coiled Tubing Diameter Growth”, World Oil 2nd
International Conference and Exhibition on Coiled Tubing, Amsterdam, June 1994.
6. Kane, R. and Cayard, M., "Factors Affecting CT Serviceability," CoiledTubing.
7. Koper, M.G.M., Tan, S., and Rosen, P., "Full-Scale, Low-Cycles Fatigue Tests with 2-in Coiled Tubing and an
Automatic Coiled Tubing Inspection and Monitoring System," SPE 38415, 2nd North American Coiled Tubing
Roundtable, Montgomery, TX April 1997.
8. Newman, K. and Allcorn, M., "CT in High Pressure Wells," SPE Annual Technical Conference, SPE 24793,
October 1993.
9. Newman, K. and Newburn, D.: "Coiled Tubing Life Modelling," SPE paper 22820, 66th Annual Technical
Conference and Exhibition, Dallas, October 1991.
10. Newman, K., Brown, P., Van Arnam, D., Wolhart, S.: ”Analysis of Coiled Tubing Welding Techniques,” SPE
36346, SPE/ICoTA 1st North American Coiled Tubing Roundtable, Montgomery, TX, February 1996.
11. Newman, K., Brown, P.: "Development of a Standard Coiled-Tubing Fatigue Test,"SPE 26539, SPE Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition, Houston, October 1993.
12. Newman, K.: "Determining the Working Life of a Coiled Tubing String," Offshore, December 1991.
13. Quigley, M. S., Stone, L.C., “The Benefits of Real-Time Coiled Tubing Diameter Measurements” SPE 46040
3rd Annual SPE/ICoTA North American Coiled Tubing Roundtable, April 15-16, 1998.
14. Smith, Lawrence W., "Methods of Determining the Operational Life of Individual Strings of Coiled Tubing,"
Proceedings at the SPE Workovers and Well Intervention Seminar, November 16, 1989, Aberdeen, Scotland.
15. Tipton, S.M. & Brown, P.A.: “Monitoring Coiled Tubing Fatigue Life”, World Oil 2nd International Conference
on Coiled Tubing Operations, Houston TX, March 28-31, 1994.
16. Tipton, Steven M. and Dale A. Newburn, "Plasticity and Fatigue Damage Modeling of Severely Loaded
Tubing," 1st ASTM Symposium on Advances in Fatigue Lifetime Predictive Techniques, San Francisco, CA,
April 1990.
17. World Oil, Coiled Tubing Handbook.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Suggested Readings on Forces
1. McSpadden, A., and Newman, K., “Development of a Stiff String Forces Model for Coiled Tubing,” SPE 74831,
2002 SPE/ICoTA Coiled Tubing Roundtable, April 2002.
2. McSpadden, A., and Brown, P., “Field Validation of 3-Dimensional Drag Model for Tractor and Cable Conveyed
Well Intervention,” SPE 71560, 2001 SPE Annual Technical Conference & Exhibition, 30 September - 3
October 2001.
3. Newman, K., and McSpadden, A., “Intervention in Wells with Buckled Production Tubing,” SPE 64501, 2000
SPE / ICoTA Coiled Tubing Conference and Exhibition, April 2000.
4. Newman, K., and Ackers, M., Stein, D., “Rotation of Coiled Tubing,” SPE 60737, 2000 SPE/ ICoTA Coiled
Tubing Conference and Exhibition, April 2000.
5. Newman, K., “Coiled Tubing Stretch and Stuck Point Calculations,” SPE 54458, SPE/ICoTA Coiled Tubing
Conference and Exhibition, May 1999.
6. Adrichem, W. and Newman, K.: "Validation of Coiled-Tubing Penetration Predictions in Horizontal Wells,"
SPE paper 24765, 67th Annual Conference and Exhibition, Washington D.C., October 1992.
7. Gu, H., Newman, K., Hauglund, L.: "Analysis of Slack-off Force Transmitted Downhole in Coiled Tubing
Operations," SPE paper 26511, SPE Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition, Houston, October 1993.
8. Newman, K., “Coiled Tubing Forces and Stresses Modelling Improvements”, 2nd ICoTA/SPE European CT
Roundtable, October 1995.
9. Newman, K., Aasen, J.: “Catastrophic Buckling of Coiled Tubing in the Injector” 3rd North American Coiled
Tubing Roundtable, Houston, TX. April 15-16, 1998.
10. Newman, K., Corrigan, M. and Cheatham, J.: "Safely Exceeding the Critical Buckling Load in Highly Deviated
Holes," SPE paper 19229, Offshore Europe, Aberdeen, September 1989.
11. Newman, K., Sathuvali, U.B., and Wolhard, S., "Elongation of Coiled Tubing During its Life," SPE paper
38408, 2nd North American Coiled Tubing Roundtable, Montgomery, TX. April, 1997
12. Palmer, R., Newman, K., Reaper, A.: "Developments in Coiled Tubing BOP Ram Design," OTC Paper 7876,
Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, May 1995.
13. Quigley, M. S., "Advanced Technology for Laboratory Measurements of Drilling Fluid Friction
Coefficient," SPE 19537, SPE Annual Technical Conference, San Antonio, TX, October 8-11, 1989.
14. Quigley, M. S., A. K. Dzialowski, and M. Zamora: "A Full-Scale Wellbore Friction Simulator," IADC/SPE
19958, IADC/SPE Drilling Conference, Houston, TX, February 27-March 2, 1990.
15. Quigley, M. S., D. B. Lewis, and R. S. Boswell: "Brief: Field Measurements of Casing Tension Forces," SPE
30138, Journal of Petroleum Technology, February 1995, pp. 127-8.
16. Quigley, M. S., D. B. Lewis, and R. S. Boswell: "Field Measurements of Casing Tension Forces," SPE 28326,
SPE Annual Technical Conference, New Orleans, LA, September 25-8, 1994.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Suggested Readings on Limits
1. McSpadden, A., Newman K., “Modified CT Limits Analysis for Practical Well Intervention Design, ”SPE
74828, 2002 SPE/ICoTA Coiled Tubing Conference and Exhibition, April 2002.
2. Brown, P., and Dickerson, J. L., “Development and Use of an Analytical Model to Predict Coiled Tubing
Diameter Growth,” SPE 38409, 2nd SPE/ICoTA North American Coiled Tubing Roundtable, Montgomery, TX,
April 1997.
3. Craig, S. and Maroli, R., "Development of a 10,000 psi Working Pressure Coiled Tubing Unit," 2nd
International Conference & Exhibition on Coiled Tubing, Amsterdam, The Netherlands, June 1994.
4. Newman, K., Sathuvalli, U., Wolhart, S.: "Defining Coiled Tubing Limits - A NewApproach,” OTC 8221, 28th
Annual OTC, Houston, May 1996.
5. Newman, K.: "Coiled Tubing Pressure and Tension Limits," SPE paper 23131, Proceedings from Offshore
Europe 91, Aberdeen, September 1991.
6. Newman, K.: "Collapse Pressure of Oval Coiled Tubing," SPE paper 24988, European Petroleum Conference,
Cannes France, November 1992.
7. Timoshenko, S.P. and Gere, J.M. Theory of Elastic Stability, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, NY 1961.
8. van Adrichem, W.P., Gordon, D.G., and Newlands, D.J., "Development and Utilization of a Coiled Tubing
Equipment Package for Work in High Pressure Wells," OTC paper 7874, Offshore Technology Conference,
Houston, TX, May 1995.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Suggested Readings on Hydraulics
Multiphase Flow Readings
1. Rao, B., “Friction Factors for Turbulent Flow of Non-Newtonian Fluids in CoiledTubing,” 2002 SPE / ICoTA
Coiled Tubing Conference and Exhibition, April 9-10, 2002
2. Gu, H., Walter, I.C., Stein, D., “Designing Under- and Near Balanced Coiled Tubing Drilling by Use of
Computer Simulations,” SPE 56864 SPEDC, June 1999.
3. Aziz, K., Govier, G. W., and Fogarasi, M.: “Pressure Drop in Wells Producing Oil and Gas,” J. Canadian Pet.
Tech. (Jul.-Sept. 1972) 38-48.
4. Beggs, H. D. and Brill, J. P.: “A Study of Two-Phase Flow in Inclined Pipes,” J. Pet. Tech.
5. (May 1973) 607-617.
6. Duns, H., Jr. and Ros, N. C. J.: “Vertical Flow of Gas and Liquid Mixtures in Wells,” Proc. Sixth World Pet.
Congress, Frankfurt (Jun. 19-26, 1963) Section II, Paper 22-PD6.
7. Espanol, J. H., Holmes, C. S., and Brown, K. E.: "A Comparison of Existing Multiphase Flow Methods for the
Calculation of Pressure Drop in Vertical Wells," SPE 2553 presented at the 44th Annual Fall Meeting of the
Society of Petroleum Engineers of AIME, Denver, CO (Sept. 28-Oct. 1, 1969).
8. Griffith, P.: "Two-Phase Flow in Pipes," Special Summer Program, Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
Cambridge, Massachusetts (1962).
9. Griffith, P. and Wallis, G.B.: "Two-Phase Slug Flow," J. Heat Transfer; Trans. ASME (Aug. 1961) 307-320.
10. Hagedorn, A. R. and Brown, K. E.: “Experimental Study of Pressure Gradients Occurring During Continuous
Two-Phase Flow in Small Diameter Vertical Conduits,” J. Pet. Tech. (Apr. 1965) 475- 484.
11. Lawson, J.D. and Brill, J.P.: "A Statistical Evaluation of Methods Used to Predict Pressure Losses for Multiphase
flow in Vertical Oilwell Tubing," J. Pet. Tech. (Aug. 1974) 903-914.
12. Orkiszewski, J.: “Predicting Two-Phase Pressure Drops in Vertical Pipe,” J. Pet. Tech.
13. (Jun. 1967) 829-838.
14. Sas-Jaworsky II, A.: “Coiled Tubing …Operations and Services, Part 5-Unloading Wells with Lighter Fluids”
World Oil (Mar. 1992) 36-43.
15. Tek, M. R.: “Multiphase Flow of Water, Oil, and Natural Gas Through Vertical Flow Strings,” J. Pet. Tech. (Oct.
1961) 1029-1036.
16. Vohra, I.R., Robinson, J.R., Brill, J.P.: "Evaluation of Three New Methods for Predicting Pressure Losses in
Vertical Oilwell Tubing," J. Pet. Tech. (Aug. 1974) 829-832.
Additional Readings
1. API Bulletin on Rheology and Hydraulics of Oil Well Drilling Fluids, Third Edition, (Jan. 1993).
2. Bourgoyne Jr., A. T., Chenevert, M. E., Millheim, K. K., Young Jr., F. S.: “Chap. 4: Drilling
Hydraulics” SPE Textbook Series, Vol. 2, SPE Richardson, TX, (1986), 137-156.
3. Blauer, R. E., Mitchel, B. J., and Kohleas, C. A.: “Determination of Laminar, Turbulent, and Transitional
Foam Flow Losses in Pipes” SPE 4885 presented at the 44th Annual California Regional Meeting of the
Society of Petroleum Engineers of AIME, San Francisco, CA April 4- 5, (1974).
4. Brown, P. T. and Wimberley, R. D.: “Coiled Tubing …Operations and Services, Part 10- Velocity
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Strings” World Oil (Jan. 1992) 77-80.
5. Sas-Jaworsky II, A.: “Coiled Tubing …Operations and Services, Part 4-Sand and Solids
Washing” World Oil (Mar. 1992) 71-79.
6. Turner, R. G., Hubbard, M. G., and Dukler, A. E.: “Analysis and Prediction of Minimum Flow Rate for
the Continuous Removal of Liquid from Gas Wells,” J. Pet. Tech. (Sept. 1969) 1475- 1481.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
Appendix H
Glossary
-A-
absolute pressure
The pressure measured from a vacuum. (0 psi absolute pressure = vacuum) Absolute pressure minus
atmospheric pressure equals gauge pressure. Note that it is physically impossible to have a negative absolute
pressure.
All pressures in Cerberus are gauge pressures.
annulus
The annulus is the area between the CT and the well tubulars.
application factor
Application factor serves as an additional safety factor. The actual value is multiplied by the application factor
to produce the result. For example, if string fatigue has an application factor of 2, and if the calculated fatigue is
7%, it would appear as 14%.
archive
Indicates to Cerberus that a string, reel, or job is no longer used. Archived strings, reels, and jobs do not appear
in the lists on the main manager screens unless desired.
axial force
Force applied along the length of the CT. Tension is positive. Compression is negative.
axial stress
The axial force at a given point in the CT divided by the cross-sectional area of the CT. The axial stress is part of
the Von Mises stress.
azimuth
The azimuth in well survey data is the angle from North, in degrees, of the well axis at a given point. For
example, a section of a well that goes East has an azimuth of 90 degrees.
-B-
BHA
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
In Cerberus, a bottom hole assembly (BHA) is called a tool string.
bias weld
A 45 degree weld made in the base material before the flat strip is rolled into tubing in the mill. Therefore, it is
part of the manufacturing process and cannot be performing on existing tubing.
A bias weld is usually stronger than an orbital butt weld or manual butt weld but not as strong as parent tubing.
Bingham Plastic
The model for a fluid which does not flow until a specific yield point is reached. Cement and some drilling muds
are often modeled as Bingham Plastic models.
-C-
compression
When a portion of the CT is pushed together along its axis, it is in compression. Compression is the opposite
of tension.
continuous taper
Varying wall thickness of a section of CT linearly from one end of the section to the other.
critical buckling
The point where a section of CT begins to form a sinusoidal curve in the hole. Critical buckling does not mean
that the CT cannot go further into the hole. Usually called sinusoidal buckling.
CT
An abbreviation for "coiled tubing".
default
The initial value set by the computer program if the user doesn't do anything. The program uses this
value until the user changes it. Default values help speed data input and aid consistency for values that
should always be the same.
derate
To manually lower the used life of a string to the derating factor. Used for welds and zones.
derating factor
The amount the used life of a weld or zone is reduced to. For example, a zone with a derating factor of
85% means that it has 85% of the life it would normally have.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
depth
The distance from the zero depth datum at the top of the well to the point in question. Depth can be
measured from the downhole end of a string, but depth is not the same as string position.
disconnect
Where a tool string connects to the CT. The disconnect should break before the CT. However, it should
not break during normal operations.
download
To put strings, reels, jobs, wells, tool strings, fluids, projects, and other items to a file on removable
media to share them with other people on other computers. The files must then be uploaded into
Cerberus to make use of them. (Windows cannot be used to simply copy the file, as Cerberus will not
know the file exists.)
drawdown
The difference between the bottom hole pressure at the reservoir and the reservoir pressure. The
change in pressure causes the fluid in a reservoir to flow into the well. In a killed well, there is no
drawdown because the bottom hole pressure is equal to the reservoir pressure.
-E-
e-line capable
A work reel that has connections for an electrical cable installed inside the CT string.
The minimum wall thickness of a CT string minus the wall reduction. It represents the worst case for
the actual wall thickness used in tubing life and strength calculations.
effective well
Used in force and hydraulics calculations. In general, the effective well follows the innermost tubulars
(tubing, casing, liners, and open hole).
export
Survey data and job logs can be exported to text files which can then be imported to reuse them in
different jobs, wells, or projects.
-F-
failure criterion
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
The point which Achilles uses as 100% used life for a string. Failure can be defined in two ways: crack
initiation or fracture. In crack initiation, the beginnings of a crack appears on the CT. In fracture, the crack
has propagated through the wall of the CT and the CT cannot hold pressure.
foam quality
The ratio of the volume of gas over the total volume of the fluid. A foam with a quality of 1 (one) is all
gas. A foam with a quality of 0 (zero) is all liquid. Foam quality is dependent on temperature as well as
pressure, as both affect the volume of gas.
freeboard
The distance from the top of the last wrap of coiled tubing to the outside of the flange of the reel. For
safety reasons, the reel is never completely filled with coiled tubing. Some operators recommend a
different freeboard for each coiled tubing diameter. The more freeboard, the less the reel capacity.
-G -
gauge pressure
The pressure indicated by a pressure gauge. (0 psi gauge pressure = atmospheric pressure.) Gauge
pressure plus atmospheric pressure equals absolute pressure. Note that it is possible to have a negative
gauge pressure. All pressures in Cerberus are gauge pressures.
-H -
helical buckling
The point where a section of CT begins to form a helix in the well casing. In a vertical well, helical
buckling begins as soon as any compressive load is applied. The helix introduces additional bending
stresses and friction, which can lead to lockup.
helical buckling load
The amount of force required to reach helical buckling.
hoop stress
The stress around the circumference of the CT due to inner and outer pressure. The hoop stress is part
of the Von Mises stress.
-I-
import
Survey data and job logs can be imported from a text file format for use or reuse. The opposite of
export.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
inclination
In well survey data, the angle, in degrees, between the well axis and the vertical axis at a given depth.
A vertical section of well has an inclination of 0 degrees. A completely horizontal section of well has
an inclination of 90 degrees.
- J-
JP
An abbreviation for "jointed pipe".
- K-
-L-
lockup depth
The depth, if any, at which the increased drag due to helical buckling causes the downhole end of the
tubing to stop moving into the well, even though CT may still be entering the well at the surface. If this
occurs, the bottom of the well cannot be reached and the job cannot be performed with the existing
configuration.
- M-
manual butt weld
Performed by hand to join two lengths of tubing. It is the typical method used to repair tubing in the
field. The main characteristic of manual butt welds is variability from welder to welder, and even weld
to weld. However, a good manual weld can be superior to an orbital butt weld.
measured depth
The current depth of the CT following the trajectory of the well as indicated by the depth counter at
the surface. The actual depth may be slightly more due to buckling or stretch and thermal elongation.
Note that measured depth is different from true vertical depth (TVD).
minimum wall thickness
The smallest allowable thickness for a given nominal wall thickness, per the manufacturer's
specifications. Although the actual wall thickness will, in most cases, be greater, for critical calculation
purposes, the minimum wall thickness is used to ensure that a worst-case scenario is considered.
Multiphase fluid
A fluid, generally a liquid, comprising more than one phase, such as water- or oil- based liquids, and
gas. Multiphase fluid flow is the combined flow of these different- phase fluids. Multiphase flow is a
complex factor that is important in understanding hydraulics in both oil and gas wells.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
-N-
Newtonian fluid
The model for fluids that flow in a linear manner. Few oil field fluids are truly Newtonian, but the
Newtonian model is the best known and easiest to understand. Fresh water can be modeled as a
Newtonian fluid.
nominal wall thickness
The target wall thickness sold by the manufacturer and commonly referred to by users. The actual
wall size may vary within the plus and minus specifications quoted by themanufacturer.
-O -
orbital butt weld
Performed using an automated welder to join two lengths of tubing. The resulting weld is typically more
consistent than a manual butt weld, but is not necessarily better. Orbital welders are expensive and are
not often encountered in the field.
-P -
POOH
An abbreviation for "pulling out of hole".
position
The distance measured from the reel core end of a string to the point in question. The reel core end is
at position zero. Position is not related to depth, although depth is measured from the free end of a
string.
Power Law Model
The model for fluids which do not flow in a linear manner. Many oil field fluids, includingwater-
based muds, gels, and hydrocarbons, are modeled using the Power Law model.
- Q-
- R-
radial stress
The stress through the CT wall due to inner and outer pressure. The radial stress is part of the Von
Mises stress.
reel back tension
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
The tension maintained at the reel to ensure that the tubing on the reel does not uncoil or become
slack. Reel back tension only affects the surface weight calculation, not the downhole forces, since
the tubing is held at the injector.
RIH
An abbreviation for "running in hole".
RTKB
Rotary Table Kelly Bushing. The depth reference typically used by conventional drilling rigs
when they drill a well.
-S-
section
A CT string is divided into sections which have different physical properties, such as different wall
sizes.
segment
A CT string is divided into small segments of equal length (usually 10 feet). Fatigue is calculated for each
segment.
segment length
The length of a segment, such as 10 feet. The total length of a string must be a multiple of the segment
length.
shipping spool
Used to hold a CT string for shipping purposes only. A shipping reel is not used for a job. Instead,
a work reel is used for a job.
sinusoidal buckling
The CT snaking back and forth in the form of a sine wave. Also called snake buckling or critical
buckling. Sinusoidal buckling is not critical and does not affect tubing forces calculations.
sinusoidal buckling load
The load at which the CT begins sinusoidal buckling.
stripper friction
The frictional force caused by the compression of the stripper packing elements on the tubing. This friction
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
always acts in the opposite direction of the tubing movement. Although variable, it is usually assumed to lie
in the range of 300 to 1,000 pounds of force.
surface weight
The weight measured at the surface as the CT is run into and out of the well. This weightshould stay
below the yield strength of the CT material or breaking strength of the cable, subject to a safety
factor, such as 80%.
-T-
target depth
The particular depth at which most hydraulics calculations are performed.
tension
When a portion of CT is being pulled, it is in tension. Tension is the opposite of compression.
tool
A single component in a tool string, such as a connector, nozzle, or packer.
tool string
A bottom hole assembly (BHA). It is composed of various tools.
tortuosity
The "spiraling" or "corkscrew" effect that occurs when wells are being drilled.
trip
One cycle of the string running into and out of the hole.
true vertical depth (TVD)
The absolute depth from the surface, not following the trajectory of the well.
-U -
upload
The process of importing information for a string, reel, job, well, tool string, fluid, project, or other item
from removable media. This must be done in order for Cerberus to use such existing data. Further, the item
must have been downloaded onto the removable media.
used life
Used life of a work string comes from accumulated fatigue and any corrosion. The used life of a work
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
string is represented by a percentage. A new string has 0% used life. A work string should be retired or
cut before it reaches too high a used life.
-V-
Von Mises stress
The Von Mises stress ( vm ) is a common method for describing the yielding of steel under
combined states of stress. It includes the influences of axial stress ( a ), radial stress ( r ), and
hoop stress ( h ).
vm r h
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
2 r h 2 2
-W-
wall reduction
The change in wall thickness due to exposure to service conditions such as acid jobs and sand
abrasion. In Cerberus, wall reduction is a function of the jobs the string has performed and is set for
each job in the Job Type screen of Job Manager.
work reel
Used for an actual job, as opposed to a shipping spool, which is only used for shipping or storage.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
H | Glossary
work string
A CT string which is actively used in coiled tubing operations. When a work string accumulates too much
fatigue, it may be retired and used for other purposes.
- X-
- Y-
Young's Modulus
The modulus of elasticity of the material. Young's Modulus is a measurement of how 'springy' a material is, or
how much a material can bend and still return to its original shape. Young's Modulus for steel is 30,000,000
psi.
-Z -
zero depth datum
The point from which depth is measured at the well site (depth = 0). This may be at the Master Valve,
ground level, RTKB, at the reel, or any other user-specified position.
zone
Used to flag portions of a CT string and to manually derate fatigue life
___________________________________________________________________________________________

Cerberus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cerberus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cerberus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NOV CTES Cerberus TM User Guide

Coiled Tubing, Jointed Pipe, Wireline, and Slickline

NOV Corporate Headquarters

NOV Completion & Product Solutions

B-17, Oilfield Supply Centre

About Cerberus ........................................................................................................................ iii

User Feedback ......................................................................................................................... iv

Chapter 6 ............................................................................................................................. 158

Chapter 8 ............................................................................................................................. 196

Chapter 9 ............................................................................................................................. 224

Chapter 10 ........................................................................................................................... 237

Chapter 12 ........................................................................................................................... 329

Chapter 13 ........................................................................................................................... 344

Chapter 14 ........................................................................................................................... 374

Chapter 16 ........................................................................................................................... 399

Chapter 17 ........................................................................................................................... 405

Chapter 18 ........................................................................................................................... 415

Appendix B ........................................................................................................................... 450

Appendix C .......................................................................................................................... 457

Appendix E ........................................................................................................................... 475

Appendix F ........................................................................................................................... 479

Appendix G .......................................................................................................................... 489

Appendix H .......................................................................................................................... 504

Operation System Windows 7 TM, Windows 8 TM, or Windows 10 TM

4. Download and save the software to a Windows-based computer.

Downloading Updates and/or Patches from the Internet

 To check for and download updates over the Internet

2. Exit all applications except Cerberus.

3. Find the Cerberus Main Menu.

4. From the Help menu, select Check for Updates.

Updates can also be obtained by visiting our website: www.nov.com/ctes

If problems occur while installing Cerberus, see “Contact Us” on page v.

 To run Setup to install or to update Cerberus

2. Close all running applications

The case-sensitive password information must be entered again.

5. Obtain authorization for this copy of Cerberus

2. Click All Programs > CTES > Cerberus 12.7

Figure 1 - Authorization screen

Note that if behind a firewall, this option might be unavailable

6. The program’s physical location cannot be moved when authorization is complete

1. “Backing Up and Restoring Data Files”

2. “Moving Cerberus’ Data Directory (First Computer)”

3. “Changing Cerberus’ Data Directory Location (Other Computers)”

Backing Up and Restoring Data Files

4. When the data has been restored, click OK

will lose all data that is not in the backup

a. Click the Options menu; then select Copy Data Directory

Changing Cerberus’ Data Directory Location (Other Computers)

Situation Possible Cause Action

Using Unit Sets

3. Click OK to accept the change or Cancel to reject the change.

Specifying Units Individually

 To specify an individual unit

3. Use the associated dropdown to select the desired unit

Creating Custom Unit Sets

2. Input a New Unit Set Name.

Importing/Exporting Custom Unit Sets

 To export a custom unit set

2. Select one or more unit sets to export.

3. Select the Export button